Author: Nik Ranger

Best STG44 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks, more DexertoThe STG44 has been a part of the Call of Duty franchise since the series very first entry back in 2003, and Activision brought back the iconic AR for another run in Warzone. Before MW3, the STG44 last appeared in Vanguard in 2021. Every Call of Duty League pro used the STG44 as the leading AR that season, and it’s easy to see why. The hard-hitting weapon shreds through enemies in medium to long-range engagements, and that same devastating profile transitions seamlessly to Warzone. It has emerged as the best assault rifle and one of the best weapons in the current meta, with its high damage being a big reason for that. In saying this, the STG44 is up against stiff competition and isn’t flawless by any means. However, by using a meta loadout, you can fix these issues and create a truly incredible primary weapon. Best STG44 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Heinrichter C70 Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: DR79 Combo Stock – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – Comparing the STG44’s TTK to other meta assault rifles like the SVA 545 and MTZ-556, it kills significantly faster than everything else up to 35 meters but suffers from a harsh damage drop-off outside of this range. With that in mind, our loadout plays to the STG44’s strengths by improving accuracy and firepower. The Quartermaster Suppressor and DR79 Combo Stock drastically improve recoil, at a small cost of mobility, while also suppressing outgoing fire to keep you hidden. Meanwhile, the Heinrichter C70 Long Barrel improves damage range and bullet velocity by 28%. Players can opt to use the Ferngewehr 792 Barrel instead, as it also improves recoil control, but the range benefits of that alternative barrel aren’t nearly as impactful. Next, the Jak Glassless Optic provides the best sights of any short and medium-range optic in Warzone while also being one of the very few to improve firing aim stability. Lastly, the 50 Round Drum is essential for taking on more than one enemy, especially if you play large-scale modes like Trios and Quads. Best STG44 class: Perks and equipment Perk 1: Double Time – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand – Perk 3: Tempered – Perk 4: High Alert – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – The best perks to use will vary based on playstyle, but Double Time is always a good choice, as it enhances the duration and refresh rate of Tac Sprint, letting you get around the map faster. Likewise, Sleight of Hand is another perk that you’ll get plenty of use from, speeding up reloads to avoid getting caught out in the heat of a gunfight. With the 50 Round Drum equipped, the STG44’s reload speed is quite slow, so this becomes much more valuable. Armor Plates are always hard to come by, but Tempered reduces the full armor requirement from three plates to two, fixing this problem. Finally, High Alert pings your screen when an enemy is looking at you, which removes the feeling of being helpless in your surroundings. For equipment, the two best options are the Frag Grenade and Smoke Grenade, a classic combination of defense and offense that provides both lethality and utility. How to unlock the STG44 To get the STG in MW3 and Warzone, you will have to unlock it through the Season 5 Battle Pass, with it being unlocked after completing Sector 7. You’ll need to finish Sectors One, Two, and Four before you can start working on the Seventh Sector to unlock the STG44, so getting your hands on this powerful AR does require a bit of a grind. Best STG44 alternative in Warzone Following its buffs in Season 5, the SVA 545 is more powerful than before, thanks to an improved max damage range of 36.83 meters, up from 31.75. The MCW also received a much-needed buff in the recent update, increasing its lower torso modifier. It’s not a massive change, but the AR is in a good spot and worth considering. If players need a weapon to pair with the STG or any of these alternatives, check out our guide on the best SMGs in Warzone.

Best STG44 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Treyarch/ActivisionIf you’re looking for a powerful assault rifle in Warzone that shreds enemies at medium range, you can’t go wrong with the STG44. However, you’ll need a top-tier meta loadout that pushes the weapon to its limits and luckily, we’ve got you covered. With Warzone Season 5 Reloaded shaking up the meta, it can be difficult to know which guns are worth using in the current meta. The Cooper Carbine, Grau 5.56, and XM4 are all strong choices, but it may be time to look elsewhere and pick up the STG44. This hard-hitting AR is a popular pick in Vanguard and its strengths transition perfectly into Warzone’s chaotic matches. With an impressive 2.3% pick rate, it’s currently the fourteenth most popular weapon in the game, and after receiving a buff in the May 4 patch, there’s never been a better time to use the STG44. The gun’s impressive TTK and damage range make it lethal at medium range, but you’ll need to run a meta loadout if you want to get the most out of the weapon. See the latest Call Of Duty deals here. Contents Best STG44 Warzone loadout – Best STG44 Warzone class – How to unlock the STG44 in Warzone – Alternative to the STG44 Warzone loadout – Best STG44 Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: VDD 760mm 05B – Optic: G16 2.5x scope – Stock: VDD 34S Weighted – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 7.62 Gorenko 60 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Proficiency: Vital – Kit: Fully Loaded – First of all, you’ll want to run the MX Silencer muzzle and the VDD 760mm 05B barrel to significantly increase the weapon’s accuracy and damage range. On top of this, the silencer also conceals the STG’s gunfire on the minimap, which is key in Warzone when attempting to remain undetected. After that, utilize the VDD 34S Weighted, M1941 Hand Stop, and the Polymer Grip to manage the ARs recoil pattern and allow you to get always get the first shot off on your opponent. These attachments combined with the G16 2.5x scope will allow you to lock onto targets and track their movement consistently. When it comes to bullets, make sure you run Lengthened to increase the STG’s bullet velocity, as well as the 7.62 Gorenko 60 Round Mags so you can take out multiple opponents without having to reload. Finally, finish off the loadout with Fully Loaded so you don’t have to worry about ammo, and of course, Vital so you can maximize your damage output on enemies. Best STG44 Warzone class Perks & Equipment When it comes to perks, our loadout runs the standard meta choices with EOD protecting you from explosive blasts, and Amped increasing your weapon swap speeds during intense gunfights. While Overkill is strong, we recommend taking Ghost as it ensures you’ll stay off enemy radars and gives you a better chance of surviving into the late game. If you do decide to take two primary weapons, we recommend pairing the STG44 up with the Armaguerra 43 or MP40, so you have a secondary with a lot of mobility and damage at close range. Finally, round off the loadout with a Semtex to clear our stationary opponents and the Stim for a boost of health when you need it most. How to unlock the STG44 in Warzone Luckily for players, the STG44 is unlocked automatically as soon as you jump onto Warzone and isn’t locked behind any levels. So, this means you can immediately start leveling up the weapon and begin unlocking all the best attachments available. Alternative to the STG44 Warzone loadout If you’re looking for an alternative to the STG44, consider using the BAR in Warzone. This deadly AR deals a significant amount of damage at range, but you’ll need to bolster the gun’s recoil with a set of specific attachments. Luckily, we’ve got a loadout guide that goes over the best class in the current meta, alongside all the perks and equipment you should run alongside the weapon. While it certainly isn’t as popular as the STG44, the BAR often goes under the radar for a lot of Warzone players and is definitely worth experimenting with. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone and Vanguard news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page. Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | Mac-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players | Top class setups and best weapons | 10 best Warzone players | Automaton loadout | MP40 loadout If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Best STG44 Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup ActivisionThe best STG44 class in CoD Vanguard features the strongest attachments and game-changing weapon Perks, so here’s the best STG44 Vanguard loadout to get you atop the scoreboards in Season 4. Although you may be used to how the Gunsmith works in previous Call of Duty games, Sledgehammer has tuned things in Vanguard and ramped things up a notch. This time around, you’ve got 10 different attachment types to work with in order to get the most out of your favorite gun. Everything from Ammo Type down to Weapon Proficiency will fundamentally change how your loadout works. Whether you’re after an agile build with movement speed over all else, or a lethal class focused on damage, the choice is all yours. But for the most well-rounded AR loadout in Vanguard, here’s our ultimate STG44 setup to get you ahead of everyone else in the game. Contents Best STG44 Vanguard loadout – Best STG44 Vanguard class – Best STGG44 class Vanguard tips – How to unlock the STG44 in Vanguard – Alternative to the STG44 Vanguard loadout – Best STG44 Vanguard loadout Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: VDD 760MM 05B – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: VDD 27 Precision – Underbarrel: M1941 Handstop – Magazine: 9MM 24 Rnd Fast Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip – Proficiency: Sleight of Hand – Kit: Fully Loaded – With 10 different attachment types to consider, it can be difficult figuring out where to even start. So for a comprehensive overview of this build, let’s break down every STG44 attachment to understand how they help. Up first comes the F8 Stabilizer along with the VDD 760MM 05B. Together, these combine for improved accuracy and control, as well as a slight increase in damage. These are essential in making the STG44 exceptional at medium range. Even though some of these attachments might negatively impact handling and speed, the focus of this class is ranged effectiveness. See the latest Call Of Duty deals here When it comes to picking an optic, this is purely down to your personal preference. For this build, we went with the Slate Reflector for something simple in order to avoid any huge downsides. Next, we decided to run with the VDD 27 Precision Stock to start combating the negative effects added thanks to earlier attachments. With this equipped, your ADS speed and recoil will also be improved to boot. The M1941 Handstop underbarrel complements this STG build nicely as well, adding even more recoil control to keep your shots on point. Things start to get crazy when it comes time to settle on a Magazine. For this optimal STG loadout, we’ve gone with the .30 Russian Short 20 Round Mags to drastically improve your damage. While it cuts your magazines down to just 20 bullets and even impacts your recoil somewhat, the positives definitely outweigh the negatives and allow greater control and power. With this attachment, you’ll have not just improved damage, but quicker reloads, and most importantly, improved bullet velocity. This means your shots will land much quicker than usual, helping you win just about every gunfight. To that point, Lengthened is a great Ammo Type to equip in order to further optimize bullet velocity. With this AR setup, you’ll be connecting with your shots almost instantly. Wrapping things up we have the Stippled Grip attachment for the Rear Grip of the STG44. Once again this helps improve recoil, but more importantly, it helps with initial accuracy. Last but not least we have the Perks for the STG AR. For Proficiency, we went with Sleight of Hand to improve the reload speed of the STG44. This will help you in winning gunfights as the time to kill is so fast in Vanguard. Meanwhile, for the Kit, we have Fully Loaded so that you won’t have to deal with a lack of ammo and the fear of running out in the middle of a gunfight. Best STG44 Vanguard class: Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Radar – Perk 3: Overkill – Secondary: MP40 – Lethal: Thermite Grenade – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade Dead Drop – For the remainder of your STG44 loadout, it’s crucial you select the right Perks, Equipment, and Field Upgrades to complement this deadly STG44 AR build. When it comes to Perks, there are two clear-cut options you simply can’t overlook. Both Ghost and Radar are essentially must-picks in Vanguard, as they clearly outweigh any other choice in their respective categories. Ghost keeps you off enemy minimaps when Spy Planes are flying overhead and it helps to keep you secretive, though you might want to take Ninja if you’re a sneaky player who loves flanking and sneaking up on unsuspecting enemies. Also, Radar reverts your minimap back to how it’s always worked in the CoD games. When enemies fire unsilenced weapons, you’ll know exactly where they are and you can go and pounce on their position. For the final Perk, this is more down to personal preference but we’ve settled on Overkill as Vanguard doesn’t allow strong secondary weapons like Cold War did. So Overkill will allow you to apply another top weapon to your loadout if you run out of ammo for the STG or you need a quick switch. We would highly recommend the MP40 as it’s simply amazing, especially with our best loadout for it. For Equipment, the Thermite Grenade can cause a ton of damage either as a device on the ground for enemies to run into, but if you can stick someone with one, then it’s game over. Similarly, Stims are a must-pick to keep you alive and back at full health immediately after gunfights. Not only that, but it also resets your Tac Sprint as well. Dead Drop is undeniably one of the strongest Field Upgrades in Vanguard and it can’t go amiss with this AR loadout. Best STG44 class Vanguard tips The STG44 has been crowned as the best Assault Rifle in Vanguard. With that said, there are still steps you can take to maximize the weapon’s effectiveness in-game. Here are a few tips on how to effectively take advantage of our best STG44 class in Vanguard: The STG44 has a quite high damage output but not the fastest fire rate. Ideally, you should focus on getting into medium to long-range gunfights. – Perks Ghost & Radar work great in conjunction with each other. Ghost conceals you from the enemy mini-map while Radar reveals unsilenced enemies. – Vanguard’s multiplayer is incredibly fast-paced. Use Stims to constantly be on the move, flank enemies, or make a quick escape from a perilous situation. – Also, remember to always develop a playstyle that feels the best for you. With that said, if you’re still struggling to succeed with the STG44, these tips should be helpful. How to unlock the STG44 in Vanguard In order to unlock the STG44 in CoD Vanguard, all you have to do is boot up the game as it’s already unlocked at Player rank 1, which is great! However, you will have to unlock the attachments for this weapon. This shouldn’t take too long if you make use of Double XP tokens or play with the Assault and Blitz Combat Pacing. To maximize XP, also make sure to play the objective in game modes like Domination, Patrol, and Hardpoint – plus, novelty LTM playlist options like ShipHaus and certain attachments will do wonders. Alternative to the STG44 Vanguard loadout If you’re looking for an alternative to the STG44, then check out our BAR loadout. Although this Assault Rifle has a significantly slower fire rate than the STG44, it’s currently one of the most popular weapons in the game due to its high damage output. The BAR may not be as easy to use as the STG44, but once you master this weapon, it can be one of the deadliest in the game. Looking for more Call of Duty: Vanguard updates and information? Check our list of guides below: Best CoD Vanguard FOV settings | Best M1928 Vanguard loadout | Every CoD Vanguard perk | Best Vanguard controller settings | Unlock Atomic camo | Best M1916 Vanguard class loadout | Best Nikita AVT Vanguard class loadout | How to unlock KG M40 Assault Rifle in CoD Vanguard | If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Best STG44 MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks, more DexertoThe STG44 is the new king of accuracy in MW3, having the potential to become powerful yet also extremely easy to use with the right loadout. Looking to introduce a new twist to an almost century-old gun, Sledgehammer Games has modernized the STG44, bringing a classic into the 21st century. This iconic assault rifle has a long history of being powerful in Call of Duty, and Modern Warfare 3’s rendition is no exception. It offers a fairly competitive TTK at close range while also being one of the fastest-killing weapons at both medium and long range. This naturally makes the STG44 dominant in large-scale modes like Ground War and Invasion, but the historic AR is very much competitive in regular 6v6 too. While the STG44’s strengths may lend themselves more to Warzone, there’s no doubt that Modern Warfare 3’s latest assault rifle is still one of the best weapons the game has to offer. Best STG44 MW3 loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Factory Short Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: DR79 Combo Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – To take advantage of the STG44’s incredible damage range, lowering its recoil is a must. There are a range of attachments that do this, but the Quartermaster Suppressor is the best as it also suppresses outgoing fire. Combine that with the DR79 Combo Stock for an extremely accurate assault rifle that is laser-accurate at any range. While these attachments make the AR very accurate, they also reduce its handling. Unlike in Warzone, an assault rifle with slow handling isn’t viable in 6v6, so you’ll need to balance this out with the Factory Short Barrel. While this barrel slightly reduces range and recoil control, the benefits to key mobility and handling stats like ADS speed, sprint to fire speed, and sprint speed greatly outweigh the cons. You can further improve the STG44’s handling by equipping the DR-6 Handstop. This meta underbarrel improves a range of mobility and handling stats to make the WW2 AR feel much more snappy and responsive. Last but certainly not least is the JAK Glassless Optic, which remains the best optic in Modern Warfare 3 to this day. Not only does it provide great sights that make it easier to spot enemies, but it’s also one of the very few optics that boosts firing aim stability. Best STG44 class: Perks and Equipment Vest: Gunner Vest – Gloves: Marksman Gloves – Boots: Covert Sneakers – Gear: Ghost T/V Camo – Field Upgrade: Portable Radar – Lethal: Sticky Grenade – Tactical: Stun Grenade – The Gunner Vest is the best vest to use with the STG44, as it gives you more ammo and improves reload speed. Best of all, it lets you use a second primary weapon, with a dominant close-range option like the WSP Swarm being an ideal choice to fill this slot. Most of the time, you’ll be playing slower with the STG44, trying to take advantage of its great range. For this, the Marksman Gloves are ideal, as they reduce idle sway and flinch, making it easier to land shots from a distance. The Portable Radar is also useful for this playstyle as it scans a chosen area for enemies, making it much harder for them to flank you without drawing attention. You can’t always just sit around, though. There will be times when aggression is preferred, a playstyle that is greatly aided by Covert Sneakers and Ghost T/V Camo. When coupled with a suppressor, these perks make you practically invisible, hiding you from the enemy’s radar at all times and silencing your footsteps. As for tactical equipment, a Stun Grenade is as reliable as ever for immobilizing enemies and making them easy to beat. Similarly, a Sticky Grenade can be used to pressure enemies out of cover, lowering their health and leaving them vulnerable. With an accurate enough throw, you can even hit them directly and walk away, knowing all too well they don’t have long to live. How to unlock the STG44 The STG44 can be unlocked by completing Sector 7 of the Season 5 Battle Pass. Alternatively, extracting the new SMG in Zombies will also unlock it, which is the fastest method if someone is willing to drop it for you. Best STG44 alternative in MW3 If high-accuracy assault rifles are your thing, the MCW has been dominating that category since day one. The STG44 gives the veteran a run for its money, but you can’t go wrong with a gun that has dominated the pro scene since launch. Some other top-tier assault rifles include the BP50, MTZ-556, and SVA 545. All of these play a key role in MW3’s meta and are amongst the best weapons in Modern Warfare 3’s gun list.

Best STEN Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe STEN has flown under the radar compared to some of the other Vanguard weapons in Warzone, but with the right loadout, perks, and attachments, this enhanced mobility SMG build can be an absolute game-changer. Vanguard’s STEN is a bit of a sleeper pick in the current state of things. On its own, the gun does fall short of the MP40, but with a big nerf incoming for the current king of the hill, this ‘little brother’ option is primed to steal the spotlight. From the most useful perks to the optimal attachments, here’s everything you need to take over Caldera with the best version of the STEN in Warzone Pacific. Contents Best STEN Warzone loadout – Best STEN Warzone class – How to unlock the STEN in Warzone – Alternative to the STEN Warzone loadout – Best STEN Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Hockenson 174mm B11S – Optic: Hockenson IS22S – Stock: Gawain Para – Underbarrel: Carver Foregrip – Magazine: 7.62 Gorenko 32 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Proficiency: Acrobatic – Kit: Quick – First of all, you’ll want to equip the Recoil Booster muzzle, the Carver Foregrip, and the Hockenson 174mm barrel to keep the gun’s natural recoil in check. Together these attachments work to keep the kick levels down and make it a more user-friendly experience. After that, the Gawain Para and Fabric Rear Grip will boost your mobility and make shooting on the run a little bit easier with buffs to movement speed and some increased hipfire accuracy. As for bullets, the STEN doesn’t fare so well at long range, so Lengthened helps shore up that weakness. The 7.62 Gorenko 32 Round Mags also bring a little bit of all the earlier buffs along with an increased fire rate, making them the perfect complement. Finally, round off the loadout with the Acrobatic perk to increase your natural movement and sprinting speed. Follow that up with Quick for an extra burst that will make you next-to-impossible to hit while on the run. Best STEN Warzone class: Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Stim – Sticking with the game’s perk META is still the way to go with STEN. This means running EOD for a little bit of extra protection from incoming explosives as well as taking Overkill instead of Ghost so that you have a long-range alternative when the time comes. Whether that’s an AR or a sniper is up to you and whatever you’re comfortable playing with. For your Lethal and Tactical slots respectively, a Throwing Knife and a Stim are the quickest ways to finish off opponents and get back into the fight as fast as possible. How to unlock the STEN in Warzone Unlocking the STEN in Warzone and Vanguard is a really simple task, as it only requires players to reach level 10. It’s faster to unlock the gun by playing a few public matches in Vanguard, but a few Rebirth Island matches could also do the trick if the traditional Call of Duty experience isn’t your thing. Alternatives to the STEN in Warzone If the STEN is coming up short for you but you’re still looking for another SMG to try, the PPSH-41 is another excellent option. Featuring the best hipfire spread in the game, this lightning-fast sub will also keep you on the move while controlling fights strictly through your ability to shoot faster than the opponent. That’s it for the best STEN class in Warzone Pacific! If you’re interested in seeing more of our Warzone content, check out some of these guides and lists below: Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | Mac-10 loadout | Top 20 highest-earning players | Top class setups and best weapons | 10 best Warzone players

Best STEN CoD Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup Sledgehammer GamesCall of Duty: Vanguard has plenty of powerful weapons, but the STEN is something of a hidden gem amongst the SMGs. Here’s the best class to use if you’re looking to take over a lobby. Vanguard arrived with one of the most stacked submachine gun offerings in franchise history, and it can be difficult to tell exactly which direction to go in when building your loadout. While other guns have stolen much of the spotlight so far, the STEN is a sleeper pick amongst its more-flashy brethren. If you’re looking for an alternative to the game’s popular MP40 and Type 100 loadouts, then our STEN build has you covered. Contents Best STEN loadout attachments – Best STEN class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) – Best STEN class Vanguard tips – How to unlock the STEN in Vanguard – Alternatives to STEN Vanguard loadout – Best STEN Vanguard loadout Muzzle: Mercury Silencer – Stock: Hockenson S323 Foregrip – Underbarrel: M1930 Strife – Magazine: .45 ACP 20 Round Fast Mag – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip – Proficiency: Sleight of Hand – Kit: Quick – The base of this loadout is all about staying up close and personal with the opposing team. The Mercury Silencer will keep enemies guessing which angle you’re coming from, while the Hockenson s323 Foregrip and M1930 Strife make it as easy as possible to clean up those face-to-face gunfights by making the gun easier to control. Our picks of the Stippled Grip, Sleight of Hand proficiency, and Quick kit are all about maintaining the speed of play necessary for staying in the enemy team’s face. The .45 20 Round Fast Mag will have you reloading more often than usual, but that’s less of a problem since these other pieces help you get behind cover, finish the animation faster, and prep you to lock onto incoming enemies much faster. Lengthened may not make a huge difference in the class’ performance, but it gives the gun a fighting chance if you get caught out in the open. Best STEN Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ninja – Perk 2: Radar – Perk 3: Lightweight – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: Gammon Bomb – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Dead Silence – The perks for this loadout are built to support the gun’s previously established strong suits. The STEN won’t be dominating any long-range fights, but its close-quarters capabilities are enhanced with the inclusion of these picks. Ninja gives players more freedom to creep around the map without being given away by audio cues, and the enhanced movement speed from Lightweight allows you to cover ground in a shorter amount of time. Using both of them together will pair nicely with the additional information given by Radar, which highlights enemies on your minimap akin to the way un-silenced weapons used to show up in previous titles. The Machine Pistol isn’t a key part of the class, but it does offer a good alternative to forcing a reload of your primary if you’re stuck in a jam. Likewise, the Gammon Bomb and Stim could be swapped out for other options, but the immediate explosion of the bomb combined with the handiness of instant health regen are easy ways to bail yourself out of bad situations. Dead Silence is the optimal field upgrade as it will partially make up for the lack of Ghost by providing some of the same effects for a short time. Best STEN class Vanguard tips The STEN may not be the most popular SMG in Vanguard, but it has many promising traits. If you’re just trying out this weapon and loadout for the very first time, here are some tips to help you maximize its effectiveness in game: The STEN is an SMG with a fast fire rate. This makes it especially useful at close ranges, but not as effective in long ranged engagements. Try to close the distance between you and your enemy as much as possible. – Perks such as Lightweight & Ninja will be incredibly useful in helping you move around the map faster, while also keeping you undetected by enemies. – Radar gives you the ability to see unsilenced targets on the mini-map. This will allow you to flank unsuspecting enemies, which is ideal when using an SMG suited for close ranged engagements. – Remember that while you can engage in medium to long ranged gunfights with the STEN, enemies that are using Assault Rifles and LMGs will inherently have a big advantage. This is why we recommend using perks and field upgrades that support a stealthy, and even aggressive playstyle that allow you to close the distance quickly. How to unlock the STEN Players don’t have to wait long to unlock the STEN as it’s only locked behind the Level 10 benchmark. Objective-based game modes like Domination and Hardpoint are good for racking up experience and clearing those early levels quickly, so pick your favorite Combat Pacing and dive into one of those modes to begin that short climb up the ladder. Alternatives to STEN loadout There are plenty of powerful options other than the STEN. While the MP-40 seems to be dominating in pro play, the PPSH is also a viable alternative for close-range play. Featuring an unmatched rate of fire, our PPSH loadout is will have you crushing teams before you even know what happened.

Best STB 556 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisonThe STB 556 is a closed bolt AR with a deadly TTK that thrives at medium-range in Warzone 2 and can devastate enemies with ease, but you’ll need a meta loadout to maximize the gun’s potential. Picking an AR in Warzone 2 is extremely difficult as there are countless options that all have their strengths and weaknesses. While you could opt for the laser beam ISO Hemlock or the ever-reliable TAQ-56, the STB 556 is top-tier for medium-range gunfights thanks to its lethal TTK. Not only that, the weapon has a surprisingly low amount of recoil, making it easy enough to lock onto targets and beam them down on either Al Mazrah or Ashika Island. Despite this, to make this AR top-tier you need the best STB 556 Warzone 2 loadout possible, and luckily we’ve got you covered. Contents Best STB 556 Warzone 2 loadout – Best STB 556 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the STB 556 in Warzone 2 – Best STB 556 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best STB 556 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Barrel: Bruen Turaco 686mm – Laser: VLK LZR 7MW – Optic: AIM OP-V4 – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – Magazine: 42 Round Mag – Combining the Bruen Turaco 686mm barrel and FTAC Ripper 56 underbarrel massively reduces the STB 556’s recoil. This combo results in one of the most accurate long-range weapons in Warzone 2. Using this build you should be able to easily down enemies well beyond 100 meters with some practice. Next up to have the best build use the 42 Round Mag to ensure you never run out of ammo during an intense skirmish. This is especially useful in Trios and Quads where taking out multiple opponents without having to reload is a must. Using those three attachments slows down the STB 556’s handling considerably and so it’s good to use the VLK LZR 7MW laser to mitigate this. Players who don’t want to use a visible laser should instead use the 1MW Quick Fire Laser. To round off this build you’ll want to use a good medium-range optic. The recommended choice for this is the AIM OP-V4 as it has low visual recoil and provides clear visuals when aimed in. Some good alternatives include the VLK 4.0x, Schlager 3.4x, and Cronen Mini Pro. Best STB 556 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Tracker – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – To best take advantage of this STB 556 build it is recommended to use stealthy perks. These perks allow you to track down your opponents whilst staying off the radar. The first recommended perk to use is Double Time which increases the duration of your tactical sprint by 50% and allows you to crouch faster. As the STB 556 thrives at medium range, repositioning is key, and having extra mobility will always be helpful. Next up is Tracker, an invaluable perk for aggressive players as it shows the footprints of foes which gives you the opportunity to hunt them down on Al Mazrah. This combines perfectly with Fast Hands, a perk that greatly speeds up the STB 556’s reload which is important as it only has a 42 Round Mag. Finally, running Ghost is recommended as it keeps you off enemy UAVs and radars. No matter the match, this Ultimate will always be useful and gives you the chance to catch opponents by surprise. How to unlock the STB 556 in Warzone 2 In order to unlock the STB 556 AR in Warzone 2, you need to reach level 41 overall. This shouldn’t take you long at all and it’s worth noting, you can also do this in MW2 multiplayer which makes it a lot quicker. Best STB 556 alternatives in Warzone 2 If the STB 556 doesn’t fit your style of play, consider using the TAQ-56, otherwise known as the Scar. This classic AR is versatile thanks to its strong damage output and steady recoil pattern. It’s guaranteed to be a reliable option on Al Mazrah and is unlocked at level 19, so a lot earlier than the STB 556. However, to maximize its power, you’ll need a meta loadout for the TAQ-56 and luckily, we’ve got one right here. That’s all for our STB 556 loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best STB 556 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisonThe STB 556 is a lethal AR in Modern Warfare 2 that excels in mid-range gunfights, but you’ll need a meta loadout to maximize this weapon’s power. While the Kastov 762 and M4 are both popular options in the AR category in Modern Warfare 2, it may be time to pick up the STB 556. This powerful closed-bolt AR is built for modularity and accuracy, making it perfect for tearing down foes at medium range. With a top-tier setup, the weapon can eliminate opponents in an instant, and luckily, we’ve got you covered with a meta loadout that’ll help you dominate your matches. Contents Best STB 556 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best STB 556 Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the STB 556 in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternative to the STB 556 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best STB 556 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Attachments Barrel: 18″ Bruen Guerilla – Laser: VLK LZR 7MW – Rear Grip: STIP-40 Grip – Ammunition: 5.56 High Velocity – Underbarrel: FFS Sharkfin 90 – The best STB 556 loadout in Modern Warfare 2 starts off with the 18″ Bruen Guerilla barrel that boosts the guns’ recoil control and bullet velocity. This attachment not only improves the STB’s TTK, but it also adds an extra level of stability to ensure you land as many bullets as possible on your foes. Next up, make sure to equip the STIP-40 Grip and the FFS Sharkfin 90, these will enhance the weapon’s aiming idle stability and bolster the STB’s kickback even more, making it a laser beam at medium range. After that, the VLK LZR 7MW laser is a key attachment as it keeps ADS time low, ensuring you can snap onto your foes in an instant. Finally, you’ll want to round off this loadout with the 5.56 High-Velocity ammunition so your bullets always connect with your opponent first in aggressive skirmishes. Best STB 556 Modern Warfare 2 class Base Perk 1: Scavenger – Base Perk 2: Bomb Squad – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – For starters, Scavenger is a great perk as it ensures you’ll never run out of ammo on the battlefield and if you’re looking to rack up killstreaks, it’s a perfect choice. Following that, Bomb Squad is a brilliant perk as it adds an extra level of protection from explosive killstreaks. As the STB is a highly mobile AR, it’s possible you’ll be caught out in the open by a kill streak, and this perk enhances your chances of surviving and continuing your spree. When it comes to your bonus perk, Fast Hands is a strong option as you want to be able to switch to your secondary quickly just in case a gunfight takes a turn for the worse. For your Ultimate, we recommend High Alert as it ensures you’ll never be caught off-guard by pesky opponents. This will make it extremely difficult for enemies to lock you down and force opponents to take fights on your terms. As for equipment, a Semtex will always come in handy for flushing enemies out of power positions and a Stim is perfect for a boost of health when you need it most. How to unlock the STB 556 in Modern Warfare 2 In order to unlock the STB 556 in Modern Warfare, you need to reach level 41 which shouldn’t take you very long at all if you’re grinding multiplayer. As soon as you hit the rank, you’ll get your hands on this deadly AR and you can start dominating matches. Alternative to the STB 556 Modern Warfare 2 loadout If the STG 556’s playstyle isn’t for you in Modern Warfare 2, then consider checking out the Kastov 762. This devastating AR is MW2’s AK47 and as you would expect, it packs a punch and makes short work of foes if you can control its recoil. With a top-tier setup, the Kastov 762 can be a force to be reckoned with, and luckily, we’ve got all the details you need right here. Now that you have the best STG 556 loadout, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Modern Warfare 2: All Modern Warfare 2 beta maps and game modes | How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in the Modern Warfare 2 Beta | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Static-HV Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks, more DexertoThe Static-HV is a great Warzone SMG that performs particularly well at medium range, especially when used with a meta loadout built to dominate lobbies in both battle royale and Resurgence. Added in Season 5, the Static-HV is Call of Duty’s rendition of the Kel-Tec P50. Much like its real-world counterpart, this SMG features a fast fire rate and a large magazine. It also offers excellent mobility stats and fast handling, making it one of the most well-rounded submachine guns in the game. One drawback to the Static-HV is that its TTK is a little slower than competitors like the Superi 46 and FJX Horus. However, its impressive versatility and low recoil make it a powerful sniper support weapon and a generally competitive SMG. In many ways, the Static-HV plays similarly to the FSS Hurricane, albeit with a far superior TTK and damage profile. Those who enjoyed using the now-forgotten MW2 SMG back in the day will feel right at home with its successor. Best Static-HV Warzone loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Garrote-8 Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Spry 24 Light Stock – Underbarrel: JAK Slash – It’s best to build the Static-HV to be as versatile as possible, and the Garrote-8 Long Barrel does just that, boosting the SMG’s effective range and bullet velocity by 25%. However, a big downside of this otherwise perfect barrel is that it greatly reduces mobility. To fix this problem, equip the Spry 37 Light Stock, which keeps the Static-HV feeling snappy and responsive, albeit at the cost of added recoil. Similarly, the JAK Slash underbarrel improves Sprint Speed, negating the biggest con of our chosen barrel. Thankfully, this increased gun kick is hardly noticeable, as the Static-HV has such low recoil. This becomes even more true when using the Quartermaster Suppressor, which provides a 10% improvement to vertical recoil and 23% to horizontal recoil. A big flaw of the Static-HV is its clumsy iron sights, which can be tricky to use at the best of times. Therefore, a meta optic like the JAK Glassless Optic is extremely useful, as it makes spotting and tracking enemies much easier. Best Static-HV class: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand – Perk 3: Tempered – Perk 4: High Alert – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Double Time is a must-have perk, as it lets you quickly traverse Warzone’s maps. Equally, Sleight of Hand improves reload speed, reducing downtime between gunfights and making it less likely you’ll get caught reloading. However, Warzone isn’t just about getting kills; resource management is just as important. Tempered helps a lot in this regard, reducing the amount of armor plates needed for a full heal from 3 to 2. This not only helps save plates for when they are needed most but also speeds up the healing process, letting you get back into the fight faster. High Alert is a very popular option in the community, and for good reason. Getting extra information on enemy whereabouts whenever they aim at you isn’t just great for awareness, but it also reduces the chances of being downed without getting a chance to react. A Throwing Knife and Smoke Grenade are the best equipment you can use. A Throwing Knife lets you quickly finish off downed targets, while a Smoke Grenade helps create cover in a pinch, which is especially useful in late-game scenarios where you’ll often need to cross exposed, open areas. How to unlock the Static-HV The Static-HV can be unlocked by completing Sector 6 of the Season 5 Battle Pass. Alternatively, extracting the new SMG in Zombies will also unlock it, which is a great method if you have a friend willing to drop it for you. Best Static-HV alternative in Warzone The AMR9 has a lot in common with the Static-HV, with both having slightly slower TTKs but great accuracy and low recoil to make up for it. Arguably, the Static-HV is better due to its fast handling, but the AMR9 is still an underrated weapon that serves a clear role. For more top-tier alternatives, check out the Best SMGs and Best ARs that are dominating the Warzone Meta right now. You’ll also want to stay on top of the Weekly Challenges and Ranked Play rewards that are up for grabs this season.

Best Static-HV MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks, more DexertoThe Static-HV is a strong weapon in MW3 regardless of how you build it, but a meta loadout turns it into one of the best weapons in multiplayer. Introduced in Season 5, the Static-HV is a powerful SMG that ranks amongst the best options in 6v6. This is largely thanks to its impressive versatility, with it being one of the most well-rounded submachine guns in Modern Warfare 3. Its greatest strengths are its large magazine, fast fire rate, and rapid mobility. These combine to make the Static-HV a great option for rushing and flanking, while its low recoil means you can stretch out its range when necessary. In practice, the Static-HV looks and feels a lot like a superpowered version of the FSS Hurricane. Those who missed using the MW2 gun, which is far from competitive in this year’s game, will love this powerful successor. Best Static-HV MW3 loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Auger 840 Light Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: Paracord Grip – Rear Grip: Thar-V1.2 Grip – Ideally, you want the Static-HV to feel as mobile as possible while retaining its excellent recoil control and handling. The Paracord Grip is the most impactful attachment for this, having no downsides yet improving multiple key stats like sprint to fire speed and horizontal recoil. Likewise, the Thar-V1.2 Grip also has no cons, with it being a purely beneficial attachment. This rear grip improves hipfire and Tactical Stance accuracy, giving the SMG a boost in close-range gunfights where these are often preferred. Next is the Quartermaster Suppressor, a muzzle that silences outgoing fire and reduces recoil by up to 23%. It does slow down ADS Speed and sprint to fire speed, but these are already so fast that it hardly matters, especially with the Auger 840 Light Barrel equipped, which boosts these stats and more to make the Static-HV hypermobile. Finally, the Static-HV’s iron sights aren’t ideal, as they don’t provide clear sightlines and can be rather obstructive. To get around this, use a meta optic like the JAK Glassless Optic. While this is the community’s preferred choice, other good options include the MORS Dot Sight, Cronen Mini Pro, and Slate Reflector. Best Static-HV class: Perks and Equipment Vest: Engineer Vest – Gloves: Commando Gloves – Boots: Covert Sneakers – Gear 1: Ghost T/V Camo – Gear 2: Compression Plate – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical: Shock Stick (x2) – The Engineer Vest is the most versatile vest in multiplayer, providing four perks, both lethal slots, and a Field Upgrade. Additionally, it lets you spot enemy equipment through walls, making it less likely that you stumble into someone else’s Claymore or Proximity Mine for an untimely death. You’ll also want to equip both Covert Sneakers and Ghost T/V Camo to take advantage of this loadout’s suppressor. These meta perks combine to silence your footsteps and stop you from appearing on enemy UAVs. This stealthy combo makes flanking and repositioning without being noticed much easier, which is great for racking easy kills. For situations where you can’t catch enemies off guard, the Commando Gloves and Compression Plate perks come in clutch. These provide a range of useful benefits for taking gunfights, including a faster sprint to fire speed, the ability to reload while sprinting, and instant health regen after every kill. While your choice of equipment largely comes down to personal preference, a Shock Stick and Drill Charge work well together. These are both powerful tools to punish stationary players by either electrocuting them or blowing them up. Either way, you can use them to pressure campers who refuse to move. How to unlock the Static-HV The Static-HV can be unlocked by completing Sector 6 of the Season 5 Battle Pass. Alternatively, extracting the new SMG in Zombies will also unlock it, which is the fastest method if you know someone willing to drop it for you. Best Static-HV alternative in MW3 Much like the Static-HV, the Rival-9 is an extremely mobile SMG that performs well both up close and at medium range. The Rival-9 has quite a lot more recoil than the Static-HV, but makes up for that with its superior handling stats. These aren’t the only meta SMGs you can use, with the likes of the Superi 46, FJX Horus, and WSP-9 all being highly competitive options in current meta, For a better idea of what weapons are available, check out MW3’s full gun list.

Best SP-X 80 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisonPlayers discovered a one-shot kill SP-X 80 loadout, vaulting the underrated sniper rifle back into contention. You need the best possible loadout to make the most of the mobile rifle. Infinity Ward brought back one-shot sniping in Season 3. The MCPR-300, Victus XMR, and FJX Imperium could take down enemies with one bullet if they had explosive ammunition. Season 3’s explosive ammunition change essentially made any other sniper rifle irrelevant. The Signal 50 still remained somewhat relevant, but nothing else warranted a selection besides those four. Everything changed in Season 4, as Warzone 2 community members crowned the SP-X 80 as the “Kar98 2.0” after discovering a one-shot kill loadout. Let’s jump right into what you need to know about the newly discovered overpowered SP-X 80 loadout. Contents Best SP-X 80 Warzone 2 loadout – Best SP-X 80 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the SP-X 80 in Warzone 2 – Best SP-X 80 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best SP-X 80 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Barrel: 22.5’ Elevate-11 – Laser: FSS OLE-V Laser – Ammunition: .300 Incendiary – Stock: Max DMR Precision – Rear Grip: Schlager Match – Mobility and speed set the SP-X 80 apart from other one-shot kill sniper rifles. We decided to lean into that and maximize its effectiveness in shorter-range engagements, perfect for Vondel or Ashika Island. The 22.5′ Elevate-11 barrel improves ADS and movement speed at the cost of recoil, damage range, and bullet velocity. Along a similar thought process, the FSS OLE-V Laser and Max DMR Precision stock also improve ADS speed, and the stock improves aiming stability. Finally, the Schlager Match improves ADS and sprint to fire speed at the cost of recoil control. Best SP-X 80 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical Equipment: Smoke Grenade – For Base Perks, Double Time is useful as it doubles your tactical sprint duration, making getting around both Al Mazrah and Vondel faster. Using Overkill to run a secondary that covers the SO-14 weaknesses like a meta SMG is also recommended. Fast Hands ensures you are less likely to get caught while reloading and works well with Overkill as it increases weapon swap speed. For the Ultimate Perk, High Alert is a superb choice as it provides free intel by highlighting the direction of enemy players aiming at you from behind. With Warzone 2’s short TTK, this is one of the few ways to give yourself enough time to react before being downed. Equipment is flexible as there are several strong choices but a Drill Charge and Smoke Grenade are the top picks here. Drill Charges are excellent for flushing out players from hard-to-reach areas, while Smoke Grenades allow you to reposition through open spaces without being punished. How to unlock the SP-X 80 in Warzone 2 In order to unlock the SP-X 80 in Warzone 2, you’ll need to level the LA-B 330 to rank 17. This will give you access to the powerful sniper and allow you to start unlocking all the attachments. Best SP-X 80 alternatives in Warzone 2 If the SP-X 80 doesn’t fit your style of play, consider checking out MCPR-300, another top-tier sniper for long-range engagements. Not only is this rifle easy to use, but with the correct attachments, it also one-shot kills enemies, making it perfect for dominating foes on Al Mazrah. To maximize its potential, check out our dedicated meta guide that goes over the best attachments for the MCPR-300. That’s all for our SP-X 80 loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best SP-X 80 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisionDespite the SP-X 80 being one of the last available Sniper Rifles in Modern Warfare 2, it’s still one of the strongest snipers out there – as long as you use the right loadout. Here’s the best SP-X 80 Modern Warfare 2 loadout along with the best perks, equipment, and attachments. The SP-X 80 is one of the best snipers for quick scoping and is arguably one of the best weapons in the game, especially if you prefer staying back and taking the enemy out quickly and efficiently. However, this fantastic sniper can only reach its full potential with the right loadout. We’ve compiled the best loadout, perks, and equipment so you can stay at the top of your game with a weapon that’s as powerful as it can be. Here’s the best SP-X 80 Modern Warfare 2 loadout so you can get back to dominating the battlefield. Contents Best SP-X 80 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best SP-X 80 Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the SP-X 80 in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternatives to the SP-X 80 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best SP-X 80 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Barrel: 18.5″ Bryson LR Factory – Muzzle: Nilsound 90 – Rear Grip: Schlager Match Grip – Stock: Max DMR Precision – Laser: FSS OLE-V Laser – The SP-X 80 is ideal for quick scoping so ADS speed needs to be at the forefront of a loadout. This is why we recommend using the 18.5″ Bryson LR Factory barrel which will dramatically increase your aim down sight speed. The same element is also improved through the Schlager Match Grip which touches on both ADS speed and your sprint-to-fire time, perfect for any quick scoper. However, with all the ADS, you still need to look into improving the stability on the SP-X 80. We recommend using the Max DMR Precision stock to improve ADS again but also focus on enhancing your aiming stability for those quick but accurate shots. While optional and risky when aiming down the sight, we suggest attaching the FSS OLE-V Laser for more ADS, sprint to fire speed, and aiming stability with very few negatives, aside from being visible when aiming. Lastly, the Nilsound 90 is a great silencer with range-extending capabilities allowing you to thrive from any distance. Best SP-X 80 Modern Warfare 2 class Base Perk 1: Tracker – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Focus – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Proximity Mine – Tactical: Stim – The right perks and equipment are vital for a sniper in Modern Warfare 2. That’s why we recommend using Tracker and Battle Hardened. Tracker will allow you to carefully follow the enemy from behind whereas Battle Hardened will keep you safe from those frustrating grenades. When it comes to the bonus perk, Focus is the best to choose. It helps your flinch when aiming and extends your hold breath duration to keep those shots accurate. How to unlock the SP-X 80 in Modern Warfare 2 Unfortunately, the SP-X 80 is relatively complicated to unlock in Modern Warfare 2. The first thing you’ll need to do is reach level seven. Once you’ve done that the SP-R 208 Marksman Rifle will be unlocked. Use that until it gets to level 13. Once you’ve done that, you will unlock the SA-B 50 Marksman Rifle. Play with that gun until it reaches level 16. Then, the LA-B 330 Sniper will unlock. Use that until it reaches level 17 and the SP-X 80 will be yours. In summary, to unlock the SP-X 80 in Modern Warfare 2, follow these steps: Reach player level seven – Level the SP-R 208 to level 13 – Level the SA-B 50 to Level 16 – Level the LA-B 330 to level 17 – Unlock the SP-X 80 – Alternatives to the SP-X 80 Modern Warfare 2 loadout With the SP-X 80 taking so long to unlock, one of the best alternatives is the MCPR-300 sniper. It’s the first sniper you unlock and can certainly pack a punch when needed. Alternatively, if you prefer something a bit more up close and personal, the LM-S Marksman Rifle is a great use of power and speed. Now you know the best SP-X 80 loadout in Modern Warfare 2, you can get right back to stealthily wiping out the enemy. While loading up a game, take a look at some of our other handy Modern Warfare 2 guides: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best SP-R208 Warzone loadout class: Attachments, setup, perks Activision / Infinity WardThe SP-R208 may not be one of Warzone Pacific’s obvious contenders for every loadout, but it’s definitely still worth bringing into your matches to dominate your opponents in Caldera or Rebirth. Warzone Season 3 has shaken up the game’s meta and players are frantically experimenting with different weapons to try and see if there are any hidden gems. The SPR-208 is a fellow Marksman Rifle, like the now nerfed Kar98K, and it’s perfect with an SMG or AR alongside it, providing players with kill potential from a distance. If you’re a fan of Marksman Rifles or just want to see how lethal this weapon is, then you’ll want to add the SP-R208 to your collection and give it this loadout to make it one of the best Sniper Rifle loadouts in the game. In order to help you get the most out of this gun, we’ve put together a beastly loadout that you can take into matches of CoD Warzone. Contents Best SP-R208 Warzone loadout – Best SP-R208 Warzone class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the SP-R208 in Warzone – Alternative to the SP-R208 Warzone loadout – Best SP-R208 Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: SP-R 26” – Optic: Variable Zoom Scope – Ammunition: .338 Lapua Mag 5-R Mags – Bolt Assembly: Sloan KR-600 Feather – To begin with, the SP-R208 rifle needs a Monolithic Suppressor, a go-to attachment for most guns, to conceal our shots and keep our position secure. Maintaining a position of pure secrecy will win you a fight before your opponent even realizes where you are. Having the SP-R 26″ barrel improves the weapon’s damage and accuracy making one-shots easier and reducing the weapon’s TTK. Whereas the Variable Zoom Scope just provides us with a bit of flexibility with regards to our range and aiming zone. To round off this loadout, we suggest adding the .338 Lapua Mag 5-R Mags as they bump up the weapon’s bullet velocity stat and it means that bullets will fly true. The SP-R208-exclusive attachment, the Sloan KR-600 Feather, will increase the weapon’s fire rate, making it a more viable option if you need an extra shot or two. Best SP-R208 Warzone class: Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: MP40 – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Lethal: Semtex – E.O.D is a classic Warzone Perk that still slaps in Warzone Pacific and we recommend it to tank explosives. Overkill allows us to have another primary in case an enemy gets too close and the MP40 will do just the trick. If you do get into a predicament that needs you to have your secondary in your hands, then Amped will allow that to happen much quicker. For our Tactical and Lethal Equipment, we think it’s a fairly easy decision as the Heartbeat Sensor, even in its nerfed Warzone Pacific form, is still an invaluable piece of tech that can give you an edge when rooting out an enemy. Whilst Semtex is a great explosive device to make your opponent move, cause them damage, and even down if you stick them with one. How to unlock the SP-R208 in Warzone For those who didn’t unlock the SP-R208 in the Battle Pass when it was available, you’ll need to get two longshot kills that are headshots in five different matches with a Sniper or Marksman Rifle. Unfortunately, this challenge is not easy but with enough patience and attempts, you’ll be able to pull it off. There’s no denying this is a tough challenge, but with enough practice at long-range, picking up kills with a sniper will gradually get easier. Alternative to the SP-R208 loadout If you’re looking for an alternative loadout to the SP-R208, check out our Kar98 loadout. It has been nerfed though, so you might be better off trying the ZRG 20mm or HDR instead. All three options have different characteristics and it’s worth trying them all to see what works best for you. If you want to try out some different weapons in Warzone, check out our full list of best loadouts for every gun. Here are even more guides for you to check out too: Grau 5.56 | MP5 | Vargo 52 | Welgun | Best Warzone Assault Rifles and loadouts| Best Warzone Sniper Rifles and loadouts | Best Warzone SMGs and loadouts |Best controller settings | Highest-earning Warzone players

Best SP-R 208 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe SP-R 208 has always been a popular Marksman Rifle and considering its power, it can easily dominate the early Warzone 2 meta. So, here is the best SP-R 208 loadout in Warzone 2 along with its ideal attachments and Perks. Warzone 2 is finally upon us and is set to create a whole new battle royale experience for players worldwide. While there are a bunch of new features that have debuted with the sequel, it ultimately boils down to the fact of which gun you are using. The SP-R 208 is one such weapon that’s quite popular in both Warzone and Modern Warfare 2. This Marksman Rifle has enough power to eliminate enemies from long ranges and can do the same in the sequel as well. So, here’s our best SP-R 208 loadout in Warzone 2 below, along with the ideal combination of attachments, Perks, and equipment. Contents Best SP-R 208 Warzone 2 loadout – Best SP-R 208 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the SP-R 208 in Warzone 2 – Best SP-R 208 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best SP-R 208 Warzone 2 loadout Muzzle: ZLR Talon 5 – Barrel: 12.5″ Carbon Barrel – Optic: HMW-20 Optic – Stock: ZRL T70 Pad Extension – Ammunition: 7.62 High Velocity – Since Warzone 2 is still in its early stages, knowing the foolproof meta loadout is a bit far off. However, considering the fact that SP-R 208 is mostly used for long-range gunfights in the game, a loadout providing adequate damage and bullet velocity would be ideal. The first attachment we’re starting our best SP-R 208 loadout is with the ZLR Talon 5 Muzzle. It improves the rifle’s bullet velocity and damage range while suppressing the sound at the same time. This means opponents will have a hard time locating your position. Alongside that, the barrel we’ve chosen is the 12.5″ Carbon Barrel as it boosts movement speed and ADS speed. While choosing Optics comes down to personal preference, we’ve opted for the HMW-20 Optic here. It gives you enough zoom while leaving a bit of headroom outside of the circumference of the scope to alert you of enemies. The ZRL T70 Pad Extension Stock helps to improve ADS and Sprint speeds, bringing it more in line with those fast sniper loadouts that were so popular in Warzone 1. Lastly, 7.62 High Velocity Ammunition helps bullets travel faster, meaning a little less measurement is needed to get those long-distance downs. Best SP-R 208 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Bomb Squad – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical Equipment: Flash Grenades – When it comes to Perks in Warzone 2, we’d recommend equipping Overkill to bring along another primary weapon. The SP-R 208 is dominant at mid to long-range, so adding an Assault Rifle like the M4 will give you an edge in close to mid-range fights. The next Perk we’d recommend is the Bomb Squad as it protects you from incoming explosives, which have always played a huge part in the CoD battle royale. Fast Hands as the bonus Perk gives you the option to reload and switch between your two weapons quickly, similar to the ever-popular Amped from Warzone 1. Ghost has been one of the meta Perks in the original Warzone and we’d recommend the same in Warzone 2 as well. This ultimate Perk makes you go unnoticed in the enemy’s radar and opens up possibilities of attacking from different angles. The combination of Semtex and Flash Grenades will help you to relocate and disorientate players before you head to send them to Gulag. How to unlock the SP-R 208 in Warzone 2 In order to unlock and use the SP-R 208 in Warzone 2, you’ll need to reach Rank 7. Try to survive for a prolonged period as it will reward you with enough XP to unlock the weapon in a couple of matches. You may also unlock this weapon by playing a few multiplayer games in Modern Warfare 2 and reaching Rank 7. Either way, as it’s so early on, you shouldn’t have to wait long to get playing with the SP-R. Best SP-R 208 alternatives in Warzone 2 Choosing the perfect long-range weapon may require a ton of experiments. So, if you feel the SP-R 208 isn’t working for you, you may opt to switch to the MCPR-300 Sniper Rifle. However, if you want a weapon that provides more mobility, the EBR-14 could be the way to go. For more on Warzone 2, be sure to check out our other guides: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best SP-R 208 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & Perks ActivisionModern Warfare 2’s SP-R 208 Marksman Rifle may not be the most conventional weapon to use in the game but it can still pack a punch with the right loadout. Here’s the best SP-R 208 loadout and class including the best attachments, Perks, and equipment. With over 40 unique weapons to choose from in Modern Warfare 2, finding the right gun for you can be a challenge, especially since there are so many powerful weapons available. One such weapon is the understated SP-R 208. It’s a powerful Marksman Rifle with the capabilities to easily quickscope the enemy back to their spawn point. However, to do so, you’ll need the right loadout. That’s why we’ve compiled the best SP-R loadout in Modern Warfare 2 along with the best Perks, attachments, and equipment to keep you in control of the battlefield. If you’re looking for a powerful Warzone 2 SP-R 208 loadout instead, we’ve got a perfect choice. Contents Best SP-R 208 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best SP-R 208 Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the SP-R 208 in Modern Warfare 2 – Best SP-R 208 alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best SP-R 208 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Barrel: 12.5″ Carbon Barrel – Optic: Forge Tac Delta 4 – Stock: ZRL T70 Pad Extension – Comb: Aim-assist 406 – Bolt: FSS ST87 Bolt – The SP-R 208 is the perfect quickscoping weapon in MW2, but however you choose to play, ADS and mobility are essential to unlocking the potential of this gun. We start our loadout with the 12.5″ Carbon Barrel, which reduces the time it takes to look down the sight and general movement speed. For the Optic, Forge Tac Delta 4 which provides extra magnification to make it easier to land headshots at mid to long range. Then we’ve got the ZRL T70 Pad Extension for another buff to ADS speed so you can snap onto enemies as quickly as possible. The Aim-assist 406 also works nicely with this build as it decreases the sprint-to-fire time, allowing you to be more reactive while running around the map. Finally, we’ve gone for the FSS ST87 Bolt, which drastically decreases how long it takes to rechamber after a shot. Best SP-R 208 Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Scavenger – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal Equipment: Drill Charge – Tactical Equipment: Flash Grenades – If you’re not 100% accurate with the SP-R 208 it’s easy to burn through ammo quickly, so Scavenger is ideal for picking up extra bullets on the go. We also recommend Overkill to bring a second primary weapon along, preferably an SMG like the Fennec 45. For the Bonus Perk, Fast Hands makes switching between your two primaries quick and easy, while also decreasing reload times so you’re never out of the action for long. Then, you should equip Ghost to stay away from enemy UAVs while you’re rushing around the map. Other players may duck into cover to avoid your fire, but using Drill Charges can quickly flush them out even if you’re outside their building. We’ve paired them with Flash Grenades to disorientate enemies while capturing objectives. How to unlock the SP-R 208 in Modern Warfare 2 Unlocking the SP-R 208 is pretty straightforward in Modern Warfare 2 – all you have to do is reach player level 7 by playing matches and earning XP. This shouldn’t take too much time, especially if you have a couple of Double XP Tokens left to use. Best SP-R 208 alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 If you want a long-range weapon but don’t feel like getting in the face of your opponents, the MCPR-300 is one of the most devastating Sniper Rifles in the game. On the other hand, if you want something that’s a little easier to use, but still packs a punch at range, you could go for the 556 Icarus LMG. For more on Modern Warfare 2, be sure to check out some of our other guides: Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best SOA Subverter loadout for Warzone: Class setup, attachments, Perks Introduced in Season 2 Reloaded, the SOA Subverter battle rifle hits hard at just about any range if you can keep it on target. We’ve got the meta loadout that makes the most of its strengths in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded including recommended attachments, Perks, and equipment. The Season 2 Reloaded update added a new battle rifle to Warzone, and it emerged as a clear meta contender. The SOA Subverter may not be at the top of this list anymore, but it is still a viable option in the battle royale. However, making the most of this weapon can be tricky as it has a unique recoil spray pattern that makes a typical Warzone loadout less effective. If you want to know how to make an optimized SOA Subverter loadout for Season 4 Reloaded, this is a great way to bring out its best qualities. Best SOA Subverter Warzone loadout Muzzle: Casus Brake L – Barrel: Dozer-90 Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – While the SOA Subverter doesn’t produce too much recoil, it does move around a fair bit left and right which can make the battle rifle tricky to keep on target at times. To fix this the Bruen Heavy Support Grip underbarrel is a must-use attachment. To further improve recoil you’ll also want to equip both the Dozer-90 Long Barrel and Casus Brake L muzzle. Not only do these make the SOA Subverter much more accurate but also improve its damage range, suppress outgoing fire, and increase your ADS Speed, both extremely useful for Warzone. To make the SOA Subverter even better it’s best to equip the 50 Round Drum magazine which provides a massive 150% boost to magazine capacity when compared to the rifle’s stock 20 rounds. Due to Warzone’s longer TTK, this is an essential attachment to get the most out of this weapon. Finally, a suitable medium to long-range optic goes a long way in making the SOA Subverter much easier to use from afar. There are a few good options but we like the meta JAK Glassless Optic which provides high magnification, clear sightlines, and produces relatively little visual recoil. SOA Subverter Warzone loadout: Perks & Equipment Perk 1: Double Time Increases the duration of Tac Sprint – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand Reload faster – – Perk 3: Quick Fix Starts health regeneration when killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute Gives you a speed boost when hit by enemy shot – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – As with most Warzone loadouts, you will want to use Double Time with it comfortably being the best Perk 1 in the battle royale right now. We recommend partnering with Sleight of Hand for faster reloading which is always a big advantage. Quick Fix is great for your Perk 3 which speeds up your health regeneration when you insert an armor plate into your vest. This can be a great way to keep yourself alive at all times in a match. In Perk slot 4, you’ll want to use Resolute which increases your movement speed after taking damage from enemy gunfire. This is ideal with the SOA Subverter as it has a slower sprint speed stat that can leave you vulnerable when traversing open areas. To get the most out of Resupply and Strong Arm, equip a Throwing Knife and Smoke Grenade. The knife offers a quick and powerful way to down your target, while the grenade will give you a chance to create cover you may not have otherwise. How to unlock the SOA Subverter in Warzone Post Season 2 Reloaded, the SOA Subverter can be unlocked by activating the Armory Unlock and completing five Daily Challenges. With MW3’s shared ecosystem, you can complete any five challenges in multiplayer, Warzone, and Zombies. Speaking of Zombies, you can extract the SOA Subverter in Zombies to instantly unlock it. Best alternative to SOA Subverter in Warzone Despite it being an LMG, the TAQ Evolvere is a great alternative to the SOA Subverter as it also offers high damage and manageable recoil at just about any range. To stay on top of the Warzone Season 4 Reloaded meta, learn how to kit out weapons like the Superi 46, Holger 26, SVA 545, and FJX Horus.

Best SOA Subverter loadout for MW3: Class setup, attachments, Perks Modern Warfare 3’s latest battle rifle is the SOA Subverter and it’s easily one of the best primary weapons in multiplayer thanks to its incredible damage. Here is the loadout you should be using to get the most out of the SOA Subverter in MW3. The Season 2 Reloaded update added the SOA Subverter, a new battle rifle that is easily amongst multiplayer’s best weapons. This weapon is based on the real-world ARX-200, a more powerful version of the ARX-160 that last appeared way back in Infinite Warfare as the OSA. Unlike the other ARX weapons from older Call of Duty games, the SOA Subverter is a full-auto rifle that chambers a devastating 7.62 round capable of downing enemy players before they can react. To take advantage of the SOA Subverter’s high damage you’ll need a meta loadout and we’ve got you covered. Contents: Best SOA Subverter loadout – SOA Subverter loadout: Perks and equipment – How to unlock SOA Subverter in MW3 – Best alternative to SOA Subverter in MW3 – Best SOA Subverter MW3 loadout Muzzle: Casus Brake L – Optic: Quarters Classic Reflex – Stock: HRT-L0 Precision Stock – Underbarrel: XTEN Phantom-5 Handstop – Magazine: 7.62×51 30 Round Mag – Due to the SOA Subverter’s relatively slow fire rate, you mustn’t miss shots as this greatly impacts its damage potential. To make the battle rifle more accurate use the Casus Brake L muzzle with the HRT-L0 Precision Stock as these greatly improve recoil, idle sway, and firing aim stability. It’s also ideal to use the 7.62×51 30 Round Mag as the stock SOA Subverter only comes with 20 rounds. This means that you have to frequently reload leaving you vulnerable. The 30 Round Mag increases the rifle’s magazine overall capacity by 50% fixing this problem. A downside to using these attachments is that they slow down the SOA Subverter and can leave it feeling a little sluggish for MW3 multiplayer’s fast-paced gameplay. Therefore you should equip the XTEN Phantom-5 Handstop underbarrel to regain some handling speed while further improving recoil. Since the SOA Subverter is a precision weapon it’s highly recommended to use a suitable medium range optic. There are plenty of good choices but we like the new Quarters Classic Reflex that lets you reexperience the original Red Dot Sight from Call of Duty 4. SOA Subverter MW3 loadout: Perks & Equipment Vest: Infantry Vest – Gloves: Ordnance Gloves – Boots: Climbing Boots – Gear: Mission Control Comlink – Field Upgrade: A.C.S. – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stun Grenade – For Vest, you’ll want to keep things simple and use the Infantry Vest which provides the benefits of Running Sneakers without using up the Boots slot. With this slot freed up, equip the Climbing Boots which make mantling and climbing faster helping you traverse maps more quickly. In the Gear slot, you can’t go wrong with the Mission Control Comlink which reduces the cost of calling in both Killstreaks and Scorestreaks. Equally, Ordnance Gloves are a nice option that lets you throw equipment further and punish players who mistakenly think they are in a safe position. The A.C.S. is an underrated Field Upgrade that can capture objectives while you stand at a safe distance. This is great to use with the SOA Subverter as the MW3 battle rifle offers fantastic damage range and can pick off enemies lured in by the A.C.S. with ease. To round off the loadout you’ll should use both a Frag Grenade and a Stun Grenade. This classic combination provides both unmatched lethality and useful utility to get the upper hand in a tight match. How to unlock the SOA Subverter in Modern Warfare 3 The SOA Subverter is unlocked in MW3 by completing any 5 challenges from the Week 5 Weekly Challenges in either multiplayer, zombies, or battle royale. Once Season 2 Reloaded ends, it will be available as an Armory unlock instead. Best alternative to SOA Subverter in Modern Warfare 3 Even after its nerf in Season 2 Reloaded, the BAS-B remains a powerful weapon and shares a lot in common with the SOA Subverter. Both are great battle rifles that have a slower fire rate but deal a lot of damage as long as you can keep them on target. Be sure to check out our other MW3 content to stay ahead: Best MW3 guns: Ultimate tier list | Best MTZ-762 loadout | Best BAS-B loadout | Best Sidewinder loadout | Best MCW loadout | Best WSP Swarm loadout | Best Rival-9 loadout | Best XRK Stalker loadout | Best Longbow loadout

Best SO-14 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisonThe SO-14 is an extremely unique battle rifle in Warzone 2 thanks to its powerful full-auto mode that gives it a devastating TTK with a meta loadout. Season 4 elevated the SO-14 into one of the best weapons in Warzone 2. The battle rifle’s TTK speed surpasses every other long-range meta weapon. This comes with a caveat, of course, as the weapon only kills as fast as you are able to spam the trigger in semi-auto mode. The SO-14 can also fire full auto, but an extremely strong recoil only makes it viable in close-range combat. Players will also have a difficult time adjusting to the SO-14’s long-range recoil, but this high-skill, high-reward weapon won’t lose many gunfights if you are able to master it. In order to make the most out of this fan-favorite weapon, here is the best loadout in Season 4. Contents Best SO-14 Warzone 2 loadout – Best SO-14 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the SO-14 in Warzone 2 – Best SO-14 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best SO-14 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: ZLR Talon 5 (+1.40, +1.00) – Barrel: 22″ Boremaster Barrel (+0.37, +0.32) – Optic: Forge Tac Delta 4 (-3.00, +0.00) – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 (+0.80, +0.40) – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – For starters, you’ll want to equip the ZLR Talon 5 and the 22″ Boremaster to the SO-14. These attachments massively boost the battle rifle’s bullet velocity, damage range, and recoil smoothness. Not only that, but they also suppress the gun which keeps you off the radar on Al Mazrah. Following this, utilize the FTAC Ripper 56 underbarrel to improve the SO-14’s overall stability and improve your flinch resistance for the full auto mode. Finally, round off this loadout with the Forge Tac Delta 4 for a top-tier clear optic that thrives at medium to long range, and a 50 Round Drum to take on multiple enemies at once. Best SO-14 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical Equipment: Smoke Grenade – For Base Perks, Double Time is useful as it doubles your tactical sprint duration, making getting around both Al Mazrah and Vondel faster. Using Overkill to run a secondary that covers the SO-14 weaknesses like a meta SMG is also recommended. Fast Hands ensures you are less likely to get caught while reloading and works well with Overkill as it increases weapon swap speed. For the Ultimate Perk, High Alert is a superb choice as it provides free intel by highlighting the direction of enemy players aiming at you from behind. With Warzone 2’s short TTK, this is one of the few ways to give yourself enough time to react before being downed. Equipment is flexible as there are several strong choices but a Drill Charge and Smoke Grenade are the top picks here. Drill Charges are excellent for flushing out players from hard-to-reach areas, while Smoke Grenades allow you to reposition through open spaces without being punished. How to unlock the SO-14 in Warzone 2 In order to unlock the SO-14 in Warzone 2, you’ll need to reach level 12 with the EBR-14. This won’t take you long at all, especially if you complete the challenge in MW2 multiplayer. Best SO-14 alternatives in Warzone 2 If the SO-14 doesn’t fit your style of play, then consider using the EBR-14 marksmen rifle at long to medium range on Al Mazrah. Equipped with deadly damage output and capable of wiping out foes with ease from a distance, it’s perfect for any accurate sharpshooters in Warzone 2. To maximize its power, you’ll need a top-tier EBR-14 loadout and luckily, we’ve got you covered. That’s all for our SO-14 loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work? If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Best Signal 50 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe Signal 50 is the perfect rifle for beginner snipers in Warzone 2 thanks to its high fire rate and low recoil, punishing you less for mistakes while learning. Here’s our best Signal 50 loadout for Warzone 2, complete with the best perks and equipment for players drawn to the long-range playstyle. Warzone 2’s Singal 50 boasts a great fire rate, making it perfect for taking out multiple enemies while maintaining a safe distance and holding choke points. Not only that, its fast-firing profile makes it way more forgiving if you miss shots, unlike other snipers in the class. Warzone 2’s TTK elevates the Signal 50, making it easier to shred through enemies quickly. In the current meta, the Signal 50 has quite low 0.4% overall pick rate, making it one of the least popular snipers in the game due to the lack of one-shot capability of MCPR or FJX Imperium. But if you cannot hit that crucial headshot then you are better off with a Signal 50 in the long run. That said, you need the best meta loadout to maximize the Signal 50’s potential. Here are the best attachments, equipment, and Perk Package for the Signal 50 sniper. Contents Best Signal 50 Warzone 2 loadout – Best Signal 50 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Signal 50 in Warzone 2 – Best Signal 50 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Signal 50 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Nilsound 90 – Barrel: 29″ TV Kilo-50 – Laser: FSS OLE-V laser – Ammunition: .50 CAL High Velocity – Rear Grip: SA Finesse Grip – Similar to other Sniper Rifle builds, we focused on increasing the Signal 50’s range and recoil control. Decreasing recoil is especially important for the Signal 50 to land follow-up shots accurately. The 29″ TV Kilo-50 Barrel is essential for increasing range, bullet velocity, and recoil control, while the Nilsound 90 muzzle suppresses your gunfire and improves velocity, too, at a slight detriment to your aiming stability. The .50 CAL high-velocity ammunition helps pack even more of a punch to rip through enemy armor plates, while the FSS OLE-V Laser helps keep you aiming in quicker and more ready to take on surprise gunfights if they happen. Finally, to improve mobility, we recommend using the SA Finesse Rear Grip to increase ADS speed. Best Signal 50 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Perk Package: Weapon Specialist Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – While the Recon perk package could be extremely popular for sniper builds, we’ve opted for Weapon Specialist to take advantage of Overkill off the rip. We recommend going with the ever-dominant Fennec 45 as your second primary weapon, to negate the disadvantages of trying to run a sniper in close-quarters combat. Next, Strong Arm allows you to be more precise with your throwables and toss them longer distances. On top of that, Spotter ensures you’ll never be caught off guard by enemy equipment, killstreaks, or field upgrades. Finally, for the Ultimate Perk, Weapon Specialist uses Survivor which pings any enemies you get downed by and allows allies to revive you quicker. Finally round off the setup with Semtex for flushing opponents out of cover and Flash Grenades for clearing enclosed spaces. How to unlock Signal 50 in Warzone 2 To unlock the Signal 50 in Modern Warfare 2, all you need to do is reach player level 44. Just be sure to check how to unlock the attachments you want to use, as it will involve leveling up other weapons, too. Best Signal 50 alternatives in Warzone 2 If the Signal 50 is a little too sluggish for your liking, we recommend trying out the Victus XMR. The deadly Sniper Rifle is capable of one-shot killing enemies and hits like a truck. Activision described the long-range weapon as a “hard-hitting, bolt action sniper rifle with .50 cal BMG ammunition.” If you want to make sure you’re well ahead of the meta in Warzone 2, be sure to check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work? | Best Warzone 2 loadouts

Best Signal 50 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisionThe Signal 50 is a powerful Modern Warfare 2 sniper with an impressive fire rate and great range, but the recoil often lets it down. Unless you have the right loadout. Here’s the best Signal 50 loadout for Modern Warfare 2 along with the best perks, equipment and attachments. Modern Warfare 2 is filled with powerful guns, all of which fit a separate category to cater for every type of first-person shooter gamer out there. One such category is the Sniper Rifle. This is perfect for players who prefer to stay back and pick the enemy off one by one. However, you can only do this with the right weapon. The Signal 50 has the capabilities of bringing players exactly what they need with its fast fire rate, impressive range, and powerful bullets. But you can only optimize on all of those perks with the right loadout. We’ve got the best way to build the Signal 50 right here. Contents Best Signal 50 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Signal 50 Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the Signal 50 in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternatives to the Signal 50 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Signal 50 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Barrel: 21.5″ Fluted Fifty – Muzzle: Nilsound 90 Silencer – Rear Grip: SA Finesse Grip – Stock: FSS Echo Stock – Laser: FSS OLE-V Laser – We start off our best Signal 50 loadout with a 21.5″ Fluted Fifty barrel. Recoil is something this Sniper really struggles with which is why the 21.5″ Fluted Fifty is especially useful. It helps with recoil control and bullet velocity, meaning your shots hit hard and aim well. Another attachment to help the gun’s volatile recoil is the FSS Echo Stock. This stock increases the Signal 50’s stability when firing and aiming, thus greatly reducing the kick players will feel. While the recoil is the primary disadvantage of using the Signal 50, you shouldn’t need to worry about it if you can one-hit opponents. The Nilsound 90 Silencer is added into our loadout to focus on exactly that. It provides a higher range and improves bullet velocity. The last two attachments we recommend using for the Signal 50 in Modern Warfare 2 are the SA Finesse Grip and the FSS OLE-V Laser. Both aid your aim down sight speed greatly and increase your sprint to fire, allowing you to react quickly no matter how far or close the enemy is to you. Best Signal 50 Modern Warfare 2 class Base Perk 1: Tracker – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Proximity Mine – Tactical: Stim – When it comes to choosing your perks and equipment as a sniper, stealth and protection are key. That’s why we recommend using Tracker and Battle Hardened as your base perks. Tracker allows you to keep an eye on the enemy’s movements when preparing to shoot and Battle Hardened keeps you alive when the enemy inevitably tries to flush you out. As for your bonus perk, Fast Hands is a fantastic choice for a sniper. It allows you to quickly switch to a different weapon when the action gets a little too close for comfort. The last perk we recommend is Ghost. It’s undeniably the best ultimate perk in Modern Warfare 2 and most players should never run without it. Lastly, you can’t go wrong with a Proximity Mine and a Stim as your Lethal and Tacticals. The Stim will keep you alive when you need it and the Prox Mine will cover your blind spot and act as a warning of an approaching enemy. How to unlock the Signal 50 in Modern Warfare 2 To unlock the Signal 50 in Modern Warfare 2, all you need to do is reach player level 44. This is a bit of a grind but should come quickly when you’re playing multiplayer and focusing on the objectives in order to get some quick XP. Alternatives to the Signal 50 Modern Warfare 2 loadout If you’re not too happy with the Signal 50’s overall performance but still want to go for a good sniper, then the MCPR-300 is a great shout and is easily controlled. It’s also available from the beginning of the game so you can get right into sniping. Alternatively, if you’re looking for similar devastating power but want to get into the fray a little more, a shotgun like the Bryson 800 is a great close-range weapon to try. Now you know the best Signal 50 loadout in Modern Warfare 2, you can get right back to destroying the enemy from afar. While loading up a game, take a look at some of our other handy Modern Warfare 2 guides: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Sidewinder Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks It has been slammed as one of Warzone’s worst weapons but with the right loadout, the Sidewinder can be surprisingly viable and even competitive at times in Season 4 Reloaded. Not every gun is blessed in Warzone with some failing to attract much of a fan base at all. This battle royale has its fair share of frustrating guns but perhaps none have been as poorly received as the Sidewinder. Despite its heritage as an ACR, the Sidewinder bears no resemblance to the legendary MW2 AR or even this year’s MCW. It is a slow-firing, awkward battle rifle that has a lot of recoil. Not exactly the traditional recipe for a meta Warzone gun. Yet if you can control that recoil with our optimized loadout and are comfortable with semi-auto weapons the Sidewinder is a surprisingly competent rifle that some Warzone players will enjoy using. Best Sidewinder Warzone loadout Muzzle: Casus Brake L – Barrel: Tempus Predator Precision Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – Magazine: 30 Round Drum – By far the biggest problem with the Sidewinder is its absurd recoil which makes it difficult to keep on target. Therefore it’s best to focus on building around this with the sole goal of making it more accurate. To make the Sidewinder recoil significantly less it is recommended to combine all three of the Casus Brake L muzzle, Bruen Heavy Support Grip underbarrel, and Tempus Predator Precision Barrel. As a bonus the barrel also increases Damage Range and Bullet Velocity which are both important stats in Warzone. Furthermore, the JAK Glassless Optic is fantastic for minimizing visual recoil making it much easier to keep targets in sight as the gun bounces around. The fifth and final attachment is the 30 Round Drum which lowers mobility but the 50% increase in magazine capacity provided is more than worth the trade-off. Sidewinder Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time increases the duration of Tac Sprint – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand Reload faster – – Perk 3: Quick Fix Starts health regeneration when killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute Gives you a speed boost when hit by enemy shot – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Even though the Sidewinder isn’t a gun suited to aggression, Double Time remains the best Perk 1 with it having a greater impact than any other Perk. Use your second slot to take Sleight of Hand for quicker reloading and helping get you back in the fight. Quick Fix is what we opt for with Perk 3 thanks to it giving you better healing throughout a match. Being able to kickstart your healing while you do something as mundane and common as inserting an armor plate can be a huge help. Going back to a more traditional meta pick, for Perk 4 it’s recommended to use Resolute. This Perk gives you a boost of speed whenever you are hit with an enemy shot, which helps you get out of a sticky situation much easier. Since we’re using Resupply our choice of equipment is extremely important. Given the goal is to provide utility for teammates it makes sense to equip a Smoke Grenade to cross open areas easier. Finally, a Throwing Knife is one of the meta choices for Lethal weapons thanks to its quick and efficient way to down an enemy. How to unlock Sidewinder in Warzone The Sidewinder is unlocked by accessing the Armory at level 25, activating the Sidewinder, and then completing 8 Daily Challenges. Since that can take some time, some players may prefer extracting with one in Zombies which will also unlock the battle rifle. Best alternative to Sidewinder in Warzone Given that the Sidewinder performs best in semi-auto, it has the most in common with a marksman rifle like the KVD Enforcer. Both hit hard and offer competitive TTKs if you can control their recoil and keep shots on target. While Sidewinder might not dominate the Warzone Season 4 Reloaded meta, there are plenty of weapons that do so check out guns like the FJX Horus, Kar98k, Holger 26, and Superi 46.

Best Sidewinder MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionBattle Rifles fly under the radar, but it’s worth paying attention to the Sidewinder. Here is the best Sidewinder MW3 loadout. Modern Warfare 2 introduced a new class to the game called Battle Rifles. The rifles excel in medium to long-range engagements and deal high damage but suffer from high recoil. Battle Rifles never made too much of a splash in multiplayer but shined in Warzone 2. The TAQ-V and Cronen Squall had stretches atop the battle royale’s meta. Luckily, Sledgehammer Games increased base health in Modern Warfare 3 multiplayer to 150, which slows down TTK speeds. This creates the perfect landscape for the high-damage battle rifles to thrive, as they can still shred through enemies despite it taking longer for other weapons. Community Members have changed their tune about the class in multiplayer, and the Sidewinder stands out as one of the best Battle Rifles in the game. Let’s jump right into the best loadout to maximize its potential. Contents Best Sidewinder MW3 loadout – Sidewinder MW3 loadout: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the Sidewinder in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Sidewinder alternative in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Sidewinder MW3 loadout Muzzle: Lockshot KT85 – Barrel: Precision Barrel – Ammunition: 450 Huntsman High Velocity – Optic: MK.3 Reflector – Stock: R8 Regal Heavy Stock – Our loadout focuses on mitigating vertical recoil as much as possible. Players will still have to compensate for an aggressive kick, but this set of attachments at least makes the issue manageable. We also tried the best to improve ADS speed as Battle Rifles are slower than ARs or other medium to long range options. Sidewinder MW3 loadout: Perks & Equipment Modern Warfare 3 removes the traditional perk system in favor of using gear. Check out our full guide if you need an explainer of what each gear item does. Given the gun’s excellent performance in mid to long-range fights, you’ll want to gear up to complement those strengths. Vest: Infantry Vest – Gloves: Commando Gloves – Boots Stalker Boots – Gear: Bone Conduction Headset – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Battle Rage – How to unlock the Sidewinder in Modern Warfare 3 The Sidewinder is acquired as an Armory Unlock, first accessible after reaching Level 25. Once activated in the armory, you are required to complete 3 Daily Challenges. Alternatively, successfully extracting with a Sidewinder in Zombies will also unlock the weapon. Best Sidewinder alternative in Modern Warfare 3 The BAS-B stands head and shoulders above every other Battle Rifle in MW3. Early signs also point to this rifle being the best weapon in Warzone when the new map comes out in December. So make sure to level up the BAS-B before the new battle royale map drops. That’s all for our Sidewinder loadout in Modern Warfare 3. For more MW3 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Modern Warfare 3 AR class loadouts | How to slide cancel in Modern Warfare 3 | Best controller settings in Modern Warfare 3 | All maps & modes | How to play Modern Warfare 3 at 120 FPS on PS5 | Modern Warfare 3 TTK | How long is the Modern Warfare 3 campaign? | Campaign mission list | How to fix packet burst | How to play MW3 Zombies in third person

Best settings to increase Black Ops Cold War PC FPS Activision / TreyarchCall of Duty: Black Ops Cold War is finally here and players from around the world are busy getting to grips with the game’s new content. However, some PC players have run into issues that impact the game’s performance. Here’s how you can boost your frame rate and alleviate any issues. [jwplayer Q7ySHZq9] The Call of Duty franchise has been releasing games on PC for many years, but that still doesn’t stop them from having performance-related issues. While there is no doubt that optimizing games for all kinds of hardware comes with its own caveats, it can be extremely frustrating when you have a powerful rig. In fact, a number of PC players are currently reporting that they are encountering FPS issues that drastically impact gameplay. There’s nothing worse than getting into an intense firefight only to lose due to the game dropping frames. It’s imperative that FPS games run smoothly, especially when you’re looking to truly crush your foes. To help alleviate the current FPS issues in Black Ops Cold War, we’ve outlined the following settings you should be using. Best Black Ops Cold War PC settings Copy these video settings if you have any issues 🙂 have a 2070 as well, RT to save a life pic.twitter.com/BwkxJuNSAE — justin fargo-p (@silly702) November 13, 2020 Call of Duty Pro, Justin “SiLLY” Fargo-Palmer is one of the many Black Ops Cold War players who has encountered issues in the PC version of the game. With the below settings, SiLLY was able to reach 170 to 180 frames per second. It’s important to note that this performance was recorded while he was streaming, so you could reach higher frames here depending on your build. In order to boost your Black Ops Cold War FPS, navigate over to the options menu and click on the Graphics tabs. Once inside this tab, use the settings outlined below: Hardware Display Mode: Full Screen – Refresh Rate: 144Hz (depends on your monitor) – Gameplay V-Sync: Disabled – Menu V-Sync: Disabled – Nvidia Reflex Low Latency: Enabled (Normal) – Display Resolution: 1920×1080 – Aspect Ratio: 16:9 – Display Field of View: 105 – ADS Field of View: Affected – Framerate: Unlimited – Minimized Game Frame Rate Limit: 60 – Details & Textures Texture Quality: Lowest – Model Quality: Low – Special Effects Quality: Medium – Screen Space Reflection: Low – Object View Distance: Low – Shadow & Lighting Volumetric Lighting: Low – Shadow Quality: Low – Dynamic Shadows: All – Special Effect Shadows: Disabled – Ray Tracing Ray Tracing Sun Shadows: Disabled – Ray Tracing Local Shadows: Disabled – Ray Tracing Ambient Occlusion: Disabled – Post Processing Effects NVIDIA DLSS: Quality – Ambient Occlusion Quality: Disabled – Motion Blur: Disabled – Motion Blur Quality: Low – Subsurface Scattering: Enabled – Order Independent Transparency: Disabled – Advanced VRAM Usage Target: Low (70%) – Display Gamma: Computer (sRGB) – The above settings should help clear up any shaky performance in Black Ops Cold War, so give these settings a try if you’re struggling to maintain a consistent frame rate. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoIntel.

Best scorestreaks to use in Black Ops Cold War multiplayer TreyarchBlack Ops Cold War provides players with a range of scorestreaks to utilize in multiplayer, but it can be difficult to choose which ones will aid you the most within your games. Well, here’s what we think are the best scorestreaks to run in Cold War multiplayer to rack up your kills. Black Ops Cold War has made some significant changes to scorestreaks, making them a lot easier to earn throughout a game. A player’s scorestreak will no longer reset on death and instead will be accrued over the course of the match. This means objective-based players can now earn high-level scorestreaks without having to rack up multiple kills in a row. Here’s what we think are the best scorestreaks to run in Cold War multiplayer. Best scorestreaks in Black Ops Cold War Spy Plane The Spy Plane was always going to make an appearance on the list of best scorestreaks in Cold War. It’s a classic that’s been a part of nearly every online Call of Duty game. In Cold War, the Spy Plane will require 1000 points and gives your team a massive advantage for a short period of time. It’s worth noting that the Spy Plane has a 90-second cooldown so it can’t be utilized over and over again. Of course, it’s nowhere near as exciting as the Cruise Missile or Chopper Gunner, but it’s a scorestreak you can’t afford not to pickup Cruise Missile The Cruise Missile allows the players to control three synchronized missiles that can be directed at players or an area of the map. This scorestreak will require 2600 points, making it a big step up from the Spy Plane. However, it’s definitely worth running to clear locations and pick up some guaranteed kills. Don’t forget that the best time to use the Cruise Missile is often at the start of a round when players are running together to take an objective. War Machine Now we’re getting to the really exciting scorestreaks. The War Machine is a grenade launcher capable of killing players with a single hit. Of course, all this power does come with a hefty requirement of 3500 points, but the scorestreak is definitely worth running if you’re looking to control locations and areas in modes such as domination. It’s worth noting that kills from the War Machine, unlike other scorestreaks, will count toward your killstreak. This is definitely a scorestreak for players who like to keep their feet on the ground and take on enemies head on — and it’s incredibly powerful to boot. Chopper Gunner Another classic scorestreak, if you’ve played any of the classic Call of Duty titles you know how destructive a Chopper Gunner can be. In Cold War, it’s no different and is definitely worth running if you enjoy causing chaos from above. It’s worth keeping in mind the Chopper Gunner requires a massive 6000 score to earn, so don’t expect to be earning one every game. VTOL Escort The VTOL Escort is the second-highest scorestreak in the game, requiring 8500 points to earn in-game. It allows the player to take control of a VTOL jet and rain missiles down on enemies across the map. For this scorestreak, you’re going to need to have a seriously good game. It’s a goal that you can aim to reach and it’ll feel all the more satisfying when you finally get to pilot the VTOL jet. That’s our rundown of the best scorestreaks in Black Ops Cold War. Don’t forget to cater your scorestreaks to your own skill level, it may not be a wise decision to run all the high-level scorestreaks when you’re just getting started.

Best Sakin MG38 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionLMGs dipped in popularity in the current meta of Warzone 2, but that doesn’t change the fact that they are still deadly. The Sakin MG38 is still just as lethal in Season 4, here’s our best loadout for this LMG in Warzone 2 Season 4, including the top attachments, Perks, and equipment. Warzone 2‘s Season 4 has begun, and the meta so far did not receive any significant shakeup. Sakin MG38 is a great example of that, as it remains pretty much the same gun capable of mowing down enemy squads. Warzone 2 comes with dozens of weapons to experiment with across its different categories, all tailormade for a specific way of fighting. The usual array of Assault Rifles and SMGs have dominated the meta so far, but there are still plenty of other strong options. LMGs have proven to be particularly effective in Warzone 2. One of the best is the Sakin MG38 which can be incredibly powerful with the right setup. Here’s the best Sakin MG38 loadout in Warzone, including the ideal attachments and perks to use. Contents Best Sakin MG38 Warzone 2 loadout attachments – Best Sakin MG38 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Sakin MG38 in Warzone 2 – Best Sakin MG38 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Sakin MG38 Warzone 2 loadout attachments Muzzle: ZLR Talon 5 – Barrel: 20″ Bruen Silver Series – Optic: Aim-OP V4 – Rear Grip: STIP-40 Grip – Underbarrel: Cronen WL55 – The Sakin MG38 packs a real punch, but it needs a lot of extra recoil control to make it a meta option in Warzone 2. That’s why we kick off the best Sakin MG38 loadout with the ZLR Talon 5 and 20″ Bruen Silver Series Barrel, which make the LMG’s recoil smoother while buffing the damage range and bullet velocity. Optics are mostly down to personal preference, but we think the Aim-OP V4 is ideal for picking off enemies accurately at a distance. The STIP-40 Grip will also boost recoil control and the gun on target. Last up is the Cronen WL55, offering one last dose of recoil reduction. All in all, this loadout will make the Sakin MG38 a monster at long-range, capable of sending players to the Gulag in an instant. Best Sakin MG38 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical Equipment: Flash Grenade – Although the Sakin MG38 is deadly at long range, it lacks the speed and mobility to deal with close-quarters fights, thus we recommend the Overkill Perk, which allows you to bring an SMG like the Fennec 45 along, so you’re prepared for every situation. Strong Arm is also included, which makes your equipment more deadly by increasing how far they can be thrown. Spotter is on hand to ensure you’re never caught out by enemy equipment and Killstreaks, as they will be marked on-screen. Then, Survivor pings any enemies you knock down so that a teammate can finish the job. We also recommend choosing Semtex to score quick kills when players are hiding in buildings, and Flash Grenades to disorientate your foes. How to unlock the Sakin MG38 in Warzone 2 The good news is, the Sakin MG38 is unlocked from the start in Warzone 2, so there’s no need to grind through the Levels to get hold of it. However, players will have to reach Level 4 to unlock the Gunsmith feature so they can begin swapping out attachments. Best Sakin MG38 alternatives in Warzone 2 If you want to stick to the LMG class, both the RPK and Raal MG are among Warzone 2’s best weapons right now. But if you’re looking for a long-range option that’s more instant, a Sniper Rifle like the Signal 50 is the best bet. For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best Sakin MG38 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisionModern Warfare 2’s Sakin MG38 is a rather slow but fantastically powerful LMG. It’s a bulky gun but possesses the capability to wreak destruction on any battlefield – with the right loadout. We’ve got the best Sakin MG38 loadout along with the best equipment, Perks, and attachments. One of the best things about Modern Warfare 2 is its versatility with different types of weapons. You can use long-range snipers, short-range shotguns, or the heavy but powerful LGMs. LMGs are not known for being quick and mobile but undeniably pack a punch. However, while they’re not known for being light, the Sakin MG38 is capable of being relatively speedy, but only with the right loadout. We’ve got the best loadout for the Sakin MG38 so you can use its power and speed to take down the enemy, no matter what. Contents Best Sakin MG38 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Sakin MG38 Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the Sakin MG38 in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternatives to the Sakin MG38 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Sakin MG38 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Rear Grip: Bruen Q900 Grip Wrap – Stock: Cheetah STM Stock – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Laser: Schlager PEQ Box IV – Ammunition: 7.62 High Velocity – One of the main downsides to the Sakin MG30 is its speed when you need to use the sight or fire when sprinting. That’s why we recommend using the Bruen Q900 Grip Wrap which increases your sprint-to-fire speed and helps that slow aim down sight speed. To complement this the Cheetah STM Stock is a fantastic choice with its increases in both your sprint speed and aiming while walking speed. Another attachment we recommend using is the Schlager PEQ Box IV. This will again increase your ADS speed and get it up to scratch for when you need to react quickly. With three attachments fixing the speed problems, it’s time to focus on damage and easier aiming. That’s why we recommend using the Cronen Mini Pro optic. It grants an unobstructed view and grants you pinpoint precision when aiming. As for damage, the 7.62 High Velocity ammo will increase your bullet velocity and damage range, allowing you to shoot from longer distances and still pack a deadly punch. Best Sakin MG38 Modern Warfare 2 class Base Perk 1: Tracker – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Since you’ll likely be up close and personal with the enemy, we recommend using Tracker and Battle Hardened. Tracker allows you to keep a close eye on the enemy while Battle Hardened keeps you safe from the many flashes and stuns flying about. For the Bonus Perk, we suggest using Fast Hands to speed up that rather lengthy reload time and to allow you to switch weapons when you really need it. The last Perk we recommend is Ghost. It doesn’t require much description and is undeniably one of the best Perks in Modern Warfare 2. It keeps you safe from enemy radars and will likely save your life. When it comes to your Lethal and Tactical, Semtex and Flash Grenade to easily destroy and confuse the enemy depending on the situation. How to unlock the Sakin MG38 in Modern Warfare 2 Thankfully, unlocking the Sakin MG38 in Modern Warfare 2 is extremely easy. It’s available as soon as you get into the game so you can get right to enjoying this LMG. However, you will need to level it up to use many of the attachments. Alternatives to the Sakin MG38 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Since the Sakin MG38 is relatively slow and bulky, you could opt for a quicker but equally as devastating Assault Rifle, after all, you can’t go wrong with the M4. Alternatively, if you want to stay in the LMG subclass, the 556 Icarus is often stated as one of the best weapons in Modern Warfare 2. Now you know the best Sakin MG38 loadout in Modern Warfare 2, you can get right back to wiping out the enemy. While loading up a new game, take a look at some of our other handy Modern Warfare 2 guides: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best SA-B 50 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisonThe SA-B 50 is a lightweight marksman rifle in Warzone 2 that offers solid damage output paired with a huge amount of mobility, making it extremely powerful on Al Mazrah with meta loadout. Finding a balance between maneuverability and damage output can be extremely difficult in Warzone 2, especially for long-range options. Bulky weapons tend to perform best from a distance, but the sluggish movement they inflict on a player can be incredibly frustrating during intense gunfights. Well, there is a weapon that offers both, and that’s the lightweight SA-B 50 marksman rifle which is perfect for anyone who loves to play aggressively. Equipped with a solid amount of damage and unparalleled mobility, this rifle is definitely worth using in your matches with a top-tier loadout. Contents Best SA-B 50 Warzone 2 loadout – Best SA-B 50 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the SA-B 50 in Warzone 2 – Best SA-B 50 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best SA-B 50 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Barrel: 18.5″ XRK Resonate – Laser: FSS OLE-V laser – Optic: SP-X 80 6.6X – Ammunition: .308 High Velocity – Rear Grip: Schlager Match Grip – For starters, make sure to equip the 18.5″ XRK Resonate barrel and the .308 High-Velocity ammunition. These attachments significantly boost the gun’s bullet velocity, hip-fire accuracy, and overall recoil control, making it a threat at long-range. Not only that, but the barrel also suppresses the weapon’s fire which is important in Al Mazrah. Following this, use the FSS OLE-V laser and the Schlager Match Grip for improved ADS time and sprint-to-fire speed. These add to the SA-B 50’s already impressive mobility and make it easy to snap onto your opponents from a distance. Finally round off the loadout with the SP-X 80 6.6X for a top-tier scope that makes it simple to land all your shots on target. Best SA-B 50 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Perk Package: Weapon Specialist Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stim – As for perk packages, we decided to choose Weapon Specialist because it’s essential to have a second primary alongside the SA-B 50. Although can hold its own up close if absolutely necessary, it’s better to have Overkill on hand so you can wield a meta SMG. Next, Strong Arm allows you to be more accurate with your throwables and launch them longer distances. On top of that, Spotter ensures it’s impossible to be caught off guard by enemy equipment, killstreaks, or field upgrades. For the Ultimate Perk, Weapon Specialist uses Survivor which pings any enemies you get downed by and allows allies to revive you quicker. Finally round off the setup with a Grenade for flushing opponents out of cover and a Stim for an added boost of health when needed. How to unlock the SA-B 50 in Warzone 2 In order to unlock the SA-B 50 in Warzone, you’ll need to reach level 13 with the SPR-208. This won’t take you long at all, but to speed up the process, we recommend jumping into MW2 multiplayer. Best SA-B 50 alternatives in Warzone 2 If the SA-B 50 doesn’t fit your style of play, consider using the LM-S marksman rifle which offers less mobility but more accuracy at long range. This makes it extremely effective at picking off opponents from afar, especially with a meta loadout that boosts its damage to the max. That’s all for our SA-B 50 loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best SA-B 50 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisionModern Warfare 2’s SA-B 50 is a powerful Marksman Rifle capable of taking over the battlefield and taking down the enemy in a few quick shots – but only with the right loadout. We’ve got the best SA-B 50 Modern Warfare 2 loadout as well as the best perks, attachments, and equipment. As it typically goes in most Call of Duty games, Modern Warfare 2 has a plethora of high-powered, close-range weapons for players who like to get into the thick of battle. One such powerful weapon is the SA-B 50 Marksman Rifle. It’s got a great fire rate, a decent range, and packs an impressive punch, but lacks that speedy mobility it really needs. Thankfully, with a great loadout, you can eliminate all this weapons mobility and focus solely on the positives. Here’s the best loadout for the SA-B 50 to keep you at the top of the leaderboard. Contents Best SA-B 50 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best SA-B 50 Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the SA-B 50 in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternatives to the SA-B 50 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best SA-B 50 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Stock: XRK Spector Mod – Rear Grip: Schlager Match Grip – Laser: FSS OLE-V Laser – Bolt: FSS ST87 Bolt – Optic: FTAC Charlie7 – The SA-B 50 is undeniably a powerful weapon but can be relatively slow, especially when getting into a gunfight with an Assault Rifle like the M4. That’s why we recommend using attachments that will increase your mobility like your aim down sight speed, movement speed, and sprint to fire. For those perks, choose the XRK Spector Mod and the Schlager Match Grip. With a marksman rifle like the SA-B 50, one or two shots are enough to take the enemy down. Therefore you need to make sure each shot counts. To help with that, we suggest using the FSS OLE-V Laser and the FTAC Charlie7. The laser grants you easy aim when looking down the sight and the optic will keep that sigh clear and true. Lastly, we recommend using the FSS ST87 Bolt for even more ADS and an added boost to fire rate, just in case you need one more shot. Best SA-B 50 Modern Warfare 2 class Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – Unlike a sniper, you’ll need to be up close and in the action with the SA-B 50. With that in mind, the best Base Perks to choose are undoubtedly Overkill and Battle Hardened. Overkill allows you to change to a slightly faster weapon when its required, and Battle Hardened will keep you safer from those frustrating flashes. Since you’ve got Overkill, having Fast Hands as your Bonus Perk makes sense. It will speed up your reloading, switching between guns, and so much more. The only option for your Ultimate Perk should be Ghost. It’s arguably the best perk in Modern Warfare 2 and will keep you hidden from all those UAVs. As for your equipment, we recommend using Semtex and Stims. Semtex will deal some impressive damage while Stims will keep you alive when you just need to get one more shot in. How to unlock the SA-B 50 in Modern Warfare 2 To unlock the SA-B 50 in Modern Warfare 2 you’ll need to reach player level 7. Then you will unlock the SP-R 208. Play the game until it reaches level 13 and you’ll be able to use the SA-B 50 Marksman Rifle. While there are a few steps, the SA-B 50 will unlock quickly when playing multiplayer, or you could always use an XP token if you have one. Alternatives to the SA-B 50 Modern Warfare 2 loadout If you want to stick with the powerful Marksman Rifles but want to experiment with a new weapon then we suggest trying out the SP-R 208. It’s a fantastic weapon, and you may just get attached when leveling it up to get the SA-B 50. Alternatively, if you want even more damage but using a different weapon style, try out the Bryson 800. It packs a punch and doesn’t bring you too far from what you’re used to. Now you have the best SA-B 50 loadout in Modern Warfare 2, you can get right back to taking down the enemy. While loading up a new game, take a look at some of our other handy Modern Warfare 2 guides: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best RPK Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & Perks ActivisonThe RPK is one of Modern Warfare 2’s best LMGs, especially with the right loadout. Here’s the best RPK loadout in MW2, complete with attachments, perks, and equipment. LMGs have failed to garner proper attention in most CoD titles. The UGM-8 had a brief run as one of Warzone’s best weapons, but it’s not often we see the class dominate for long. The tides may be changing in Modern Warfare 2 and Warzone 2. CoD YouTuber JGOD predicted the RAAL MG will be the best fully automatic weapon in Warzone 2, marking a massive victory for the LMG class. The RAAL MG may be the early favorite, but the RPK could be equally as devastating in the right hands. If you want to shred through enemies extremely fast with the RPK in Modern Warfare 2, then you need our best loadout for the weapon. Contents Best RPK Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best RPK Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the RPK in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternative to the RPK Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best RPK MW2 loadout Barrel: TAC 596 Barrel – Underbarrel: FSS Sharkfin 90 – Laser: Corio LAZ-44 V3 – Ammunition: .762 High Velocity – Optic: XRK On-Point Optic – Receiver: RPK – The best RPK loadout in the game starts off with the TAC 596 Barrel, as it gives you more damage range, movement speed, and bullet velocity at the cost of aim-down speed. Fortunately, the Corio Laz-44 V3 laser increases aim-down-sight speed and recoil stability to help offset the penalty. The Iron sights may be more than satisfactory if you trust your aim, but it doesn’t hurt throwing on the XRK On-Point optic for more precise aiming. Pairing well with the optic, the FSS Sharkfin 90 increases aiming idle stability without any penalties. For the cherry on top, the .762 High-Velocity ammunition increases bullet velocity making the LMG even deadlier in mid and long-range engagements. Best RPK Modern Warfare 2 class Base Perk 1: Bomb Squad – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Quick Fix – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical: Stim – Combining Bomb Squad and Battle Hardened transforms your Operator into a juggernaut. Bomb Squad reduces damage from explosives, while Battle Hardened essentially nullifies the impact from tactical grenades. LMGs struggle with slow reload teams, so Fast Hands giving you a faster reload time should help time in close call situations. Quick Fix is an underrated Ultimate Perk that regenerates health for every kill or for holding objectives. Drill Charges can pierce straight through walls to take out unsuspecting campers, and getting a quick boost of health from a Stim always comes in handy while in a crunch. How to unlock the RPK in MW2 In order to get your hands on this excellent LMG in Modern Warfare 2, you’ll need to first rank up to level 23, unlocking the Kastov 762. From there you need to reach level 16 on the Kastov 762, and you should unlock the RPK Reciever after doing this! Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith has thrown some players for a loop, but once you understand the formula, understanding how to unlock weapons becomes easy. Here’s a quick step-by-step guide: Rank up to Level 23 – Use the Kastov 762 until it reaches Level 16 – You can now equip the RPK Reciever – Alternative to the RPK Modern Warfare 2 loadout We mentioned it earlier, but if you are not enjoying the RPK, you should consider giving the RAAL MG a spin. The hard-hitting LMG obliterates enemies at long range and has an easy-to-manage recoil. The RAAL MG is a two to three-shot kill at any range, and its large magazine size is perfect for dealing with enemies in MW2’s 32v32 mode or eventually using it against squads in Warzone 2. Now that you have the best RPK loadout, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Modern Warfare 2: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2| How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best RPD Warzone class loadout: Attachments, setup, perks Treyarch/ActivisionWhen it comes to LMG’s in Warzone Season 3, the RPD is an effective choice that’s lethal at medium range. With the right attachments and setup, this is a weapon that can absolutely dominate your opponents. Warzone’s Season 3 update sparked a huge shift in the game’s meta and the strategies players used. With a revamped Verdansk to explore and two brand new weapons to master, it’s safe the nuke event had a significant impact on the title. Although the season is now well underway, players are still experimenting with different weapons and trying to figure out which guns are overpowered. While most LMG’s are usually left to the wayside by players, the RPD is a weapon that’s receiving a lot of attention from the community at the moment. The gun’s huge magazine size and steady recoil pattern make the RPD lethal at medium range with the right attachments. So, without further ado, let’s check exactly how you should be kitting out your RPD to get the most out of the powerful LMG. How to unlock the RPD in Warzone Unlocking the RPD is incredibly simple in Warzone and Black Ops Cold War and shouldn’t take you too much time at all. Read More: When is CoD Warzone Mobile coming out? – Players simply have to reach level 22 and the gun will be available to customize and use. Now you’ve unlocked the weapon, you’ll need a top-tier loadout to help get the most out of the RPD and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Best RPD loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Barrell: 20.3″ Task Force – Underbarrell: Spetsnaz Grip – Optic: Visiontech 2x – Ammunition: Fast Mag – Perks Perk 1: E.O.D – Perk 2: Ghost – Perk 3: Amped – Equipment Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Lethal: Grenade – For starts, you’ll want to run the GRU Suppressor in the muzzle slot to combat the weapon’s recoil control and increase the gun’s bullet velocity. On top of this, the attachment also silences the RPD which is key in Warzone when attempting to remain undetected. Next, you’ll want to equip the 20.3″ Task Force Barrel to take the RPD’s power to another level. This increases the gun’s bullet velocity even further, as well as improving the weapon’s effective damage range. After that, don’t forget to add the Spetsnaz Grip to combat and bolster the RPD’s heavy recoil. This alongside the Visiontech 2x will allow you to lock onto targets and take them out effectively at medium to long-range. Finally, round off your loadout with the Fast Mag to ensure reload time is manageable during intense gunfights and your ADS time is not affected. Read More: Best Krig 6 Warzone class loadout – While the RPD will likely never be a top-tier weapon, it certainly packs a punch and is well worth taking into Verdansk to dominate your opponents. Make sure you check out our Call of Duty hub for all the latest Warzone news and updates.

Best RPD Black Ops Cold War loadout: Class, attachments, setup & perks ActivisionDespite not being an extremely popular weapon within Black Ops Cold War, the RPD light machine gun has incredible potential for a variant that has extremely low recoil but keeps its high rate of fire. Here’s what you need to know about setting it up. Light-machine guns aren’t the most popular weapon class in Black Ops Cold War right now. While the Stoner 63 enjoyed some play during the pre-release version of the game, the fact of the matter is that LMGs just haven’t been as viable in the game as of yet. This is primarily down to the weight of each of the weapons and how much they slow down players during a match. No one wants to lumber around a massive gun when they could just use a fast-paced SMG. That being said, the class is full of potential, especially with the RPD. The weapon’s array of great attachments means it’s possible to create a class with minimal recoil that can beam enemies down in medium-range gunfights. Without further ado, let’s check exactly how you can create an incredibly powerful RPD setup. Best RPD loadout Attachments Muzzle: Muzzle Brake 7.62 – Barrel: 20.3″ Task Force Barrel – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Magazine: VDV 125 RND Fast Mag – Handle: Spetsnaz Field Grip – Perks Perk 1: Flak Jacket – Perk 2: Scavenger – Perk 3: Ghost – Equipment Lethal: Grenade – Tactical: Stimshot – Field Upgrade: Field Mic – Wildcard Law Breaker – First off, there’s no optic to speak of in this loadout. Simply put, the RPD has some pretty clear iron sights and doesn’t need an optic to help you aim. While one could probably be added without detriment, it’s simply unnecessary. When it comes to the muzzle, the Muzzle Brake 7.62 is the simplest option because of its early unlock, but it’s also one of the best because of that simplicity. It only increases your vertical recoil control and doesn’t negatively impact your weapon at all. For the barrel, we’re going with the 20.3″ Task Force Barrel. This gives the weapon a huge increase in damage, damage range, and bullet velocity, making it a powerhouse that opponents won’t want to reckon with. It does come at a cost of your ammo, as you’ll start with a bit less ammo capacity, starting ammo, and magazine capacity, but the positives far outweigh the negatives. For the underbarrel, the attachment of choice here is the Spetsnaz Grip because it improves the vertical recoil by 8% and the horizontal recoil by 30%. Despite the positives, this does mean that your shooting movement speed is going to be lower, but not to the point where it’s extremely hurting your performance. For the Magazine, the VDV 125 RND Fast Mag is the best option. Not only does the high capacity make up for the negatives on the barrel in spades, but it also gives the weapon an extremely fast reload speed, allowing you to get back into firefights faster. That being said, it does negatively affect your aim-down-sight speed, which for LMGs is already slow. Fortunately, there’s a solution. To make up for the negatively affected ADS time, we’ll be using the Spetsnaz Field Grip to bump it back up. While this does come at the cost of your sprint-to-fire time, like the decrease in aim movement on the Spetsnaz Grip, it’s easy to work with and shouldn’t be a problem. Hopefully, this guide has provided you with an RPD loadout that will dominate your online matches and help you take down multiple opponents at once. LMG’s may not be the most popular weapons in Cold War, but with the right class, they can still thrive.

Best Riveter Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe Riveter is an absolute unit capable of incredible damage output and clearing out ammo reserves in seconds. Here’s the optimal loadout you’ll need to dominate Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. When SMGs and Snipers fail to scratch the itch of a reliable secondary weapon, shotguns are there to pack a punch. Enter the Riveter, the full-auto shotgun built around an assault rifle. In theory, the Riveter sounds like a great choice… until you use it and discover its recoil is extremely unforgiving, even if you’re only hip-firing it. Not to mention, its full-auto nature will chew through your ammo reserves in a matter of seconds. Thankfully, we’ve got the best Riveter loadout for you to use in Warzone so you can dominate Season 4 Reloaded. Best Riveter Warzone loadout Muzzle: Crown Breaker Choke – Barrel: SA Draven-20 Long – Magazine: 30 Round Mag – Ammunition: .410 Gauge Incendiary – Underbarrel: Bruen Bastion Angled Grip – Given it’s a fully automatic shotgun, don’t expect incredible range and accuracy from the Riveter. However, in close ranges, this loadout will do wonders. The Crown Breaker Choke helps tighten the pellet spread and combined with the .410 Gauge Incendiary ammunition and the 30 Round Mag, you’ll wreak extreme amounts of fire havoc. The Bruen Bastion Angled Grip helps boost the Riveter’s accuracy woes, with firing aim stability bumps while also giving it greater ADS Speed for greater mobility. Finally, the SA Draven-20 Long barrel increases your bullet velocity and range, which helps since the default Riveter range is pretty underwhelming. Riveter Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Sleight of Hand Reload faster – – Perk 2: Double Time Increases Tac Sprint duration and reduces refresh time – – Perk 3: Quick Fix Kickstart health regeneration by killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute Boosts your movement speed when hit by an enemy shot – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – With any shotgun, your goal is getting up close and inflicting massive damage on enemy teams. Double Time will help with that, as you’ll have Tac Sprint frequently ready for use to close the gap. Sleight of Hand is a must as well since it’ll keep you in the fight with a full magazine. Quick Fix will keep you in the mix, as popping an armor plate or killing an enemy will trigger instant health regeneration. Finally, Resolute gives you a 5% movement buff when taking damage, perfect for closing the space between yourself and enemies, or for a strategic reposition. To complete the Riveter Warzone loadout, Throwing Knives and Smoke Grenades will work wonders for you, as you rush in close to secure the kill. How to unlock Riveter in Warzone There are three ways to unlock the Riveter shotgun — by reaching level 25 and completing the Armory challenge for it, extracting with it in MWZ, or purchasing the Vault Edition. The last method provides you with two reactive variants and instantly unlocks the weapon. Best alternative to Riveter in Warzone With only three options to choose from, the best alternative option is the Haymaker. Its semi-auto nature makes it less jarring to use compared to the Riveter, while it provides better damage output and recoil control. Shotguns are just some of the best close-quarters options in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. You will want to read up on other weapons like the Superi 46, Haymaker, FJX Horus, and Renetti.

Best Riveter MW3 Loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe Riveter is a truly one of a kind shotgun that excels up close thanks to its rapid fire rate. However, with this meta MW3 loadout, the Riveter’s damage range can be extended out further than you might expect. Of all the guns in MW3, the Riveter is one of the most divisive. It isn’t versatile but this shotgun’s incredible fire rate makes it a real problem on small maps where you can get up close to other players with ease. It isn’t just useful on tiny maps though, at least not with a proper loadout. With the right attachments the Riveter’s damage range can be boosted a lot to make it competitive on every MW3 map. Here is the loadout you want to be using in MW3 Season 3 to get the most out of the Riveter shotgun. Contents Best Riveter MW3 loadout – Riveter MW3 class: Equipment & perks – How to unlock Riveter in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Riveter alternative in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Riveter MW3 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Crown Breaker Choke – Barrel: SA Draven-20 Long Barrel – Laser: Canted VIbro-Dot 7 – Stock: Demo 050 Buffer Tube – Underbarrel: Chewk Angled Grip – Every shotgun in MW3 benefits from extra damage range and a tighter spread to make shots more consistent, and the Riveter is no exception. To improve these key stats use both the Crown Breaker Choke and SA Draven-20 Long Barrel. Equally, Modern Warfare 3’s shotguns are run and gun weapons that need as much mobility as possible to be effective. With the Riveter, this can be achieved by equipping the Demo 050 Buffer Tube, which is effectively this gun’s No Stock attachment. Why stop there though? The Riveter’s mobility can be further enhanced with the Chewk Angled Grip which improves Movement Speed and Aim Walking Speed, with the latter even beating out most SMGs. The catch to this loadout is that it has a lot of recoil which can be practically impossible to control using iron sights. Though a close range optic somewhat helps with this, it’s better to use the Canted Vibro-Dot 7 and aim with the side mounted laser it provides instead. Riveter MW3 class: Perks & equipment Vest: Infantry Vest Increases Tactical Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – – Gloves: Commando Gloves Reload while sprinting. – – Boots: Covert Sneakers Eliminates footstep sounds. – – Gear: Ghost T/V Camo While moving, blocks detection by UAVs, enemy radar sources, and Heartbeat Sensors. – – Lethal: Semtex Timed sticky grenade. – – Tactical: Smoke Grenade Deploys a smoke screen that blocks vision and automated targeting systems. – – The Riveter has the shortest damage range of any gun in MW3, so getting up close is essential. The best perks to do this are Covert Sneakers, Ghost T/V Camo, and Infantry Vest. These are all chosen specifically because they make it easier to quickly close the gap on enemy players without them noticing. Typically, Smoke Grenades see more use in Warzone but they work well with the Riveter as you can smoke enemies and sprint right into them for an easy kill before they know where you are. The Commando Gloves can then be used to make a quick escape while reloading preparing you for the next fight. If you do happen to get caught out, throw a Semtex to pressure opponents. How to unlock Riveter in Modern Warfare 3 You can unlock the Riveter through the Armory after reaching level 25. You’ll have to activate the weapon and then either complete 3 daily challenges or win 3 matches to unlock it. Best Riveter alternative in Modern Warfare 3 The best alternative to the Riveter is the Haymaker, which can fire just as fast with its unique JAK Maglift Kit aftermarket part equipped. That’s all you need to know about the best Riveter MW3 loadout possible. Check out these other classes for more meta builds: Best MW3 loadouts: Ultimate gun tier list | Lockwood 680 loadout | FJX Horus loadout | WSP Swarm loadout | Rival-9 loadout

Best Rival-9 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionHarness the potency of the Rival-9 up close with the best Warzone loadout for Season 4 Reloaded. This setup includes recommended attachments and Perks to maximize its effectiveness. The Skorpion Evo returned to Call of Duty as the Rival-9, yet again offering a deadly close-quarters weapon that excels thanks to its high fire rate and impressive TTK. Its characteristics and strengths fit what players have come to expect from a top-tier SMG so it’s no surprise that the Rival-9 has become a solid meta contender since its release. To get the most out of the Rival-9 in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded you’ll need the best loadout possible, and we’ve got you covered. Contents Best Rival-9 loadout – Rival-9 loadout: perks and equipment – How to unlock Rival-9 in Warzone – Best alternative to Rival-9 in Warzone – Best Rival-9 Warzone loadout Muzzle: ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider – Barrel: Rival-C Cleanshot Barrel – Underbarrel: XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – Rear Grip: Rival Vice Assault Grip – Maximizing effective range is key to getting the most out of the Rival-9 and this is done by equipping both the ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider muzzle and Rival-C Cleanshot Barrel. Not only do these extend its damage ranges but also make the SMG more stable during sustained fire through improved recoil control. Speaking of sustained fire, using the 50 Round Drum magazine attachment is practically a must in Warzone to avoid having to constantly reload. However, this reduces mobility somewhat so to counteract that we recommend the XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop which boosts movement speed, ADS Speed, and sprint-to-fire speed. One of the big downsides to the Rival-9 is that its recoil can be a little difficult to manage, especially in medium-range gunfights. The Rival Vice Assault Grip rear grip solves this by making the SMG’s recoil much more predictable. Rival-9 Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Mountaineer Fall from higher heights without taking fatal damage. – – Perk 2: Double Time Increases Tac Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – – Perk 3: Fast Hands Swap weapons faster – – Perk 4: Resolute Speed boost when you are hit with an enemy shot – – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Mountaineer is going to help you keep moving around the battle, since it will help reduce fall damage and open up more paths for you to take. Double Time is going to build off of this by doubling your Tactical Sprint Duration. This is fantastic for playing fast and pushing other teams. Fast Hands makes a lot of sense with the Rival-9 as the SMG’s limited range forces you to run a heavier assault rifle, LMG, or sniper with it. All of these are slow to swap to which can cause problems. Fast Hands drastically improves weapon swapping speed and provides a nice boost to reload speed too. Resolute rounds out the Perk package through giving you a burst of speed when you are hit with an enemy shot. This improves you mobility further by allowing you a chance to get out of sticky situation much quicker. For equipment, the classic Frag Grenade is a solid choice as the ability to cook it and have it explode at just the right moment can leave enemies vulnerable. Meanwhile, a Smoke Grenade stands out as the best tactical as it can be used to obscure open areas and safely revive teammates not in cover. How to unlock Rival-9 in Warzone The Rival-9 is unlocked through the Armory, a unique mechanic introduced in MW3 that you can access from Level 25. After reaching this rank select the Rival-9 in the Armory and complete three daily challenges to obtain it. Alternatively, successfully exfiling in Zombies with a Rival-9 will also unlock the fast-firing SMG. Best alternative to Rival-9 in Warzone Another similar weapon to the Rival-9 that also excels at close range is the Striker 9. It performs very similarly to the Rival-9 offering a comparable TTK, effective range, and handling. SMGs have always been a strong part of the Warzone meta and that’s continuing with Season 4 Reloaded. Be sure to know everything about the other SMG options like the Superi 46, Striker, FJX Horus, and WSP-9.

Best Rival-9 Loadout for MW3: Class setup, Attachments, Perks, & more ActivisionMW3’s Rival-9 is a close-range beast and is totally worth investing into if you want to rack up kills in multiplayer. Here’s the best Rival-9 loadout so you can turn this top-tier SMG into a complete demon, and dominate every close encounter in the game. Modern Warfare 3 boasts an impressive arsenal of guns, each with their own attachments that players can use to customize any weapon to their liking. One of these guns is the Rival-9, a submachine gun that prides itself on an explosive TTK (time-to-kill) at close ranges, allowing the user to completely command any close-quarter-combat engagements, especially adept at flanking and taking down MCW Assault Rifle users holding down longe-range Line-Of-Sights (LOS). Here’s everything you need to know about how to build the best Rival-9 Loadout in the game including the full Class setup, complete with Attachments and Perks. Contents Best Rival-9 loadout – Rival-9 loadout: perks and equipment – How to unlock the Rival-9 in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Rival-9 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Rival-9 loadout Stock: MTZ Marauder Stock – Rear Grip: Rival Vice Assault Grip – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Muzzle: Purifier Muzzle Brake S – Barrel: Rival-C Clearshot Barrel – While the Rival-9 in MW3 is a close-range monster, the above setup helps improve its mobility and recoil control, letting you pepper foes at range. That said, the Stock can be replaced with a Laser or an Optic, since the MTZ Marauder Stock combined with the Rival Vice Assault Grip provides a great benefit to the Rival-9’s “Recoil” and “Gun Kick” control. The Purifier Muzzle Brake S also improves horizontal recoil control but reduces bullet velocity a little. DR-6 Handstop add to Rival-9’s deadly factor as it enhances mobility. Rival-9 loadout: perks and equipment MW3 features a revamped perk system that makes players choose various gear for additional benefits. Check out our full breakdown of the new perk system, since there’s a lot to learn. Vest: Infantry Vest – Gloves: Scavenger Gloves – Boots: Covert Sneakers – Gear: Ghost T/V Camo – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Battle Rage – Field Upgrade: DDOS – Use the Infantry Vest to increase your tac sprint duration, reducing its cooldown time and allowing you to reach your kills, then use your Scavenger Gloves to restock your ammo and slide-cancel round your next enemy with Covert Sneakers to sneak up on enemies with ease. Since you’ll be running all over the map, Ghost T/V Camo will keep you off the radar of opponents, blocking you from UAVs and heartbeat sensors when you’re moving. One thing to note is the Field Upgrade and Vest are up to personal preference. DDOS can be replaced with Dead Silence if you want to be a real menace in the lobby. If you do go Dead Silence, swap the Covert Sneakers out for Running Sneakers to move around quickly. On the other hand, you can use the Overkill Vest for increased weapon swap speed and reload while sprinting capability. How to unlock the Rival-9 in Modern Warfare 3 The Rival-9 isn’t unlocked by conventional methods in MW3. Instead, you’ll have to unlock it via the Armory Unlocks. Reach level 25, and then complete three daily or bonus challenges to earn the Rival-9 in MW3. Best Rival-9 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 The WSP-9 is one of the best alternative SMGs to the Rival-9 in Modern Warfare 3. However, you’ll need to make sure to land shots accurately, or else you’ll get outgunned by other players. For more of the best Modern Warfare 3 loadouts keep up to date with Dexerto’s dedicated Call of Duty page. Best Modern Warfare 3 AR class loadouts | How to slide cancel in Modern Warfare 3 | Best controller settings in Modern Warfare 3 | All MW3 maps & modes | How to play Modern Warfare 3 at 120 FPS on PS5 | Modern Warfare 3 TTK | How long is the Modern Warfare 3 campaign? | MW3 Campaign mission list | How to fix packet burst in MW3 | How to play MW3 Zombies in third person

Best Renetti Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks The Renetti is a unique yet powerful pistol that is amongst the best close-range weapons. To help you get the most out of the unusual burst gun we’ve made the best Renetti loadout possible to use in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Effectively an M9 converted to be burst-fire, the Renetti is based on the real-world Beretta 93R. It should be familiar to long-term Call of Duty fans having first appeared as the M93 Raffica way back in the original MW2, as well as making later appearances in Black Ops 2 and Cold War. This unique handgun fires in a three-round burst letting it reach spectacular fire rates and producing a truly incredible TTK up close. However, it doesn’t offer great range and can be tricky to control, especially with a suboptimal build. To avoid using a shoddy setup we’ve put together this best Renetti Warzone loadout for you to use and dominate in Season 4 Reloaded. Best Renetti Warzone loadout Muzzle: ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider – Rear Grip: Bruen Onslaught Assault Grip – Conversion Kit: JAK Ferocity Carbine Kit – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – The Renetti was rightfully powerful when built for Akimbo, yet it caused widespread madness when players found out the power of the JAK Ferocity Carbine Kit. This Aftermarket part turns the burst pistol into an SMG a perfect companion in Warzone. Despite the part receiving a nerf, it’s still good and is a great starting point for dominating close range. Since the kit converts the pistol into an SMG, its recoil is wildly high. To mitigate the increase in recoil, the trifecta of the Bruen Onslaught Assault Grip and the ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider make this weapon’s recoil exceptionally manageable in close to mid-range engagements. The JAK Glassless Optic is arguably the best optic in the game that can help you land all your shots in short- to mid-range skirmishes. It features some of the cleanest sightlines in Warzone. Round it out with a 50 Round Drum, and you’ve got yourself a very capable secondary weapon. Renetti Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time increases Tac Sprint duration – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand Faster reloading – – Perk 3: Quick Fix Trigger health regeneration when inserting an armor plate – – Perk 4: Resolute 5% speed boost when hit with an enemy bullet – – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Given the Renetti is a pistol and therefore offers great mobility it makes sense to run both Double Time and Sleight of Hand. The former improves Tactical Sprint helping you run around faster while the latter keeps your Renetti loaded up and ready to fight at a moment’s notice. There are a few solid options in Perk 3 but Quick Fix stands out most thanks to the faster healing it provides. Being able to kickstart health regeneration when doing something as common as inserting an armor plate is a huge help. Having Resolute is always useful as it provides a boost of speed whenever you are hit with enemy fire. This is going make your character even more mobile than it already is with the Renetti. A Semtex is never a bad choice as this piece of lethal equipment can be quickly thrown to pressure or finish off a downed enemy trying to revive. As for tactical, landing a Smoke Grenade provides you with cover that you wouldn’t otherwise have in a battle. How to unlock Renetti in Warzone The Renetti is unlocked at level 21 by either playing Warzone, multiplayer, or Zombies. Another option is to extract with a Renetti in MWZ which will also unlock the burst fire pistol. How to unlock Jak Ferocity Carbine Kit in Warzone You can unlock the Jak Ferocity Carbine kit by completing the following challenge: Kill 30 enemies using five attachments with the Renetti. Best alternative to Renetti in Warzone Although it’s a very different take on a deadly close-range handgun, the TYR has a lot of overlap with the Renetti with both having fantastic TTKs up close and benefitting greatly from akimbo. Alternatively, the COR-45 is a very capable sidearm, especially with the XRK IP-V2 Conversion Kit equipped. With the Renetti effectively becoming an SMG and a dominant force in the Warzone Season 4 meta, learn more about other options in this vein like the Superi 46, FJX Horus, and Striker 9.

Best Renetti MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionA big range buff in Modern Warfare 3 Season 3 has elevated the Renetti, making it the best secondary weapon in the game. Here is the best Renetti MW3 loadout to dominate multiplayer. When built correctly, the Renetti can be turned into a fully automatic SMG that rivals even the best in the category. It becomes a true force of nature when used up close, as long as you know what you’re doing with its attachments. You’ll want to use this Renetti loadout to make it as strong as possible, with these attachments chosen to speed up its TTK and allow this pistol to compete with SMGs. Contents Best Renetti MW3 loadout – Best Renetti MW3 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock Renetti in MW3 – How to unlock Jak Ferocity Carbine Kit in MW3 – Best Renetti alternative in MW3 – Best Renetti loadout in Modern Warfare 3 Attachments Conversion Kit: JAK Ferocity Carbine Kit – Muzzle: Bruen Tri-Port – Laser: KR HX-15 Laser Light – Optic: DF105 Reflex Sight – Magazine: 30 Round Mag – The JAK Ferocity Carbine Kit is key to this build with it changing the Renetti from a three-round burst pistol to a fully-automatic weapon instead. This unique conversion kit also provides a huge boost to damage range making the Renetti much more versatile with it remaining competitive up until almost 20 meters. There is a big downside to this powerful conversion kit though, it adds a lot of recoil. To mitigate this and make the Renetti much more controllable, equip the Bruen Tri-Port muzzle. Even with this attachment, there is still some recoil but it shouldn’t be a problem as long as you stick to the appropriate ranges for this gun. Since the conversion kit boosts the Renetti’s fire rate you should also use an extended magazine like the 30 Round Mag to minimize the frequency of reloads. Also, the DF105 Reflex Sight is an underrated optic that is great on the Renetti which doesn’t get access to the meta reticles typically used on other guns. The final attachment to equip is the KR HX-15 Laser Light. This laser massively boosts several key stats including ADS Speed and Sprint to Fire Speed which are essential to keep the Renetti feeling snappy and able to compete with other close-range weapons. Best Renetti MW3 class: Perks & equipment Vest: Infantry Vest – Gloves: Commando Gloves – Boots: Stalker Boots – Gear: Bone Conduction Headset – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Battle Rage – When deciding what perks to use the Infantry Vest is always a solid option with it increasing Tactical Sprint duration and improving mobility. This works well with the Renetti which is a highly mobile weapon as is the case with all MW3’s pistols. To make pushing other players as easy as possible it’s also recommended to use the Stalker Boots which increase strafe and ADS movement speed. This gives you an additional tool to outmaneuver enemies, which is further enhanced by the Bone Conduction Headset which makes enemy footsteps louder letting you predict their next move with ease. Since you will be constantly running and gunning with this class it also makes sense to use the Commando Gloves. These powerful gloves let you reload while sprinting, so you’ll be less likely to get caught out while reloading. The recommended equipment also revolves around playing fast with Battle Rage providing rapid health regeneration. This is perfect for taking back-to-back gunfights in quick succession, with an additional Semtex offering another way to secure kills when the Renetti can’t get the job done. How to unlock the Renetti in Modern Warfare 3 The Renetti can be unlocked by reaching Level 21 which will take you no time at all. Once the Renetti is unlocked, you’ll then need to progress through 22 gun levels to acquire its unique attachments. How to unlock Jak Ferocity Carbine Kit in Modern Warfare 3 You can unlock the Jak Ferocity Carbine conversion kit by completing the following challenge: Kill 30 enemies while using five attachments with the Renetti. Best Renetti alternative in Modern Warfare 3 A great alternative to the Renetti is the FJX Horus, an SMG that was added in MW3 Season 3 which excels up close just like the meta pistol. It also has comparable mobility making it a great weapon to sprint around with and constantly push enemies. Be sure to check out these other MW3 loadouts to make sure your classes aren’t holding you back: Best MW3 loadouts | COR-45 loadout | TYR loadout | WSP Stinger loadout

Best Reclaimer 18 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe Reclaimer 18 is a viable shotgun in Warzone that trades raw power for mobility, and this is the best loadout to take advantage of its strengths. Added in Season 4 Reloaded, the Reclaimer 18 is Call of Duty‘s latest rendition of the iconic SPAS-12. The shotgun that once dominated the original Modern Warfare 2 returns, with some additional features that help it stand out. Most notably, the Reclaimer 18 now has a fire mode toggle that lets you switch between pump action and semi-auto on the go. These different settings have unique damage profiles and benefit different playstyles, though pump action is generally the superior option. As with most shotguns, the Reclaimer 18 requires a very specific build to be competitive, so here’s the best Reclaimer 18 loadout. Best Reclaimer 18 Warzone loadout Here’s the best Reclaimer 18 loadout to make the shotgun a powerful Tac-Stance weapon: Muzzle: Bryson Choke – Laser: Kimura Ryl33 Laser Light – Stock: No Stock – Underbarrel: Bruen Bastion Angled Grip – Rear Grip: Haste XV Grip Tape – For the best Reclaimer 18 build possible, you’ll want to use the pump action mode while in Tac-Stance. To enable this, most attachments chosen should improve Tactical Stance Spread to make the iconic shotgun more consistent. This will also improve the Reclaimer 18’s effective range, more so than any of its barrel attachments. To make the Reclaimer 18’s Tactical Stance Spread as accurate as possible, use the Kimura Ryl 33 Laser Light, Bruen Bastion Angled Grip, and Haste XV Grip Tape. These provide a huge 60% improvement to Tac-Stance spread, while also boosting hip-fire accuracy for when you are in a pinch and don’t have time to aim in. Similarly, the Bryson Choke further improves Tactical Stance Spread and Hip-Fire Accuracy, but it’s the muzzle’s 38% boost to overall spread that makes it so strong. This attachment improves consistency a lot, which is essential for making sure you won’t need a third shot to down an enemy. Finally, No Stock not only delivers that iconic SPAS-12 look, but also boosts a wide range of key mobility, handling, and accuracy stats. The big downside to this stock attachment is that it butchers the Reclaimer 18’s iron sights to the point where they are practically unusable, but this problem is entirely circumvented by using Tac-Stance. Best Reclaimer 18 Warzone class: Perks and equipment Perk 1: Double Time – Increases Tactical Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – Perk 2: Mountaineer – Fall from higher heights without taking fatal damage. – Perk 3: Tracker – Enemies leave behind a footprint trail and enemy death markers are visible. Kill markers are hidden from enemy teams. – Perk 4: Birdseye – Your UAV, Portable Radar, or UAV Tower shows the heading of the enemy for your squad and detects players using Ghost. – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Stun Grenade – While a slower approach can work with the Reclaimer 18, a shotgun loadout like this works best in Warzone when you push other squads. To do so effectively, mobility-boosting perks like Double Time and Mountaineer are a must, as they let you get around Warzone’s maps much faster. Equally, Tracker and Birdseye make for a great combination when trying to track down enemy players. The latter perk helps find them in the first place, while the former makes it impossible for them to escape once you are close. With no way out, enemies are forced to take you on in a close-range duel where the Reclaimer 18 is at its best. For equipment, a Throwing Knife has great synergy with the Reclaimer 18. It can be used to finish off downed targets to avoid wasting additional shots. Given the shotgun’s slower fire rate and reload speed, saving shots where possible is extremely important. Last but not least, a Stun Grenade immobilizes other players, letting you get up close and blast them away before they can react. How to unlock Reclaimer 18 in Warzone The Reclaimer 18 can be unlocked by completing Sector 23 on the Battle Pass, added in the Season 4 Reloaded update. Here are all the challenges you’ll need to complete to get the Reclaimer 18: 30 Minutes Double XP Token: Get 10 Operator or Special Zombie kills with shotguns – Angel of Death Large Decal: Get 10 Operator or Special Zombie hipfire kills with shotguns – Kill Shot Emblem: Get 5 Operator or Special Zombie kills while aiming down sights with shotguns – Elegant Riposte Finishing Move: Get 7 Operator or Special Zombie Tac Stance kills with shotguns – Reclaimer 18*: Get 5 Operator headshots or Special Zombie critical kills with shotguns – *Only available once the first four challenges have been completed. Best alternative to Reclaimer 18 in Warzone The Lockwood 680 is a more powerful option for players who enjoy using pump-action shotguns. Though it isn’t quite as mobile as the Reclaimer 18, the Lockwood 680 makes up for that with its superior damage and better overall consistency. Some other shotguns that are viable in Warzone include the Haymaker and Riveter, both of which excel thanks to their fast fire rates. As for what to partner with your shotgun build of choice, check out the best Warzone loadouts as well as which sniper rifles and assault rifles are meta right now.

Best Reclaimer 18 MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks DexertoThe Reclaimer 18 is a decent shotgun that can be competitive in multiplayer with the right build, so here’s the best MW3 loadout to make the most of it. Bringing back the iconic SPAS-12, the Reclaimer 18 is a unique shotgun that was added in the Season 4 Reloaded update. While it feels and plays a lot like its predecessors from older Call of Duty titles, this latest rendition of the SPAS-12 comes with some new tricks. The biggest change of all is that the Reclaimer 18 can switch between semi-auto and pump action fire on the go, much like its real-world counterpart. This makes it extremely versatile, with the pump action offering superior Damage Range, and the semi-auto’s improved fire rate making it more dangerous up close. In general, you are better off using the Reclaimer 18 in pump action mode to secure one-shot kills, and this meta loadout will make doing so as effective as possible. Best Reclaimer 18 MW3 loadout Here’s the best Reclaimer 18 loadout to make the shotgun more consistent and maximize its Damage Range: Muzzle: Bryson Choke – Barrel: Discourager 900 Heavy Barrel – Stock: No Stock – Underbarrel: Bruen Bastion Angled Grip – Rear Grip: Haste XV Grip Tape – To get the most out of the Reclaimer 18, you’ll want to use it with Tac-Stance active. This takes advantage of its excellent mobility stats, while also circumventing the shotgun’s dreadful iron sights when No Stock is equipped. While No Stock is an otherwise excellent attachment that boosts several key stats, it effectively makes ADS worthless by obscuring most of the screen. To make Tactical Stance as strong as possible, you need to use attachments that tighten Tac-Stance Spread. For this, a combination of the Bryson Choke, Bruen Bastion Angled Grip, and the Haste XV Grip Tape works wonders. The Bryson Choke also provides additional bonuses to the shotgun’s overall spread, which helps make the Reclaimer 18 much more consistent. Round off the build with the Discourager 900 Heavy Barrel, the only barrel attachment on the Reclaimer 18 that boosts Damage Range. Though this boost isn’t too substantial, it does still make a difference and will score you a few extra kills each game. Best Reclaimer 18 MW3 class: Perks and equipment Vest: Assassin Vest – Immune to UAV and enemy radar effects and kills don’t display skulls. – Gloves: Commando Gloves – Reload while sprinting and they improve sprint to fire time. – Boots: Covert Sneakers – Eliminates footstep sounds. – Gear: Bone Conduction Headset – Reduces player combat and environmental sounds to allow improved focus on hearing enemy footsteps. – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Shotguns like the Reclaimer 18 are only good in multiplayer if you can get up close and personal. To do this without being noticed, both the Assassin Vest and Covert Sneakers are needed. When used together, these meta perks prevent you from appearing on enemy UAVs and make your footsteps completely silent. The Commando Gloves are another perk that work well with the Reclaimer 18. This shotgun has a particularly slow reload speed, so being able to reload while on the move is a huge plus. Also, the 10% improvement to Sprint To Fire Speed helps you avoid getting caught out when running around. For the Gear slot, Bone Conduction Headset is always a strong option. This perk amplifies enemy footsteps, making them easier to hear and locate. This additional intel is incredibly valuable when trying to track down the whereabouts of other players. Though Modern Warfare 3 offers a lot of unique equipment, the classic combination of a Frag Grenade and Flash Grenade remains as strong as ever. This age-old combo provides the perfect balance of lethality and utility for pushing the other team and coming out on top. How to unlock Reclaimer 18 in Modern Warfare 3 The Reclaimer 18 can be unlocked by completing Sector 23 on the Battle Pass, added in the Season 4 Reloaded update. Here are all the challenges you’ll need to complete to get the Reclaimer 18: 30 Minutes Double XP Token: Get 10 Operator or Special Zombie kills with shotguns – Angel of Death Large Decal: Get 10 Operator or Special Zombie hipfire kills with shotguns – Kill Shot Emblem: Get 5 Operator or Special Zombie kills while aiming down sights with shotguns – Elegant Riposte Finishing Move: Get 7 Operator or Special Zombie Tac Stance kills with shotguns – Reclaimer 18*: Get 5 Operator headshots or Special Zombie critical kills with shotguns – *Only available once the first four challenges have been completed. Best Reclaimer 18 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 The Lockwood 680 is the obvious alternative to the Reclaimer 18, as it’s the strongest pump action shotgun in MW3. It offers superior damage range and consistency to the Reclaimer 18 but isn’t as mobile. To figure out what to partner this meta Reclaimer 18 build with, check out the best MW3 loadouts and assault rifles in the current meta. Alternatively, you can ensure your Modern Warfare 3 experience is optimized with these guides on the best controller settings and best PC settings.

Best Rapp H Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionLMGs in Warzone 2 hit some real blows and the Rapp H is one of them. So, here’s a Rapp H loadout for battle royale with the perfect set of attachments and Perks. In most shooters, LMGs often get overshadowed by Assault Rifles, making them underrated in return. However, by no means are they inefficient, especially in games like Warzone. The BR experience can get pretty heated up at any given moment and this is when the magazine sizes of LMGs shine. One such LMG in the game is the Rapp H, which not only boasts a massive magazine but also allows you to spray down enemies even from a distance. Keep reading as we’ve listed down some of the best attachments for the Rapp H LMG, making it deadly both in medium and long-range combat. Contents Best Rapp H Warzone 2 loadout – Best Rapp H Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Rapp H in Warzone 2 – Best Rapp H alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Rapp H Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Polarfire-S – Optic: Schlager 3.4X – Rear Grip: Lachmann TCG-10 – Stock: MEER Recoil-56 Factory – Underbarrel: VX Pineapple – Starting with the Polarfire-S, this muzzle suppresses the sound produced by the weapon and enhances the bullet velocity, damage range, and makes the recoil smooth. This is essential when you’re trying to shoot down multiple enemies at once as it helps with spray transfer. The Schlager 3.4X optic gives you adequate zoom to trace enemy players so that you don’t miss out on any shots. You may also experiment with this attachment as optics boil down to a personal preference. For the rear grip, we’d recommend the Lachmann TCG-10 one as it helps to control the recoil further. The MEER Recoil-56 Factory stock is a good option for this weapon as it enhances your walking speed while aiming, recoil, and sprint speed as well. And lastly, we’d recommend the VX Pineapple underbarrel as it improves hip fire accuracy (comes in handy when enemies are in close proximity) and helps to keep the recoil steady. Best Rapp H Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Perk Package: Weapon Specialist Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Flash Grenade – The con of using an LMG is reduced mobility and it’s no different for Rapp H. That’s exactly why the Weapon Specialist perk package is suitable here as it gives you access to Overkill. A second primary allows you to run a meta SMG like the Fennec 45 or Vaznev-9K giving you an edge over the enemies in close proximity. The Strong Arm perk allows you to be more precise with your throwables while Spotter allows you to spot enemy field upgrades, killstreaks, or equipment through walls. For the Ultimate Perk, Weapon Specialist uses Survivor that pings enemies who downed you, and your teammates can revive you quicker. We recommend the combination of a Grenade for flushing enemies out of cover and a Flash Grenade for disorienting them at the same time. How to unlock the Rapp H in Warzone 2 Unlocking the Rapp H LMG in Warzone 2 is one tedious process. At first, you’ll need to reach Rank 16 which unlocks the Lachmann-762 Battle Rifle and take that to Level 13. Once you do that, the Lachmann-556 Assault Rifle gets unlocked, which further needs leveling up to 16. This will finally unlock the Rapp H in the game. Best Rapp H alternatives in Warzone 2 Considering that Rapp H is an LMG, mobility becomes a concern as its one of the most important aspects in battle royale. So, if you’re looking for a more mobile option, you may go with the TAQ-56 AR as it deals great damage and is also one of the meta weapons at the moment. If SMG is your preferred weapon choice, then Vaznev-9K is one potential option. So, there you have it — that’s all for our Rapp H loadout. For more on Warzone 2, be sure to check out our other guides: Warzone 2 & Modern Warfare 2 Season 1 Battle Pass | Best TAQ-56 Warzone 2 loadout | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | All new Warzone 2 features explained | Best SP-R 208 Warzone 2 loadout | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2?

Best Rapp H MW2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionModern Warfare 2‘s Rapp H is a light machine gun with plenty of power and enough bullets to deal some devastating damage. But the best power comes with the best loadout. Modern Warfare 2 comes with a plethora of unique weapons, although a majority of players already have their favorites. For those wanting to branch out, they may find a new favorite in the Rapp H LMG. This weapon is large but powerful and is capable of plenty with the right loadout. We’ve compiled the best loadout for the Rapp H so you can get the most out of this light machine gun. Here’s the best Rapp H MW2 loadout to get the best out of this LMG. Contents Best Rapp H Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Rapp H Modern Warfare 2 class & Perks – How to unlock Rapp H in Modern Warfare 2 – Best alternatives to Rapp H in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Rapp H Modern Warfare 2 loadout Muzzle: Polarfire Suppressor – Barrel: 10.6“ Lachstrike barrel – Underbarrel: DI-Grip 4.5 – Stock: FT Mobile Stock – Rear Grip: LMK64 Grip – The first thing we suggest for the Rapp H is the Polarfire Suppressor muzzle. This will notably increase your damage range, and keep that tricky recoil down, allowing you to wipe out an enemy from a safer position. As for the barrel, the 10.6“ Lachstrike barrel is fantastic for keeping this LMG up while keeping the damage you require. It helps your ADS and hipfire control whenever you need to just spray and pray. The underbarrel has many great options to choose from but we suggest the DI-Grip 4.5 for its mobility and accuracy. Ultimately, the Rapp H is a quick, powerful weapon that needs a little control on the recoil and mobility. We recommend using an FT Mobile Stock to help you keep it stable when aiming down your sight. Lastly, the LMK64 Grip dramatically alters the kick that often comes from an LMG like the Rapp H, making it much easier to handle and more accurate when needed. Best Rapp H Modern Warfare 2 class & Perks Base Perk 1: Scavenger – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Focus – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Flash Grenade – With Modern Warfare 2 introducing a brand new Perk system, it’s important you pick the right combination for your playstyle and weapon. We recommend building your own Perk Package rather than relying on the premade options. The two Base Perks we recommend using are Scavenger and Overkill. After all, you can’t go wrong with more ammo from Scavenger, and with the LMG being relatively bulky, having another primary weapon at your side is extremely valuable. With the weight of the Rapp H being extremely heavy, a Bonus Perk like Focus is great. it enables you to aim down the sight better and hold your breath longer. The Ultimate Perk goes without much description. Ghost makes you undetectable to enemy radars, keeping you safe when you really need it. As for equipment, Semtex and Flash Grenades are the best pairing. They combine easy lethal kills with the ability to stop an enemy in confusion on objective modes. How to unlock Rapp H in Modern Warfare 2 Unlocking the Rapp H is not the easiest feat in Modern Warfare 2. You’ll first need to reach Rank 16 in the game, this will unlock the Lachmann-763. Then, get to level 13 with that gun and unlock the Lachmann-556. Lastly, reach level 16 with that weapon and you’ll unlock the Rapp H. Best alternatives to Rapp H in Modern Warfare 2 The Rapp H is a relatively bulky weapon to use, which is often the nature of LMGs. So, if you’re looking for something lighter, an SMG like the FSS Hurricane is ideal. Or, if you want something a little more versatile and easily unlocked, stick with the Lachmann-556. That’s the best loadout for the Rapp H in Modern Warfare 2. While trying to unlock it, take a look at some of our other handy Modern Warfare 2 guides: Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best RAM-9 Loadout for Warzone: Class setup, attachments, Perks, more With the release of Season 4 Reladed, the RAM-9 continues to be a solid SMG you can use in Warzone thanks to its great close-range performance. This is our optimized loadout to get the most out of it. The RAM-9 has become by far the most used SMGs in Warzone, outperforming all of its competitors since it was added in Season 2. While other SMGs have taken over as the best of the bunch, the RAM-9 is still sitting strong. To do that, you’ll want to use this recommended loadout that has been fine-tuned to make the most out of one of Warzone’s strongest SMG in Season 4 Reloaded. Contents Best RAM-9 Warzone loadout Muzzle: ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider – Comb: Recon Comb – Underbarrel: XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop – Magazine: 50 Round Mag – Rear Grip: Retort 90 Grip Tape – The best part of the ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider is that it not only helps keep your location unknown but also gives a significant boost to gun control and ADS speed. This makes the weapon far more effective from a greater range than it originally is. This aim control is further made better through the use of the Recon Comb and Retort 90 Grip Tape while the XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop will boost your movement speed to help you stay moving while landing shots. The latter is exceptional at keeping you moving around the battlefield. Finally, using the 50 Round Drum will give you a bit of an ADS Speed boost, and also provide more bullets to fire in a round to take your targets down. RAM-9 Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time increases Tac Sprint duration – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand reload faster – – Perk 3: Quick Fix regenerate health when killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute move faster when hit with an enemy shot – – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stun Grenade – Given the RAM-9 is an SMG, you’ll want to gear up your glass to maximize the weapon’s strengths. Double Time and Resolute will do just that, with both of them helping your movement speed around the map in all situations. Perk 3 is a bit of a toss-up since Quick Fix is arguably one of the best Perks in Warzone, provided you’re an aggressive player and can be a lifesaver in many situations. Finally, Sleight of Hand can help you keep your gun ready at a moment’s notice so that you will never be caught without having any bullets ready to fire. All of these combine to make you faster, more effective, and able to maneuver around any combat scenario. How to unlock RAM-9 in Warzone The RAM-9 is unlocked by activating its Armory Challenge and completing five Daily Challenges. You can also extract it in Zombies to instantly unlock the weapon. Best alternative to RAM-9 in Warzone The best alternative to the RAM-9 is the HRM-9. Both are lower-accuracy, high-damage SMGs that are great for higher-skill players who want to dominate up close and push other teams aggressively. Be sure to stay on top of SMGs as they continue to be a popular part of the Warzone meta. Learn more about the FJX Horus, Superi 46, WSP-9, and Striker.

Best RAM-9 MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks This shrunk-down SMG may look unusual but it’s one of the best weapons in Modern Warfare 3 if built right. Here is the best RAM-9 MW3 loadout to dominate both up close and at medium range in Season 4 Reloaded. When it was first added, first impressions of the RAM-9 were that it was powerful but difficult to control. However, this loadout transforms the meta SMG into not just a viable option, but something that is top-tier with it being one of the most used guns since Season 3. Here is the best RAM-9 MW3 loadout designed to make the submachine both deadly up close while remaining competitive at medium range. Best RAM-9 MW3 loadout Attachments Muzzle: ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider – Comb: Recon Comb – Stock: HVS 3.4 Pad – Underbarrel: FTAC MSP-98 Handstop – Rear Grip: Retort 90 Grip Tape – Given the RAM-9’s intense recoil, you’ll want to use attachments that reduce the SMG’s vertical kick. The two most impactful that don’t slow down key handling stats are the HVS 3.4 Pad and Retort 90 Grip Tape. This combination also provides a boost to Firing Aim Stability which makes it much easier to keep shots on target. The ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider is another fantastic attachment with it not only suppressing the RAM-9 but also improving ADS Speed and recoil control. These are all meta stats that benefit the fast-paced gameplay that an SMG like the RAM-9 needs to fulfill its potential. The RAM-9’s handling can be further improved by equipping the Recon Comb which improves the handling of your gun. Finally, the FTAC MSP-98 Handstop will offer further recoil benefits, along with added mobility so that you can land more shots while staying on the move. Best RAM-9 Class: Perks & equipment Vest: Ninja Vest Eliminate footstep sounds, immune to movement reduction effects, bonus Throwing Star/Knife ammo, resupply Throwing Stars/Knives every 25 seconds. – – Gloves: Stalker Gloves Increased strafe and ADS movement speed. – – Boots: Covert Sneakers Eliminates the sounds of your footsteps – – Gear: Data Jacker Enemies you kill drop a smartphone. Collecting the smartphone generates a radar ping from that location. – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Using the Ninja Vest is going to keep you on the down-low for the duration of the match. Even more, though, it replenishes your Throwing Knives so that you can stay loaded with a quick, deadly throw. Speaking of stealth, the Covert Sneakers are easily the best boots in MW3. When equipped, they remove all footstep audio letting you sprint around freely without being heard. This is great with MW3’s Assassin Vest and Boreal-6C Suppressed Barrel which make flanking with the RAM-9 extremely effective. The Stalker Gloves will keep you moving during a fight, and with the attachments above, you will be sure to hit a majority of your shots. Round out your equipment with the Data Jacker to stay aware of where other players are, and if you are about to be surprised by someone. How to unlock RAM-9 in Modern Warfare 3 The RAM-9 is unlocked through the Armory, accessible at level 25. After activating the RAM-9 in MW3’s Armory, either complete 3 daily challenges or win 3 multiplayer matches to obtain the SMG. Alternatively, the RAM-9 can be acquired in Zombies by successfully extracting with one. Best RAM-9 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 The WSP Swarm is another SMG in MW3 that has a great TTK up close but doesn’t quite have the damage range of the RAM-9. Even if it isn’t versatile, the WSP Swarm is incredible as long as you can only take close-range duels. SMGs are some of the best guns in MW3, so learn about other options like the Striker, Superi 46, and the FJX Horus.

Best RAM-7 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks Although its recoil can be tricky to handle, the RAM-7 is undoubtedly one of the best weapons to use with your Warzone Season 4 Reloaded loadout, and this is our recommended build. The RAM-7 continues to be a popular option in the game, bringing a solid punch with some unfortunate hits to visual recoil. Because of this, it’s best to craft your loadout to try and counter this issue with recoil and allow the gun to tear apart your enemies. So check out our breakdown on the best way to equip the RAM-7 in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded to reach its full potential. Best RAM-7 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Casus brake – Barrel: Cronen Headwind Long Barrel – Stock: HVS 3.4 Pad – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – Magazine: 60 Round Drum – By far the RAM-7’s biggest flaw is its tricky recoil which doesn’t lend itself well to Warzone. Thankfully, using a combination of the Casus Brake muzzle and Bruen Heavy Support Grip underbarrel massively reduces this and makes it possible to beam targets with some practice. The brake will also give you improved ADS Speed as an added bonus. The Cronen Headwind Long Barrel will make the RAM-7 more effective through improving its bullet velocity and damage range to help it excel in long-range encounters. The HVS 3.4 Pad will only add to this help with the gun’s recoil, while the 60 Round Drum makes sure you take down your target before having to reload. RAM-7 Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time Increases the duration of your Tac Sprint – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand reload faster – – Perk 3: Quick FIx regenerates health when killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute faster movement when hit with an enemy shot – – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Keeping with the theme of making the RAM-7 mobile, Double Time is a natural choice as it enhances Tactical Sprint making it easier to get around the map quickly. Sleight of Hand is going to give you a better chance of keeping your gun locked and loaded when you need it. Quick Fix will help you with health regeneration after a tough fight, as killing players or inserting a plate instantly triggers health regeneration. Resolute will further help with movement by giving you a boost when you are in the middle of a firefight and trying to reposition. A Frag Grenade is a solid choice for lethal as it can be thrown quickly and is excellent in dealing damage and pressuring enemies hiding in cover. The Smoke Grenade is going to provide you with excellent cover to close the gap between you and your enemies. How to unlock RAM-7 in Warzone The RAM-7 can be unlocked by activating the challenge in the Armory and completing daily challenges. Alternatively, you can extract it in Zombies to instantly unlock it. Best alternative to RAM-7 in Warzone Although not quite as strong the Bruen MK9 is another good option that has comparable mobility and recoil to the RAM-7. Some players may prefer the feel of the SVA thanks to its superior handling which makes it more suited to a fast-paced playstyle. Assault Rifles are among the best weapons in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded and you will want to know about other options like the MCW, Holger 556, and the MTZ-556.

Best RAM-7 Warzone loadout class: Attachments, setup, perks Infinity WardThe RAM-7 has a fast rate of fire that can quickly destroy your enemies’ armor and plates in a flash. With this loadout, you’ll be sure to dominate matches against your foes. Heading into Warzone Season Three, the RAM-7 assault rifle began to make comeback and climb its way back into the meta. Now, it’s one of the most popular weapons in the game, and it’s easy to see why. This lightning-fast AR famously became popular in Season 4, back when it was introduced as floor loot. It was only then that players quickly discovered how powerful this AR could be. Whether you’re bored of using the game’s Kilo and AMAX loadouts or just want to try a new AR, then you can’t go wrong with this RAM-7 class. Best RAM-7 Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: FSS Ranger – Optic: G.I Mini Reflex – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 50 Round Mags – Perks Perk 1: E.O.D – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: MAC-10 – Equipment: Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Lethal: Semtex – This loadout is perfect to utilize when running with a sniper or AR in your back pocket, ensuring you can compete with enemies at any range. Read More: What will the next Call of Duty game be? – The Monolithic Suppressor and FSS Ranger both extend range, giving the RAM-7 viability at medium ranges – the most frequent gunfight range you’ll find yourself in. The FSS Ranger may slow your ADS, but the boost to range and recoil control is well worth the tradeoff. When picking an optic for this gun, the G.I Mini Reflex is a solid choice, as it provides a clear way to see targets at medium range. As well as this, it also thrives in the chaotic close-quarter gunfights where the long range scopes often struggle. Read More: Best Pelington Warzone loadout class – Next up is the Commando Foregrip and 50 Round Mags, both of which stabilize your shots, ensuring you will get right to the action much faster, as well as aiding recoil without reducing ADS time. If you want to try out some different weapons in Warzone or even Multiplayer, then check out our Call of Duty hub.

Best RAM-7 Loadout for MW3: Class setup, Attachments, Perks & more ActivisionIf you can control its recoil the RAM-7 is undoubtedly one of the best weapons in Modern Warfare 3. To help you do just that we’ve put together the best RAM-7 loadout to use in MW3 including attachments, Perks, and more. The assault rifle meta has evolved a lot since Modern Warfare 3 first launched. The early days saw both of the burst weapons proving top tier but after they were nerfed it was the likes of the MCW and Holger 556 that rose to prominence. In Season 2, the meta has shifted yet again with both the new BP50 and the dominant SVA 545 taking over. Not far behind them though is the RAM-7 which can compete against just about anything assuming you can handle its recoil. To have an easier time keeping this powerful assault rifle on target you’ll want to use our optimized RAM-7 loadout in MW3. Contents Best RAM-7 MW3 loadout Muzzle: Komodo Heavy – Barrel: XRK Coremark 40 Heavy Barrel – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: HVS 3.4 Pad – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – While its TTK is impressive, the RAM-7 suffers from having significant recoil which can make it inconsistent when compared to other ARs. The most impactful attachment to fix this problem is the XRK Coremark 40 Heavy Barrel which is worth using despite the large penalty to mobility it gives. That alone doesn’t make the RAM-7 accurate enough though so it’s also recommended to equip the Komodo Heavy muzzle and HVS 3.4 Pad stock. With all three of these attachments combined the RAM-7 becomes a surprisingly accurate weapon that even lower-skill players can make the most of. Unfortunately, these recoil-reducing attachments make the RAM-7 much slower so to improve handling use the DR-6 Handstop underbarrel. Finally, the RAM-7’s iron sights aren’t always ideal so it’s best to equip a suitable close to medium-range optic like the Slate Reflector. RAM-7 MW3 Loadout: Perks and Equipment Vest: CCT Comms Vest – Gloves: Scavenger Gloves – Boots: Lightweight Boots – Gear: Bone Conduction Headset – Gear: EOD Padding – The RAM-7 isn’t suited to aggressive play so we mainly opt for perks that instead benefit a slower playstyle in MW3. The CCT Comms Vest is great for this as the expanded radar and longer radar pings are perfect for reading the map quickly and avoiding getting caught off guard. To make it as difficult as possible for other players to push you we recommend using both the Bone Conduction Headset and EOD Padding. When combined these not only make enemy footsteps far louder but also help you survive incoming explosives from either enemy lethal equipment or launchers. Though it may not seem an obvious choice for a slower playstyle, Scavenger Gloves are useful for collecting ammo from players you take out. You’ll most likely be going on quite a few lengthy killstreaks with this loadout so being able to refresh your supplies is a must. Finally, Lightweight Boots are useful for quickly repositioning when necessary with them increasing both movement and swim speed. Those wanting to play more aggressively should use the Covert Sneakers instead. How to unlock RAM-7 in Modern Warfare 3 The RAM-7 is unlocked through the Armory by completing 3 daily challenges or winning matches in multiplayer. It was previously available as an unlock by completing Sector A7 of the Season 1 Battle Pass. Best alternative to RAM-7 in MW3 The BAS-B is another high-recoil, high-damage weapon that can excel in the right hands. It has more damage range than the RAM-7 but is held back by having a smaller magazine which will leave you vulnerable at times. Be sure to check out our other MW3 content to stay ahead: Best MW3 guns: Ultimate tier list | Best Modern Warfare 3 AR Class loadouts | SVA 545 loadout | BP50 loadout | MCW loadout | MTZ-556 loadout | FR 5.56 loadout | Holger 556 loadout | WSP-9 loadout | XRK Stalker loadout | RAM-9 loadout | HRM-9 loadout | Rival-9 loadout | WSP Swarm loadout | Renetti loadout | Striker loadout

Best RAAL MG Warzone class loadout: Attachments, setup, perks Treyarch/ActivisionThe RAAL MG is the latest hard-hitting LMG to be added in Warzone Season 5, but what loadout should you use to get the most out of the weapon? Season 5 of Warzone has arrived and while fans are looking forward to the upcoming Call of Duty: Vanguard update, there’s still plenty of content being added in the meantime. Whether it’s the EM2 AR, the Marshal pistol, or the TEC-9 SMG, Season 5 has certainly delivered when it comes to adding brand new guns to the title. Luckily, the devs haven’t stopped there, with the latest patch introducing the Modern Warfare RAAL MG to Warzone. This hard-hitting LMG is perfect for beaming down enemies at long range and dealing a huge amount of damage, but what attachments should you run to make the RAAL MG a viable meta weapon? Best RAAL MG loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: RAAL Monocore – Barrel: 32.0″ RAAL Line Breaker – Laser: Tac Laser – Underbarrel: FFS Oblique – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Perks Double Time – Ghost – Amped – Equipment Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat – Secondary: Marshal – First of all, you’ll want to equip the weapon with the RAAL Monocore in the barrel slot as it offers increased damage range as well as sound suppression. While masking the sound of your bullets is less important in Modern Warfare. it’s key in Warzone to remain undetected on the radar. Next, make sure you use the 32.0″ RAAL Line Breaker barrel for increased bullet velocity, damage range, and recoil control. These stats are all significant if you’re looking to beam enemies down at long range. After that, it’s worth adding in the VLK 3.0x Optic so you have a clear scope that makes it easy to track opponents and land all of your shots. Finally, finish off the loadout with the Tac Laser for decreased ADS Speed and of course, the FFS Oblique to bolster the LMG’s heavy recoil pattern. How to unlock the RAAL MG in Warzone While some new weapons in Warzone require players to complete an incredibly difficult task to unlock them, the devs have made obtaining the RAAL MG relatively easy. All you have to do is get 5 kills in 7 different matches while using LMGs equipped with a Scout Optic. As this is a Modern Warfare weapon, you can even back out of the matches once you’ve got 5 kills to make the process as quick as possible. While you could complete the challenge in Warzone, we recommend doing it in Modern Warfare Multiplayer to make it simple and fast. So, there you have it, that’s the best RAAL MG loadout in Warzone’s current meta. Don’t forget to check out our Call of Duty homepage for all the latest news, guides, and leaks.

Best Raal MG Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisonWarzone 2’s Raal MG is an often overlooked LMG with a great TTK, control and range. Here’s the best Raal MG loadout for Warzone 2 along with the best equipment, perks, class, and attachments for those who want to try this hidden gem of a weapon. Warzone 2‘s Season 4 update is underway and a significant meta shift occurred as an LMG managed to break back into the meta weapon status, but while HCR 56 is enjoying its spotlight other weapons from this category are getting reverly overlooked even though the likes of Raal MG are still viable. Due to the size of all the battle royale maps, long or medium-range weapons in Warzone 2 are absolutely essential if you want to laser beam foes from a distance and maximize your chances of picking up a victory. While rushing aggressively toward an opponent to force a close-quarter skirmish is a viable option, taking them down from afar is a lot less risky and can catch foes off-guard. Although there are plenty of ARs that thrive at long-range, it’s important not to sleep on LMGs, especially the devastating Raal MG. This bulky weapon may lack mobility, but it certainly makes up for it in raw firepower and will make short of any foes in its path with a strong meta loadout. If you’re looking for the best Modern Warfare 2 loadout, we have a great guide for the best Raal MG loadout in MW2. Contents Best Raal MG Warzone 2 loadout – Best Raal MG Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Raal MG in Warzone 2 – Alternative to the Raal MG Warzone 2 loadout – Best Raal MG Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Nilsound 90 – Barrel: 21″ EXF Rhino – Optic: Aim-OP V4 – Underbarrel: SA Side Grip – Rear Grip: Stip-40 Grip – For starters, you’ll want to equip the Nilsound 90 and the 21″ EXF Rhino as these significantly increase the Raal MG’s bullets velocity, damage range, recoil smoothness, and overall damage output. On top of that, the FTAC Reaper also adds some extra suppression to the weapon, which is key in Warzone 2. Following this, make sure to utilize the SA Side Grip and Stip-40 Grip as these increase stability, aim walking steadiness, and decrease kickback overall. This is absolutely essential for the Raal MG as the gun can often be difficult to control. However, with these attachments, the LMG becomes a laser beam at long range, and with enough practice, you’ll be making short work of your foes. Finally, we recommend rounding off the loadout with the Aim-OP V4 optic with a sight that thrives from afar and will allow you to lock onto targets, especially if you’re posted up in a power position. Best Raal MG Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Flash Grenade – The Raal MG may tear opponents down at long range, but it lacks the mobility to deal with foes who push you aggressively and force close-quarter gunfights. That’s exactly why the Weapon Specialist perk package is so important, as it gives you access to Overkill. Having a second primary means you can run a meta SMG like the Fennec 45, Lachmann Sub, or Minibak, giving you an extremely versatile loadout. Not only that this bundle gives you Strong Arm which allows you to be more precise with your throwables and launch them further. As well as this, Spotter ensures you’ll never be caught off guard by enemy field upgrades, killstreaks, or equipment. Finally, for the Ultimate Perk, Weapon Specialist uses Survivor which pings any enemies you get downed by and allows allies to revive you quicker. As for equipment, we recommend a classic Grenade for flushing enemies out of cover and a Flash Grenade for aggressive pushes. How to unlock the Raal MG in Warzone 2 In order to unlock the Raal MG in Warzone 2, you’ll need to reach rank 25 overall which shouldn’t take you too long. Ranking up weapons takes dedication but can be done extremely quickly with the right technique. Alternative to the Raal MG Warzone 2 loadout If the Raal MG is a little too bulky and doesn’t fit your style of play, consider checking out the TAQ-56, otherwise known as the Scar. This AR also deletes foes from a distance but offers a lot more maneuverability and luckily, we’ve got a meta loadout for the weapon right here. Remember, if you’re looking for another LMG that can contend with the Raal, look no further than the RPK, another weapon that can melt foes from afar using our meta loadout. This popular LMG has the highest pick rate in WZ2 and has completely taken over Al Mazrah, so if you’re not using it, you’re missing out. That’s all for our Raal MG loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Best Warzone 2.0 Sniper Rifle class loadouts | Best Kastov 762 Warzone 2 loadout | When is the next Modern Warfare 2 & Warzone 2 Double XP weekend event? | Warzone 2 & Modern Warfare 2 Season 3 Battle Pass: Rewards and tiers | When is Plunder coming back to Warzone 2? | How to get the Tempered Plate Carrier

Best RAAL MG Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionLMGs are underrated but powerful weapons in Modern Warfare 2, and the RAAL MG is one of the strongest the category has to offer. Check out the best RAAL MG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 below, complete with the top attachments and Perks. With over 40 primary weapons to choose from, Modern Warfare 2 players are spoilt for choice when it comes to building the perfect loadout. Most will gravitate towards Assault Rifles and SMGs when looking for the game’s meta weapons, but there are some hidden gems in every category. LMGs pack a real punch in Modern Warfare 2 thanks to their impressive ammo capacity and range, and the RAAL MG looks like it could be the top dog in that particular class. We’ve put together the best RAAL MG loadout in Modern Warfare 2, along with the ideal Perks, equipment, and attachments. Contents Best RAAL MG Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best RAAL MG Modern Warafre 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the RAAL MG in Modern Warfare 2 – Best RAAL MG alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best RAAL MG Modern Warfare 2 loadout Barrel: 21″ EXF Rhino Barrel – Laser: FSS Ole-V Laser – Stock: FSS Riot Stock – Rear Grip: Bruen Q900 Grip Wrap – We kick off our best RAAL MG loadout in MW2 with the 21″ EXF Rhino Barrel, which makes the LMG easier to control at range and buffs the bullet velocity. As you’d expect from a gun in this category, the RAAL MG is quite sluggish, so we’ve added the FSS Ole-V Laser for better ADS and sprint-to-fire speeds. This pairs very well with the FSS Riot Stock, which offers another ADS boost as well as increasing sprint speed and speed while crouching. Lastly, we’ve got the Bruen Q900 Grip Wrap for yet another ADS and sprint-to-fire speed improvement. All in all, this build will make the RAAL MG feel much faster to use, allowing you to snap onto targets and get the first shot in. We’ve also opted for four instead the maximum five attachments here, as none of the other options provide essential benefits to what is already an incredibly powerful and accurate weapon. If you did want to add one more attachment, we recommend choosing an Optic. Best RAAL MG Modern Warafre 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Scavenger – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Quick Fix – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical: Stim – The two Base Perks we’d advise using are Scavenger and Overkill. Scavenger lets you restock on ammo on the go by picking it up from fallen enemies, then Overkill allows you to bring another weapon along for the ride – we recommend an SMG like the Fennec 45. LMGs take a notoriously long time to reload, so Fast Hands will dramatically reduce how long you’re out of the action. For the Ultimate Perk, Quick Fix regenerates your health by killing enemies and holding objectives, keeping you alive for longer. In the equipment slots we’ve gone for Drill Charges to clear out buildings from the outside, while Stims provide another health boost after you take a few bullets. How to unlock the RAAL MG in Modern Warfare 2 In order to unlock the RAAL MG in Modern Warfare 2, you need to get to Rank 25 by playing multiplayer matches. It shouldn’t take too long for you to reach the level needed, but you can follow our guide on how to speed up the process here. Best RAAL MG alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 If you want more top LMGs in Modern Warfare 2, you could go for the Sakin MG38 or the 556 Icarus, which are some of the best the category has to offer. On the other hand, if you want something with more versatility, you can’t go wrong with an Assault Rifle like the M4. For more on Modern Warfare 2, be sure to check out our other guides: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in the Modern Warfare 2 Beta | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best RA 225 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe RA 225 is the latest submachine gun to arrive in Call of Duty Warzone, looking to challenge the dominant close-range loadouts that are so popular across Caldera, Fortune’s Keep, and Rebirth Island. Here is the best RA 225 Warzone class. The RA 225 is coming into Warzone at a very competitive time for SMGs, with the Armaguerra 43 and H4 Blixen still running rampant across every map and mode. Time will tell whether it will be able to reach the meta rankings in Season 5, the last season of the Call of Duty battle royale before Warzone 2 drops, but there’s no harm in building out a solid loadout so you can test it out and maybe even stay ahead of the meta. Here’s the best RA 225 custom class in Warzone. Best RA 225 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Urban THM 12.5” – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Urban Tac – Underbarrel: Mark VI Skeletal – Magazine: 9mm 48 Round Drums – Ammunition: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Taped Grip – Proficiency: Tight Grip – Kit: Quick – For the most part, this build follows the meta loadout you’d commonly see on most popular SMGs, with the Recoil Booster and Urban THM 12.5” barrel working to improve bullet velocity and recoil control. Applying the Mark VI Skeletal underbarrel and Urban Tac stock will help the weapon’s ADS movement speed, while the Quick Kit will help you outmaneuver your opponents in tight situations. For ammunition, the 48 Round Drum should give you enough capacity to take down a few opponents in squad matches without sacrificing any speed. As both the other options are only 32-round, you’ll want to upgrade sooner rather than later. Best RA 225 Warzone class Perk 1: Serpentine – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – Secondary: KG M40 – The options for building out your class are now much more varied than they once were, with the introduction of new perks and the change in equipment meta. We recommend equipping Serpentine as your Perk 1, allowing you to take full advantage of your fast movement and taking less damage in the process. You could also opt for Double Time, for even more movement capabilities, or E.O.D to stay protected from explosives. Of course, you’ll want Overkill to take another primary weapon with you, either an AR or a sniper. For Perk 3, we recommend Amped for faster swaps between weapons, but you might want to try Combat Scout to outline enemies when you shoot them. A semtex is always the optimal lethal grenade to take, and while the Heartbeat Sensor and Snapshot grenades are both supremely useful in Warzone, the Stim shot will help you regenerate health quicker as well as move even faster to outplay enemies and avoid incoming fire. As for your second primary weapon, it’s hard to look past the meta KG M40 assault rifle. There’s a reason it sits atop the meta: it’s easy to use, fun to play with, and is capable of mowing down multiple enemies without too much hassle. You should check out our best KG M40 loadout guide to get the full rundown. How to unlock the RA 225 in Warzone Fortunately, there isn’t much grinding involved in unlocking the RA 225 in Warzone. All you have to do is reach Tier 31 of the Season 5 Battle Pass. This is a bit later than the new EX1 assault rifle, which you can unlock at Tier 15, a variation of the EM1 that was so popular in Advanced Warfare when that came out in 2014. Best RA 225 Warzone alternatives If the RA 225 just isn’t cutting it for you, we recommend sticking to the tried and true Armaguerra and Blixen. Alternatively, if you’re looking to go off-meta, the Marco 5 isn’t quite as popular as the above but can still pack a punch, as can the Vanguard PPSh-41. With the end of Warzone as we know it quickly looming, don’t be surprised to see some notable meta shifts in the final weeks, as weapons old and new are used by players looking to make sure they get their full run of the game.

Best quickscoping classes in Modern Warfare Call of Duty fans across the world got their hands on Modern Warfare on October 25, as the game marked the first title in the franchise’s popular sub-series in nearly a full ten years. The multiplayer side of things may look and feel a little different to the classic Call of Duty titles, a wide range of things have stayed the same. That includes sniping – and more specifically, quick scoping. The art of gunning down enemies without aiming all that much is helped by having a top set-up. So, with that in mind, here are a few you may want to consider running. AX-50 The AX-50 is a sniper you’ll see plenty of players running in matches because of its high-power and base stats that already help with being an aggressive player. Take it into the gunsmith, though, and you’ll be able to tweak the deadly weapon to your heart’s content. For quick scoping, however, you want to adjust the barrel, optic, grip, and the magazine you’re running. Some of the best suggestions include the 17.0 barrel, the Scout Combat Optic, rear tape grip, and seven-round mag. Of course, you’ll want sleight of hand as your weapon perk because you never want to get caught in the open with a slow reload. As for actual perks, pick up Quick Fix, Ghost, and Tracker. Dragunov Moving over to the Dragunov, the classic CoD weapon is also a top choice for quick scoping but it won’t lend itself to being as easy as the AX-50. You should run the same perk set up, and pick up your favorite choice of equipment, but there are a few slight changes in the weapon loadout. Muzzle Break is a good choice for a muzzle attachment in partnership with the Combat Barrel. Add in the Scout Combat Optic and Sleight of Hand as a perk and you’ll be good to go. As for the HDR, it’s not a great quick scoping weapon as it is, and playing around in Gunsmith likely won’t help all that much. Focus on the AX-50 and Dragunov classes with a Desert Eagle sidearm and you should be raining down terror on your foes like it’s Modern Warfare 2 all over again.

Best quickscoping Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War class loadout: Attachments, Perk TreyarchSnipers are just as powerful as ever in Black Ops Cold War, though scoping in quickly can be improved by certain attachments. Here is the best quickscoping loadout you can use in Black Ops Cold War. Earlier Call of Duty titles had very few attachments to speak of. Each category had a handful to pick from, though Black Ops Cold War’s Gunsmith comes with dozens of unique modifications for every weapon. If you want a sniper built for holding down a location over time, you can do that. If you want a sniper just for quickscoping, you have that option as well thanks to the fine-tuning features. Quickscoping has already come under fire due to just how powerful it can be in the right hands. If you’re looking to make the most out of your sniper but don’t know where to start, we’ve got you covered. Here’s the best quickscoping loadout in Black Ops Cold War. Contents Best Pelington 703 quickscoping loadout for Black Ops Cold War – Best Pelingtion 703 quickscoping setup (perks & equipment) – Best Pelington 703 loadout for quickscoping Attachments Muzzle: Stabilizer .308 – Barrel: 26.5 Tiger Team – Magazine: 7 Rnd – Handle: Airborne Elastic Wrap – Underbarrel: Bruiser Grip – Best Pelington 703 setup for quickscoping Perks Cold Blooded – Ninja – Ghost – Equipment Lethal: Grenade – Tactical: Stun Grenade – First and foremost, you have three snipers to pick from. While the LW3-Tundra is a solid option, the level one Pelington 703 is slightly better in almost every way. From speed to accuracy, this is the weapon you’ll need if quickscoping is on the agenda. Unlike powerful Assault Rifle loadouts, you won’t actually need the Gunfighter Wildcard to make the most of the Pelington. Five attachments is plenty for this particular setup. Instead, run with Lawbreaker so that you can carry an MP5 secondary with you for close-range situations. Firstly, the Stabilizer .308 Muzzle is ideal for sway control. While other Muzzles can further improve this stat, they come with heavy ADS speed tradeoffs, the last thing you want when building a quickscoping class. Next up you’ll want the 26.5 Tiger Team Barrel. It’s the only Barrel that gives bonus damage without having any real downsides when it comes to quickly aiming down sights. When quickscoping, Sprint to Fire time is also vital. Therefore, the mobility offered by the Bruiser Grip is essential so you’re constantly on the move and difficult to hit. Rounding out the attachments, the Airborne Elastic Wrap Handle is a given though it will take some grinding to unlock. For the fifth slot, you can choose between two key options. We’ve gone for the 7 Rnd Mag to improve the clip size among other things. Though you can replace this with a Steady Aim Laser if you prefer to hip fire. Perks are free to mix and match, though Ghost should be a lock for the third slot. With this loadout, you’ll be aiming down sights in the blink of an eye and snapping to targets with ease. If you’re looking for the best MP5 loadout to complement the Pelington, be sure to check our other weapon guides.

Best QQ9 SMG loadout for Call of Duty: Mobile ActivisionThe QQ9 has cemented itself as one of CoD Mobile’s best weapons, but what is the best set-up and class for it? Well, there are a few tips and tricks to use. With the start of Call of Duty Mobile Season 9, the Kilo Bolt-Action rifle was introduced to the weapon pool, and though it’s pretty powerful with the right loadout, it still can’t match the assault rifles, SMGs, and even LMGs. The ARs, SMGs, and LMGs are dominant the respective weapon tier lists for the new season but there is one, in particular, that is starting to stand above the rest – the QQ9. The incredibly powerful SMG, which is just the MP5 with a different name for CoD Mobile, will tear through enemies at close range – regardless of what weapon they fire back with. Though, there are a few ways to set it up so that you can truly dominate the scoreboard. Best QQ9 class in CoD Mobile If you really want to make it clear that you’re dominating a game, you’ll want to rack up headshots. There’s nothing better than deleting an enemy off the server with a quick headshot. So, you’ll need attachments that are going to boost your accuracy and even add a bit of range. YouTuber FrostyMate showed off his class where attachments like the RTC Light Muzzle Break and Strike Foregrip come into play. They’ll keep you on target. You could also spring for the Long SHot perk, but, the QQ9 isn’t exactly a sniper rifle so it could be a bit of a waste for some players. The 45 round extended mags are also perfect so that you don’t have to go too long without a reload. Muzzle: RTC Light Muzzle Break – Barrel: RTC Recon Tac Long – Stock: MIP Strike Stock – Underbarrel: Strike Foregrip – Ammunition: 45 round extended mags – Best QQ9 mobility class in CoD Mobile If you’re more about completely ruining an enemy’s day and want a bit more pep in your step, you can easily boost the QQ9’s mobility rating above 100. To do so, you’ll need to rock a class that strips it to its bare bones. Get rid of the stock, throw on a light compensator, as well as a lighter barrel, and you’ll be causing mayhem in no time. Muzzle: OWC Light Compensator – Barrel: MIP Tactical Barrel – Stock: No Stock – Grip: Stippled Grip Tape – Laser: OWC Laser Tactical – Of course, you’ve got to round out a class with perks and as always, you’re best off using Lightweight, Toughness, and Dead Silence. You might have another trio you prefer but, for now, they’re three of the best and will have you winning games in no time.

Best QBZ-83 loadout in Black Ops Cold War: Attachments, Wildcard, more Activision / TreyarchThe QBZ-83 may not be as strong or as accurate as the AK-47, but its superior mobility and handling make it a great pick. Here all the perks, attachments, and equipment you need to push this assault rifle to its peak. Whether you’re looking to level up every gun to grab those ultra-rare camos or just wanting to give the QBZ-83 a go, then you’ll want to use this loadout. The QBZ is often overlooked by a lot of players, but if you’re willing to put in the effort into master it, you’ll find that it is a pretty well-rounded rifle. This loadout boosts the QBZ-83’s already great speed, but also increases the gun’s accuracy and firepower. If you’re after an AR that can go toe to toe with the game’s SMGs, then look no further. In order to help you get the most out of the QBZ-83, we’ve put together a reliable loadout you can use to get those deadly Scorestreaks. Best QBZ-83 loadout for Black Ops Cold War Muzzle: SOCOM Eliminator – Barrel: 15.5” Reinforced Heavy – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Magazine: SALVO 50 RND Fast Mag – Handle: Airborne Elastic Wrap – Secondary 1911 – Throwables Stimshot – Semtex – Field Mic – Perks Perk 1: Flak Jacket + Tactical Mask – Perk 2: Assassin + Scavenger – Perk 3: Ninja + Ghost – Wildcard Perk Greed – Due to the QBZ-83 having a very clear default sight, we’ve saved the attachment slot to make a much more comfy build. The SOCOM Eliminator and Field Agent Grip help control both the gun’s horizontal and vertical recoil. This enables you to remain accurate at medium to long ranges. Adding to this is the 15.5” Reinforced Heavy. Not only does this attachment increase the AR’s bullet velocity by a significant 40%, but it also increases the gun’s damage range by 100%. Whether you’re planning to play on the game’s bigger maps or just wanting to increase your kill potential, then the Reinforced Heavy is a must. Read More: 10 most popular weapons in Warzone – Rounding things off at the bottom, is the Airborne Elastic Wrap and SALVO 50 RND Fast Mag. The Handle attachment increases ADS time, allowing you to aggressively rush your foes without having to worry about sluggish performance. Meanwhile, the added ammunition from the 50 RND Fast Mag will ensure you have enough bullets to melt multiple foes. In terms of equipment, the standard Stimshot, Semtex, and Field Mic have been chosen. These items will keep you on your feet and enable you to get the drop on any potential targets. This loadout uses Perk Greed, which allows players to take six perks. The combination of Flak Jacket and Tactical Mask will keep you safe from any explosives and noxious gas. These perks are important for most loadouts, but especially hyper-aggressive ones that prefer the run and gun approach to combat. Meanwhile, Assassin reveals high-priority targets and enables you to get the drop on any enemies who are on killstreaks. Scavenger also replenishes the QBZ-83’s ammo from fallen players, so you’ll never have to hunt for another gun when your ammo is low. Lastly, Ghost and Ninja keep your movements hidden from prying eyes and enable you to go for those sneaky flanks. After all, this loadout favors both close to mid-range firefights, so don’t be afraid to get into the very thick of a fight. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoIntel.

Best Pulemyot 762 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks, & more In Warzone’s chaotic battles, the Pulemyot 762 emerges as an exceptional choice for those looking to dominate from medium to long distances. Recognized as one of the best in its class, this guide unveils the ultimate loadout to maximize its capabilities in Season 4 Reloaded. Modern Warfare 3‘s introduction of Aftermarket Parts has revolutionized customization, offering attachments that can significantly alter a weapon’s performance. In the case of the Pulemyot 762, its JAK Annihilator Bullpup Kit is amongst one of the best in MW3 and Warzone turning the LMG into a spectacular machine gun capable of outgunning most other weapons in the game. Getting the most out of this conversion kit can be tricky though so we’re here to help break down the best Pulemyot 762 loadout to dominate Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Contents Best Pulemyot 762 loadout – Pulemyot 762 loadout: Perks and equipment – How to unlock Pulemyot 762 in Warzone – Best alternative to Pulemyot 762 in Warzone – Best Pulemyot 762 Warzone loadout Muzzle: VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor – Barrel: JAK Annihilator Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Commando D-15 Recoil Reduction Pad – Conversion Kit: JAK Annihilator Bullpup Kit – The cornerstone of this build is the JAK Annihilator Bullpup Kit that converts that Pulemyot 762 into a much more mobile and complete weapon. This powerful Aftermarket Part improves almost every important stat on the LMG turning it into an unstoppable gun. The VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor is a great attachment that is going to give you enhanced damage range, ADS speed, bullet velocity, and recoil control. Plus, it makes it harder to hear firing which helps with keeping a low profile. Recoil control is also going to be the focus of the Commando D-15 Recoil Reduction Pad, which offers you better stability when firing the Pulemyot 762. Bringing along the JAK Annihilator Long Barrel is also going to make the gun better at long ranges with increased damage range and bullet velocity. You then will use the JAK Glassless Optic to provide better, cleaner accuracy that doesn’t take a long time to aim. Pulemyot 762 Warzone best class build: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time increases your Tac Sprint duration – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand reload faster – – Perk 3: Quick Fix begin health regeneration when you kill a player or insert a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute gives you a speed boost when hit with an enemy shot – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Starting with Perk 1, Double Time helps take advantage of the Pulemyot 762’s surprisingly high mobility by enhancing Tactical Sprint. Meanwhile, Sleight of Hand in Perk slot 2 is a must due to this LMG’s brutally long reload time without it. Sliding Quick Fix into the Perk 3 slot is going to help you keep your health as high as possible through doing simple things inserting a plate. Sure, killing an enemy is a little tougher, but you will be using a lot of plates. Finally, Resolute is going to give you even more mobility through a movement speed boost when hit by enemy gunshots. This can be a gamechanger to get you behind cover when you are under attack. How to unlock Pulemyot 762 in Warzone The Pulemyot 762 is unlocked after reaching Level 4 in either Warzone, multiplayer, or Zombies. You can also unlock the LMG by successfully extracting it in a Zombies game. Best alternative to Pulemyot 762 in Warzone The closest competitor to the Pulemyot 762 is the Bruen Mk9, with both offering better-than-expected mobility for an LMG plus a great TTK and unbelievable accuracy. While LMGS are exceptional weapons, it is Assault Rifles and SMGs that dominate the meta of Warzone. Specifically, check out the Superi 46, FJX Horus, MCW, and Holger 556.

Best Pulemyot 762 loadout in Modern Warfare 3: Class setup, attachment, perks Optimize your slow-paced gameplay with Modern Warfare 3’s powerful Pulemyot 762 light machine gun using our guide for the best loadout in Season 4 Reloaded, including attachments, equipment, and perks. The PKM returns to Call of Duty as the Pulemyot 762. This hard-hitting light machine gun was one of the four new LMGs in Modern Warfare 3 Season 3, and potentially the strongest of all of them. While it has a slow fire rate, the Pulemyot makes up for that with its incredible damage profile and highly competitive TTK. You’ll have to be aware of its open bolt, which causes a slight delay between pulling the trigger and the gun firing, which can take some getting used to. We have you covered for the best Pulemyot 762 attachments, perks, and equipment to use and get the most out of this hard-hitting LMG in Modern Warfare 3 Season 4 Reloaded. Contents Best Pulemyot 762 MW3 loadout – Best Pulemyot 762 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Pulemyot 762 in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Pulemyot 762 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Pulemyot 762 MW3 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Shadowstrike Suppressor – Stock: Rubber Recoil Pad – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Magazine: 75 Round Belt – Conversion Kit: JAK Annihilator Bullpup Kit – The most important part of using the Shadowstrike Suppressor is to give you more of an element of surprise. The attachment will reduce the sound of gunfire and helps you stay under the radar. The Rubber Recoil Pad is going to help negate some of the negatives that come with using an LMG, mainly your speed and maneuverability. It essentially turns the LMG into an Assault Rifle. The JAK Glassless Optic has become the meta option for optics in both Modern Warfare 3 and Warzone. Its clean look and excellent lines of sight make it a solid choice at any range. You are going to get more ammo with the 75 Round Belt while also getting better handling to reel the recoil in. This means you don’t have to worry about running out of ammo before taking your target down. Finally, the JAK Annihilator Bullpup Kit will reduce your damage range, velocity, and weapon swap speed, but it is made up for by improving your accuracy, rate of fire, and ADS speed. This is huge as it makes using the weapon in close quarters much better than it is normally. Best Pulemyot 762 MW3 class: Perks & equipment Vest: Infantry Vest increases your Tac Sprint duration to help you get around quicker – – Gloves: Scavenger Gloves allows you to pick up ammo when running over a dropped weapon – – Boots: Stalker Boots gives you a boost to speed to add even more maneuverability – – Gear: EOD Padding negates damage done by enemy explosives and fire – – Tactical: Stun Grenade – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Field Upgrade: Battle Rage – All of the gear is designed to improve your maneuverability in each match, with the Infantry Vest, Commando Gloves, and Stalker Boots all giving you better movement speed in some way while also allowing you replenish your ammo with the Scavenger Gloves. The EOD Padding will help keep you alive from enemy explosions and fire on the map so you can keep moving and gunning enemies down. How to unlock the Pulemyot 762 in Modern Warfare 3 The Pulemyot 762 can be unlocked by reaching Level 4 as that’s when you first get access to the Gunsmith. Once unlocked, you’ll have 28 Gun Levels to work through to acquire all of the LMG’s unique attachments. Best Pulemyot 762 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 A great alternative to the Pulemyot 762 is the Bruen MK9 with it being another box-fed LMG perfect for spraying and holding down areas. Another option from MW2’s arsenal is the RAAL MG which shares the Pulemyot’s slow fire rate and devastating damage profile. The Pulemyot 762 is one of many weapons that work for the Modern Warfare 3 meta, so be sure to learn more about the MCW, FJX Horus, and Superi 46.

Best PPSh-41 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe best PPSh-41 CoD Warzone loadout will have you speeding through the game’s various maps and we’ve got the strongest Attachments and Perks needed to get the most out of the rapid Vanguard SMG in Call of Duty’s battle royale extravaganza. CoD Vanguard’s PPSh-41 is one of the most well-rounded SMGs in Warzone Pacific. It’s more than capable of wiping out a squad, but with the right setup, it can step up into one of the top guns in the battle royale today. Now in Warzone Season 5, the PPSh-41 looks to be one of the strongest weapons in the game as it winds down with Warzone 2 on the horizon. To give you the best odds of success, we’ve put together the absolute best PPSh-41 loadout you should be using to dominate Warzone Pacific, including the optimal equipment and the strongest Perks. Contents Best PPSh-41 Warzone loadout – Best PPSh-41 Warzone Class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the PPSh-41 in Warzone – Alternative to the PPSh-41 Warzone loadout – Best PPSh-41 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: ZAC 300mm – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: ZAC Folding – Underbarrel: Mark VI Skeletal – Magazine: 8mm Nambu 71 Round Mag – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Perk 1: Fleet – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – With 10 attachments to pick from, it’s essential you have a clear goal in Warzone’s Gunsmith. For this particular PPSh-41 build, we’re aiming to boost movement speed without sacrificing too much accuracy. To start out we have the Recoil Booster Muzzle, perhaps the most important pick in the entire setup. This attachment boosts your fire rate, drastically improving damage output as a result. The ZAC 300mm Barrel is the first of many picks that aim to improve recoil control. Similarly, that’s where the ZAC Folding Stock comes into play to keep your shots on point. Now, to improve mobility, there are four key attachments that can’t be overlooked. First up is the Mark VI Skeletal Underbarrel. This pick buffs your ADS speed, letting you snap onto a target with the PPSh-41 faster than usual. The same can be said for the Fabric Grip Rear Grip to further improve this stat, and the Slate Reflector Optic also goes a long way to helping you get in and out of gunfights as quickly as possible. Rounding out this loadout we have Tight Grip and Fully Loaded for the two weapon Perks. The former provides a final boost to recoil control during sustained fire, while the latter ensures you won’t run dry on ammo during intense firefights. Best PPSh-41 Warzone class: Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – Keeping in line with most meta loadouts in Warzone, this PPSh-41 build comes equipped with EOD to soak up explosive damage and Overkill so you can bring along another primary weapon. Then, we went for Amped to let players to switch between their two weapons at a rapid rate. Since you’ll mainly be using the PPSh-41 for close-range fights, this Perks allows you to adapt quickly if you suddnely need something more range. When it comes to equipment, there’s no looking past the classic Frag Grenade and Stims. While the health regain from Stims is certainly important, it’s the speed boosts that make all the difference. Popping a Stim at the right time can have you soaring into a fight and taking down foes before they can ever react. How to unlock the PPSh-41 in Warzone Unlocking the PPSh-41 SMG in Warzone requires you to reach Level 51. This can be done across either Warzone itself or in Vanguard’s multiplayer modes. If you have access to both, your progress will even carry between the two. Once you have access to the powerful weapon, you’ll then be able to grind through its own levels to unlock the strongest Attachments listed above. Alternatives to the PPSh-41 Warzone loadout If the fast-firing PPSh-41 isn’t quite doing it for you, an Assault Rifle like the Cooper Carbine could be the best fit, or even the Welgun. It’s still a relatively new gun as it arrived in Season 1, it’s quickly become a problem in Caldera. Using our optimal Cooper Carbine loadout can have you tearing through squads at much longer distances than the PPSh-41. You will lose a little of your agility, but it’s a great alternative when you want to mix things up. So that’s all there is to know about the best PPSh-41 build in Warzone today. Rest assured, we’ll keep this loadout updated to reflect all the latest changes. In the meantime, be sure to check out some other devastating Warzone loadouts below: Best Warzone settings to increase FPS on PC| Most popular Warzone weapons | All Warzone bunker codes | Best Warzone loadouts | Top 20 highest-earning players | Call of Duty Warzone Mobile: Everything we know | What is Sabotage Contract in Warzone? | How to level up Vanguard weapons fast for Warzone

Best PPSH-41 Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup Activision/Sledgehammer GamesThe best PPSH-41 loadout bolsters your close-quarter kill potential, giving you a huge advantage on Vanguard’s smaller maps. Find out which attachments you should equip to make the strongest build. Just like previous CoD titles, Vanguard features plenty of SMGs that can make short work of your enemies. However, one of the most devastating is that of the PPSH-41. This Russian SMG comes packed with a lightning-fast rate of fire, decent accuracy, and great firepower. Once you kit the PPSH-41 out with the best attachments, you’ll be wracking up plenty of killstreaks in no time. If you’re looking for an alternative to the game’s popular MP40 and Type 100 loadouts, then our PPSH-41 build has you covered. Contents Best PPSH-41 Vanguard loadout – Best PPSH-41 Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock the PPSH-41 in Vanguard – Alternative to the PPSH-41 Vanguard loadout – Best PPSH-41 Vanguard loadout Muzzle: Mercury Silencer – Barrel: ZAC 300MM – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Kovalevskaya Skeletal – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 8MM Nambu 71 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip – Proficiency: Tight Grip – Kit: Fully Loaded – The best PPSH-41 loadout is tailored around boosting the gun’s ammo and accuracy. First up on the list are the Mercury Silencer, ZAC 300MM, and M1941 Hand Stop. All three of these attachments keep your shots on target, enabling you to beam down your foes without any major recoil management. Meanwhile, the 8MM Nambu 71 Round Mags, Stippled Grip, and Tight Grip Proficiency bolster the SMG’s accuracy even further. Due to the large magazine size of the Nambu mags and fast fire rate, the PPSH-41 can get rather unwieldy when fired for long periods of time. Read More: Best ‘broken’ CoD Vanguard Bayonet loadouts – Fortunately, Tight Grip keeps this SMG from climbing up the screen during prolonged engagements. The PPSH-41 also greatly benefits from the added bullet velocity from Lengthened, while Fully Loaded ensures you have plenty of ammunition to spray down your foes with. The Slate Reflector gives you an unobstructed view of your surroundings, which is incredibly important when gunning for close-quarter kills. Lastly, the Kovalevskaya Skeletal Stock helps improve your mobility, quickening up your pace and aiding any aggressive rushes. Best PPSH-41 Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ninja – Perk 2: Forward Intel – Perk 3: Lightweight – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: MK2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Dead Silence – The best PPSH-41 loadout uses Ninja, Forward Intel, and Lightweight as its perk choices. First up on the list is Ninja, which quietens your footsteps and enables you to go for those sneaky ambush kills. The second perk is Forward Intel. This perk instantly gives you information on enemy respawns without running any reconnaissance killstreaks. Not only can you avoid any frustrating backstabs, but you also be able to get the drop on your foes. Lightweight is also a great choice for any close-quarters loadout as it enables you to quickly rush down enemies, while the added movement speed makes you harder to hit. The Machine Pistol is also a great secondary choice as it can deliver some speedy kills if you find yourself out of PPSH-41 ammo. Lastly, both Stim and Dead Silence help maximize your movement and survivability, giving you the edge needed to overcome the toughest of firefights. How to unlock the PPSH-41 in Vanguard In order to unlock the PPSH-41 in CoD Vanguard, you’ll need to reach level 51. This can take some time, so we recommend using any double XP tokens and playing on the Das Haus 24/7 playlist. Alternative to the PPSH-41 Vanguard loadout If you’re looking for a good alternative to the PPSH-41, then check out our best M1928 loadout. Just like the PPSH-41, the M1928 comes packed with huge amounts of ammo and an incredibly high fire rate. While the M1928 may have lower firepower and speed, it’s still a great pick for those that like to beam their foes with a constant hail of bullets. Consider using this SMG until you unlock the PPSH-41. So, there you have it, the best PPSH-41 loadout that can make short work of multiple enemies in close-quarter firefights. Make sure you check out our other Vanguard loadout guides to get a competitive edge over your foes: Best Type 100 | Best BAR loadout | Best Automaton loadout | Best Itra loadout | Best MP40 loadout | Best STG44 loadout

Best Warzone PP19 Bizon class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionThe PP19 Bizon is a Modern Warfare weapon that hasn’t had a lot of attention from the community since the release of Warzone. However, players are beginning to pick up this lethal SMG and realizing how powerful it can be with the right build. When it comes to picking an SMG in Warzone Season 4, the majority of players are utilizing the Cold War MP5 or the MAC-10. Both weapons have an extremely fast TTK and are regarded as the ‘meta’ guns. However, while certainly not contesting the top spots of the SMG tier list, the PP19 Bizon is still a great option that offers a lot of mobility and damage. Of course, in order to make the most out of the Bizon, it’s key you have a solid class that allows you to effectively take down foes in Verdansk. Luckily, we’ve put together the best loadout that you can use to get the upper hand over your opponents. Best PP19 Bizon loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: 8.7″ Steel – Laser: 5mW Laser – Stock: No Stock – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip Tape – Perks Perk 1: Double Time – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Equipment Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – The first two attachments you’ll want you to equip are the Monolithic Suppressor and 8.7″ Steel barrel. These will massively increase your damage output, as well as reducing its recoil. On top of this, the suppressor will keep you off enemy radars, meaning your location will remain covert even when firing. Next up, utilize the 5mW Laser to improve your ADS time and run the No Stock attachment to increase your overall mobility. Finally, round off the loadout with the Stippled Grip Tape to reduce the Bizon’s ADS time even further and aid your sprint to fire speed. Keep in mind, you don’t need to run anything in the ammo slot as the Bizon has a lot of bullets in its default mag. How to unlock the PP19 Bizon in Warzone Unlocking the PP19 Bizon is relatively simple, but it will require you to play quite a few games before you can get your hands on the weapon. All you have to do is reach level 42 in Warzone and the deadly SMG will be yours to customize and use in-game. So there you have it, that’s the best PP19 Bizon loadout in Warzone Season 4, make sure you give this build a try and see if you can pick up any wins on Verdnask.

Best PKM loadouts for Warzone and Modern Warfare Infinity WardThe PKM is one of the strongest LMGs in Call of Duty: Modern Warfare, but it requires a number of attachments to make it competitive with any weapon. Here, we break down your best options when using the PKM. Recent weeks have seen the Bruen Mk9 grow to be one of the strongest weapons in Warzone. Players have quickly discovered that LMGs can be useful at longer ranges, particularly following the nerf to the Grau. However, some players have also realized that the PKM can be more than viable. Its open iron sights and large magazines negate its poor handling, both of which are complemented by a high damage output and manageable recoil. While potentially not as purely powerful as the Bruen, the right attachments can make the PKM competitive with nearly any weapon. Best PKM loadout for Warzone Monolithic Suppressor – 26.9″ Extended Barrel – Commando Foregrip – Stippled Grip Tape – Sleight of Hand – The Monolithic Suppressor and 26.9″ Extended Barrel massively increase the PKM’s range, carrying its high damage output to even longer distances. The suppressor will also keep players off enemy radars, while the slightly heavier barrel reduces recoil too. Furthermore, the Commando Foregrip reduces recoil further, without slowing the PKM’s handling anymore. The Stippled Grip Tape will also go some way to speed up ADS time, while Sleight of Hand will massively reduce your reload time. One of the weaknesses with nearly every LMG is the cumbersome reload time, but Sleight of Hand can reduce this significantly and get you back in the action much faster, after you’ve spent your 100 shots. Best PKM loadout for Modern Warfare multiplayer 18.2″ Compact Barrel – FSS Close Quarters Stock – Snatch Grip – Stippled Grip Tape – Sleight of Hand – The Stippled Grip Tape and Sleight of Hand remain, because they are arguably more important in multiplayer than Warzone. When engagements are more frequent, players will need faster ADS and reload speed. On this note, the FSS Close Quarters Stock goes further to reduce ADS time, and allows players to snap aim to a more effective degree. The final two modifications also reduce ADS time. The 18.2″ Compact Barrel will also aid movement speed, allowing to traverse Modern Warfare’s multiplayer maps much faster. The Snatch Grip is also a fairly unique attachment, in that it reduces recoil and ADS time. For these reasons, we’re recommending it on your Modern Warfare class to speed up ADS, and maximize your close-range accuracy. That rounds off our best PKM loadouts for both Modern Warfare and Warzone! Check out our other recommended Warzone loadouts at our dedicated hub, and be sure to tweet us @DexertoIntel to let us know your thoughts.

Best perks & wildcards to use in Black Ops Cold War TreyarchTo truly become great at any CoD multiplayer, you need to find what class setup works best for you. Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War gives you that opportunity with its perks and wildcards. [jwplayer Q7ySHZq9] It’s true that you can become a top player by being pin-point accurate with your finest firearm. But the very best players know how to make the most of the additional items that Treyarch offers in the create-a-class system. Knowing how to handle a gun is one thing, but knowing how and when to use the right perks and wildcards is crucial in Black Ops Cold War. So here they all are, with tips for each of them too. Black Ops Cold War Perks Perks are basically passive abilities that you don’t need to actively focus on in combat. The key to perks is selecting the right ones beforehand that are best-suited to the game mode. For instance, a perk that allows you to move more sleuth would be ideal for Search & Destroy. But one that focuses on scorestreaks may not benefit S&D as much due to its more limited nature. You have three Perk slots and, the default option, will let you choose one from each. Perk 1 Engineer Description: Detect enemy equipment and scorestreaks through walls. See enemy scorestreaks on your mini-map. Re-roll your care packages. Best Use: Best used in game modes where an objective is contested such as S&D or VIP. You’ll see what traps the enemy have in-store for you. Paranoia Description: Hear an alert when an enemy aims at you. Your vision pulses if the enemy is outside of your view. Best Use: A Perk for all occasions and is arguably the strongest for Perk slot one. Paranoia can easily save many deaths. Tactical Mask Description: Maximized resistance to flashbang and stun grenade. Immune to gas. Best Use: Probably the weakest of Perk One. It won’t make you immune to their effects and you can still hide or blind fire if affected. If you really hate being stunned, it might be a must-have though – and Treyarch might look to buff it in future. Level Unlocked: 20 Flak Jacket Description: Take less damage from enemy explosives and Molotov fires. Best Use: A well-rounded Perk that can be used in any game mode really, but especially Domination – where players will be throwing grenades at flags while you try to capture them. Explosives are a constant danger and could help with protecting against scorestreaks too. Level Unlocked: 29 Perk 2 Scavenger Description: Replenish ammo from fallen players. Best Use: A great option for a player that doesn’t die often. It’s also solid for a while as you level up but may become superfluous later on. Assassin Description: Enemies on a Killstreak have a crosshair indicator on your minimap. Receive extra Score for taking them down. Best Use: This Perk screams out for Team Deathmatch. If your team is communicating then it allows one player to point out the threat for all. Level Unlocked: 17 Tracker Description: See imprint of enemy footsteps. Aim at enemies to reveal them on your team’s mini-map. Best Use: Probably the best that Perk Two has to offer. Another one that increases your chances of finding an unsuspecting enemy quickly and finishing them off. Great for any mode. Level Unlocked: 23 Quartermaster Description: Recharge equipment over 25 seconds. Best Use: If you’re the run and gun type, then this is for you. New grenades and equipment every 25 seconds provide a lot of bang for your buck and increases your potential damage output. Level Unlocked: 35 Perk 3 Gung-Ho Description: Fire your weapon and use Equipment while sprinting. Move at full speed when reloading. Switch weapons faster. Take less damage from falling. Fire more accurately when sliding. Best Use: Definitely suits the faster player in TDM, Hardpoint, etc. Great for a balls-to-the-wall SMG loadout. Ghost Description: Undetectable by enemy Spy Planes whenever you are moving, planting or defusing bombs, or controlling scorestreaks. Best Use: This one all depends on how much you want to be seen. Some people aren’t bothered and welcome it to flush out the enemy. Synergises well with S&D to remain undetected. Level Unlocked: 14 Cold-Blooded Description: AI-controlled scorestreaks will not target you. Player-controlled scorestreaks will not highlight you. Show up cold on thermal. Players in vehicles won’t see your nameplate. Best Use: Suits bigger, and longer, modes. Scorestreaks are common and deadly. In the grand scheme of things, this is probably the weakest Perk Three offering, especially as there are multiple ways to bring down scorestreaks. Level Unlocked: 26 Ninja Description: Sprint more quietly. Resistant to Field Medic when sprinting. Speak only when necessary. Best Use: Similar to the series’ ever-useful Dead Silence. Ninja is probably the must-have Perk and its use is transferable across all game modes and playstyles, but especially valuable in Search & Destroy. Level Unlocked: 38 Black Ops Cold War Wildcards Wildcards are potentially the biggest decision you’ll have to make with your classes. The four choices have major implications with regards to how you can setup. They can drastically alter your guns, your perks, and your chances of victory. Danger Close Description: Equip extra lethal and tactical equipment, and start with max ammo. Best Use: A Wildcard suited to a beginner that perhaps needs additional help from their equipment to score points. Combining this with Quartermaster could work wonders. Law Breaker Description: Equip any weapon in either slot and equip any perks. Best Use: Let’s you have two weapons from the same category, multiple perks from the same group, etc. A very diverse Wildcard that can have you essentially wielding two LMGs in theory. Though you’ll be best served by combining a long range and short range weapon combo. Level Unlocked: 21 Gunfighter Description: Unlocks 3 additional attachment slots for your primary weapon. Best Use: Basically create your own weapons. Allows for multiple attachments and can create the ultimate recoilless, rapid-firing, aimbot tool. A great companion for all game modes where you need the ultimate killing machine. Level Unlocked: 27 Perk Greed Description: Equip 3 extra perks. Best Use: Stuck between a couple of perks? Then you need this. It can lead to deadly combinations like “Ghost and “Ninja”, making you a stealth savant across any map or mode. Level Unlocked: 35 And that covers all the perks and wildcard options in Black Ops Cold War. Hopefully, you know which will give you your best setup!

Best perks to use in Black Ops Cold War multiplayer TreyarchPerks are one of the many ways in which players can customize their load-outs to their heart’s content. Some are alright, some are must-have. Focusing on the latter, here are the absolute best perks in Black Ops Cold War. [jwplayer 38QHhqzR] Every CoD’s nuances are what makes each game feel unique and different from the last. Multiplayer is more than just point, aim, and fire. Your perks and various other abilities and accessories are what completes your setup. As with every year, the right perks are critical to ensuring your best chance of success. So we’re going to try and point you in the direction to see if we can maximize your kills-per-game. Best perks you should equip What’s the point of being an A1, tip-top, marksman extraordinaire if your perks are meaningless tag-alongs? Make the most out of them, that’s why they’re there after all. So we’ll run through all 15 of the perks that CoD: Black Ops Cold War has to offer and single out the best ones for you. Paranoia Description: Hear an alert when an enemy aims at you. Your vision pulses if the enemy is outside of your view. Any perk that gives you some alert that you’ve been seen is always useful. With Paranoia equipped, an audio cue will generate, basically informing you that your position has been compromised. It’s admittedly not quite as useful if you run around the map like a headless chicken. But it’s still a great perk and is so beneficial in more tactical modes. Gear Head Description: Reduce Field Upgrade cool down. Store up to two Field Upgrade charges. The importance of field upgrades can be quite understated sometimes. When you’ve got beauties like the Proximity Mine and the SAM Turret, having regular access to these devices is essential. Direct competition with Quartermaster, Gear Head just prevails because of its ability to store more of these invaluable pieces of equipment. Gung-Ho Description: Fire your weapon and use Equipment while sprinting. Move at full speed when reloading. Switch weapons faster. Take less damage from falling. Fire more accurately when sliding. Does what it says on the tin. This may be a bit more specialist in terms of the role it carries out, but Gung-Ho is the top pick for the people that can’t stop running like they’re Jason Statham in Crank. Firing on the move, firing whilst sliding, quick weapon switching, etc. Everything is about going a million miles an hour, if you’re a cautious sniper, maybe this isn’t the one for you. Ghost Description: Undetectable by enemy Spy Planes whenever you are moving, planting or defusing bombs, or controlling scorestreaks. This narrowly edges out Cold-Blooded because of the incessant frequency of Spy Planes. There’s nothing more jarring than merrily galloping around the map, only to hear that a Spy Plane is airborne. Ghost puts to bed any fears of your position being discovered by the enemy and it’s very liberating. Ninja Description: Sprint more quietly. Resistant to Field Medic when sprinting. Speak only when necessary. Yes, we’ve cheated a bit by having three from Perk 3, but it has the best ones, plus you can always select more by using the Perk Greed wildcard. Ninja makes its usual appearance in CoD multiplayer as it’s immensely useful. In the same way that Gung-Ho favors speed, Ninja also benefits from speed. Additionally, it’s a perfect companion for stealth too. Simply must-have. For more news and guides on Treyarch’s CoD: Black Ops Cold War, check out our Call of Duty hub for all the latest information and help!

Best perks to buy in Black Ops Cold War Zombies TreyarchDie Maschine is the latest Zombies journey. Its usual hustle and bustle of human-hungry undead are complemented by an array of perks, weapons, and secrets. To help you survive, here are the best perks you should buy in Die Maschine in Black Ops Cold War. [jwplayer 38QHhqzR] There’s something endlessly satisfying about equipping an alien ray gun and piercing the stinking, rotting flesh of the undead. What started out as a cool mini-game back in Call of Duty: World at War, has now become a staple of the franchise. Black Ops Cold War delivers the latest bout of zombie-zapping delight and captivates with a whole new story. But as with every Zombies mode previously, you’re going to need to know how to cope with the later rounds. So here are all the best perks for you to obtain in CoD: Black Ops Cold War. The Perks If you’re unsure, perks are basically special modifiers that can either improve your stats or provide you with special boosts. BOCW’s Die Maschine has six different perks that you can buy during a game of Zombies. Now, even though there are only six of these useful consumables, you are actually allowed to hold all of them at one time. So if you’re flying through the game and being stingy with doors, then you can guzzle all six and become a beast. Deadshot Daquiri: Improved ADS and increases headshot damage on enemies – Elemental Pop: Applies a random modification to all your ammo – Juggernog: Increase your maximum health – Stamin-Up: Quickens your movement speed and allows you to sprint faster – Speed Cola: Decreases reload speed on your weapons – Quick Revive: Allows you to regain your health faster and decreases revive time – Which are best? The reason for fewer perks is because Zombies has been overhauled. Crafting and upgrading is now a big part of the game’s strategy. Meaning you can now upgrade perks to make them even stronger. We’re going to proceed with the notion that you’re a generous soul and you’ll have three perks for the majority part of the game. These are the best perks you absolutely need to have in Cold War Zombies and we’ll explain why. Juggernog Details: Increase maximum health by 50 1st Tier: Reduce status effect durations by 50% 2nd Tier: Armor plates replenish 25% additional armor 3rd Tier: Increase maximum health by 100 The extreme importance of Juggernog simply cannot be understated. You need it at all costs. Once you start getting to the later stages it’s a completely vital perk to have as even the weakest zombies are now much stronger, and it’s so easy to be caught out in the earlier rounds if you’re boxed in by a large group of weaker ones. Its upgrades only cement Juggernog’s status. Getting Juggernog to Tier 3 is possibly your number one goal to truly succeed at zombies. If you have four players who all have that, then you can expect a longer and more fruitful game. Plus, you won’t need to revive so much which negates the need for Quick Revive. Speed Cola Details: Increase reload speed by 15% 1st Tier: Swap weapons faster 2nd Tier: Field Upgrades recharge 20% faster 3rd Tier: Increase reload speed by 30% There is absolutely nothing worse than emptying the final bullet or beam, into some zombies, you switch to your other weapon…and it’s also empty because you forgot to reload. Or you might just have one strong primary weapon that you’ve relied on, but it’s dry, and 400 zombies are surrounding you. Speed Cola, again, is a must-have for when you start entering rounds 20 and above. Each level is a vicious torrent of screaming, snarling annoyances that are jealous of your fresh skin. But as long as you have Speed Cola, then you can keep unloading your favorite pack-a-punch weapon into hordes and smile as you reload quicker than a hiccup. Stamin-Up Details: Increase run and sprint speed 1st Tier: Increase backpedal speed 2nd Tier: Immunity to fall damage 3rd Tier: Walk faster while aiming down sights Following up on our previous advice. if you’ve still taken substantial damage and you’re hemmed to the point where that extra second to reload will end you, then why not run away? The beauty of these meticulously designed zombies maps is that they are accessible. Shortcuts and paths give you endless ways of navigating the battlefield. BOCW’s Die Maschine map is no different and even has portals that can whisk you away if need-be. But the ability to run like the wind is a critical aspect of survival. Not only that, but quick backpedal and ADS speed further underlines the need for pep in your step. We’re not saying the other three perks are not essential, but if funds are tight, you die and lose all your gear etc, then these are the priority. Get them upgraded ASAP, and you’ll survive longer, level up quicker, and have a chance to see what wonders and evil secrets Die Maschine has tucked away. We can confidently proclaim these to be the best perks in Black Ops Cold War’s Zombies mode. For more news and guides on Treyarch’s CoD: Black Ops Cold War, check out our Call of Duty hub for all the latest information and help!

Best perks to use in Warzone Season 5: Perk package meta explained DexertoBased on the current perk meta in Warzone Season 5 Reloaded, we’ve determined the best perk package possible and ranked all 27 options. Raven Software made no Perk changes in Season 5 or the most recent Reloaded update. As a result, the battle royale’s best possible Perk combinations did not change, and the most popular options held onto their top spots. Below, you’ll find our overall rankings for the Perks you want to use in Season 5. Remember that any Perk can be worth using in the right situation, as even ‘lower-tier’ perks can be great if you know how to use them correctly. Just know that the right loadout is also essential to get the most out of Warzone’s the best weapons. Here are the best perks in Warzone to give you an idea of what you should put in your loadout. Warzone Perks tier list Best Perk Package in Warzone Season 5 Perk Slot 1: Double Time – Perk Slot 2: Irradiated – Perk Slot 3 Resupply – Perk Slot 4: Birdseye – This Perk Package provides a little bit of everything that gives players an edge over the rest of the competition. Double Time’s increased Tac Sprint duration and reduced refresh rate will be useful when running away from an enemy or to the next circle. Meanwhile, Irradiated works perfectly in tandem with the PDS Field Upgrade, which provides a temporary air bubble for players to survive in the zone. This perk grants 20% less gas damage and a 10% movement speed while in the gas, making plays while out of the circle easier. Every Warzone loadout needs Smoke Grenades to provide cover while rotating, and Resupply refreshes lethal and tactical equipment items over 50 seconds. Lastly, Birdseye buffs UAVs to make them last longer and cover more ground, revealing an enemy’s location even if Ghost is equipped. In the final circle and early in a match, this Perk will give you a better idea of your surroundings. Our tiers explained Here is a short-hand for how each tier breaks down: S: The best – A: Very good – B: There might be situations where these can perform well – C: Best to avoid unless you find yourself drawn to them – Even if a Perk gets ranked in the C-tier, it can still be helpful in the right hands. Players will have preferences based on different play styles. In saying that, all S-tier and A-tier Perks should be in every Warzone loadout and provide the most beneficial boosts. Perk meta analysis Even though Warzone has 27 Perks, only about half are viable. Because even though some of the lower-ranked options offer unique skills, they are one-dimensional and far too situational to recommend using over better choices. Mountaineer emerged as a new favorite in Season 5 since it doubles the height requirement before fall damage becomes lethal. Previously, it changed the lethal height from 13 to 26 meters, but after the seasonal update, that went from 26 to 34. The increased height gave players more freedom to make large jumps and catch enemies off guard. However, a nerf reverted the Perk to its original values. We still think it an excellent option, but there are better Perk 1 and Perk 2 slot options now. Most of the best Perks provide a health or movement boost, reveal an enemy’s location, or conceal your presence. With that in mind, let’s jump into our rankings. S-Tier Perks in Warzone Double Time Perk description: Increase Tac Sprint and reduce refresh time Double Time comes in at the top of our list because of how important every second counts. Whether you are running away from an enemy or rotating, a bonus to movement goes a long way. Sleight of Hand Perk description: Reload faster Sleight of Hand is an S-tier perk but depends on your weapon because the slower the base reload time, the bigger the bonus. For example, the faster reload time will be much more noticeable for a slow and bulky LMG rather than an SMG with a fast reload time. Ghost Perk description: Blocks detection by enemy radar sources, such as UAVs, Portable Radars, and Heartbeat Sensors while moving UAV spam in Warzone is a common problem, as players spend all their money purchasing the Killstreak to reveal an enemy team’s location. If all three teammates coordinate and have Ghost equipped, it will reduce the amount of times you get caught off guard. High Alert Perk description: Vision pulses when spotted by an enemy outside of view Since Warzone’s time-to-kill speed is so fast, firing first in a gunfight is a massive advantage. With High Alert equipped, you can locate enemies more efficiently and engage in a gunfight quickly. Birdseye Perk description: Your UAV Killstreak, Portable Radar, or UAV Tower shows the heading of the enemy of your squad and detects Ghosted players, and UAVs scan longer and further Birdseye acts as a direct counter to Ghost, as you can locate players on your UAV even if they have the Perk equipped. In addition, the Perk grants a longer and further scan for UAVs. A-Tier Perks in Warzone Quick Fix Perk description: Killing players or inserting a plate immediately starts health regeneration Aggressive players will want to have Quick Fix equipped, as the Perk’s health regeneration bonus makes it possible to engage multiple enemies at once without regrouping and recovering your health. In addition, the Perk also saves players another second while putting on an armor plate. Resupply Perk description: Recharge lethals and tacticals every 50 seconds Every Warzone squad needs at least one player with Smoke Grenades equipped. Without the tactical equipment item, rotating across large open areas makes you an easy target for enemies. However, loadouts only get a limited amount of Smoke Grenades, so Resupply ensures that you never run out. Tempered Perk description: Refill armor plates to full with two plates instead of three Armor plates are not easy to find, and you run out quickly when constantly engaged in heated gunfights. With that in mind, Tempered eliminates the need to continually re-equip armor, and players won’t need to find as many. Mountaineer Perk description: Fall from higher heights without taking fatal damage As mentioned, this Perk recently saw a nerf that decreased the lethal fall height. In saying that, being able to fall from up to 26 meters instead of 13 is still a massive boost and noteworthy benefit. Irradiated Perk description: Allows equipping of armor plates, increases movement speed and reduce gas damage taken while under the effects of the circle (20% less gas damage and 10% movement speed increase) When Raven Software brought the PDS Field Upgrade back for Season 2 in March, it made Irradiated a viable perk. Players can now pull off the miraculous gas plays as they used to in previous Warzone titles, as the decreased gas damage and movement speed increase allow them to stay alive outside the circle longer. B-Tier Perks in Warzone Cold Blooded Perk description: Undetectable by thermal optics, Tactical Cameras, and Recon Drones. Does not trigger High Alert and Combat Scout Stealth is crucial in Warzone, and Cold-Blooded makes you undetectable by several different equipment items. However, most equipment items that this Perk protects you from are only used sometimes besides High Alert and Combat Scout. Combat Scout Perk description: Bullets you fire briefly mark an enemy for you and your squad. Hitting the enemy from farther away increases the mark time (Only one enemy can be marked at a time) Marking enemies makes it easy to shoot them through Smoke Grenades or know where they are moving while behind cover. Scavenger Perk description: Collect ammo, an armor plate, and cash from dead players The benefits of Scavenger are helpful, but this Perk isn’t worth it for players who only get into a handful of gunfights every match and would rarely reap the rewards. Focus Perk description: Reduced Flinch when aiming down sights and extended hold breath duration All sniper players should use this perk, but the one-dimensional nature of Focus makes it hard to rank any higher than a B-tier option. C-Tier Perks in Warzone Battle Hardened Perk description: Reduce the effect of enemy Flash, Stun, EMP, Gas Grenades, and Frangible effects. Immune to Snapshot Grenades, Guardian Killstreaks, and Shock Sticks Strong Arm Perk description: Throw equipment farther and see a preview of the trajectory Strong Arm is not an awful Perk, but other first and second-slot options are much more versatile and universally beneficial. Shrapnel Perk description: Explosive damage delays enemy health regeneration, slows enemy movement, and briefly disables tactical sprint While powerful, Shrapnel will rarely be active, as hitting enemies with a grenade or other explosive device only happens sometimes. Spotter Perk description: Spot enemy equipment and Killstreaks throw walls. Aiming down sights highlights them for the team. Hack enemy Claymores, Proximity Mines, C4, and Trophy Systems Hacking enemy Claymores and other equipment is valuable, but it’s also just as easy to shoot and destroy them. Mechanic Perk description: Reduced vehicle repair time, increased fueling speed, and reduced fuel consumption while driving non-aircraft vehicles Vehicles are often used during the final few circles and at the start of a match to rotate and get into advantageous positions. However, it is not worth wasting a Perk slot on something that only helps vehicles. Payout Perk description: Contracts pay out more in cash and the cost of UAV Towers are discounted Payout could be in a higher tier, but stiff competition in the third Perk slot makes that problematic. Tracker, Tempered, and Resupply all also better benefits. Survivor Perk description: Faster revive speed, reduced health regeneration delay by 20%, reduced cash lost on death, and enemies that down you are automatically pinged Faster revive speed and reduced health regeneration rate are excellent, but once again, we would much instead use other options for the third Perk slot. Stalker Perk description: Stalker: Increased strafe and aim down sight movement speeds Increased strafe and aim down sight movement speeds sound great on paper. However, the bonuses aren’t enough to justify using this Perk. Primed Perk description: Accuracy and time to aim down sight is improved while jumping Players will rarely jump while shooting because there is a movement penalty, so this Perk will rarely offer a benefit. Escapist Perk description: Increased downed, prone, and crouch speed. 20% buff to movement speed For players who enjoy using the snake mechanic to bob up and down behind the cover, Escapist may sound appealing. However, most users won’t find much use for this Perk. Flex Perk description: Delay triggered explosives while sprinting, warns of nearby enemy equipment, and reduces combat noise Reduced combat noise is an underrated benefit that most players overlook regarding Flex. However, the fourth Perk slot has some of the best options in the game, rendering this Perk useless. Resolute Perk description: When taking damage from gunfire, grants a short 5% bonus to movement speed Similarly, Resolute would undoubtedly be used more in a different slot, but High Alert, Ghost, and Birdseye are all better options than this Perk. For more on Warzone, check out our guide on Ranked Play.

Best Pelington Warzone loadout class: Attachments, Setup, Perks Treyarch/ActivisionThe Pelington 703 sniper rifle is a great choice in medium-range gunfights for sharpshooters. It may not be the most powerful sniper in Warzone, but its speed is unparalleled and with the correct attachments it can be very deadly. While both the AX-50 and the Kar98k are great choices in Warzone when taking on enemies at long distances, it’s the Pelington 703 that excels in medium-short range skirmishes. The speed of the gun is unmatched in the sniper rifle category and landing a headshot with the weapon will instantly down an opponent. There’s no denying it takes a lot of skill and practice to utilize the Pelington effectively, but once you have mastered the weapon, you’ll be constantly be downing opponents with a single shot. Without further ado, let’s check out the best Pelington class and which attachments get the most out of the weapon. Best Pelington 703 loadout in Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Wrapped Suppressor – Barrel: 27.2″ Combat Recon – Ammunition: Fast Loader – Underbarrel: Bipod – Rear Grip: Airborne Elastic Wrap – While the Pelington already led Warzone’s snipers as the fastest available option, changes in the Season 3 Reloaded update only further cemented its spot. Without any attachments equipped, it already comes with the best Bullet Velocity of any Sniper. To truly get the most out of the Pelington, we’ve built around this extraordinary stat to give you the optimal weapon at all ranges. For starters, running the Wrapped Suppressor in the Muzzle slot is a must for Warzone as the attachment gives a bonus to Bullet Velocity and Damage Range. On top of this, having a silencer on your weapon in the battle royale environment can be the difference between winning and losing a match. Next, the 27.2″ Combat Recon Barrel is perfect for the Pelington as it further adds to your Bullet Velocity, truly making this the fastest-hitting sniper in Warzone today. Read More: 10 most popular weapons in Warzone – Although the Bipod may seem like a strange choice, its improvement of the gun’s recoil control can be significant when taking multiple shots on an opponent. Speaking of which, you’ll want the Fast Loader mag equipped here as well so you’re never out of the fight for all too long. Best Pelington 703 loadout in Warzone (Perks & Equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: AK-74u SMG – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – When it comes to completing this loadout, there’s simply nothing better than adding a top-tier SMG to the mix. While the Pelington is certainly capable at closer ranges, having a fully automatic weapon on standby will keep you in the fight no matter what happens. This is where Overkill and Amped both come into play. The former allows you to bring take two primary weapons from a loadout drop, while the latter lets you swap between them much faster than usual. With players constantly pushing the pace and almost everyone grabbing self-revives, you’ll want a Heartbeat Sensor and some Semtex grenades as well. Hopefully, this guide has helped you create the perfect Pelington class for Warzone that’ll help you take out multiple opponents in a single clip. You’ll definitely need some practice with the weapon, but once you’ve mastered it, it’s lights out for your enemies. For more Sniper loadouts, check our rundown on the top 10.

Best Pelington 703 loadout for Black Ops Cold War: Attachments, Perks, Equipment Treyarch/ActivisionThe Pelington 703 is the perfect weapon for players looking to play aggressively with a sniper rifle in CoD Black Ops Cold War. Black Ops Cold War has three different snipers and each of them suits a different playstyle. For players who prefer to push others and maneuver around the map, the Pelington 703 should be your weapon of choice. It’s worth noting that Cold War has the longest ADS time for snipers out of any Call of Duty game. This has led to players struggling to quick-scope consistently and writing off snipers as weak. Although there are certainly easier weapons to master in Cold War, nothing will beat landing multiple shots with a sniper in a single streak. Despite Cold War’s long ADS times, there are a number of attachments that can mitigate this and give you a sniper loadout that’s lethal in online matches. Best Pelington 703 loadout in Black Ops Cold War Here’s how you need to kit out your Pellington 703 sniper for the most effective multiplayer loadout. Pelington 703 loadout Attachments Barrell: 26.5 Tiger Team – Body: Steady Aim Laser – Magazine: 7 RND – Handle: Airborne Elastic Wrap – Stock: Raider Stock – Perks 1: Tactical Mask – 2: Gear Head – 3: Ghost – Wild Card Law Breaker – Equipment Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stimshot – Field Upgrade: Field Mic – This loadout focuses on allowing you to play aggressively. In terms of attachments, the Tiger Team barrel increases the Pelington’s damage output by 20%. This means fewer hit markers and more one-shot kills. The combination of the Airborne Elastic Wrap and the Raider Stock signficantly increases your ADS and sprint to fire time on the weapon. This makes quickscoping a breeze and allows you to mavuvre around the map without being punished. The addition of the Steady Aim Laser is just to allow you to no-scope when it’s neccessary. This attachment can be a game-changer when you come into contact with an enemy round a corner, so don’t write it off. Moving onto perks, Tactical Mask is always useful to have when running an aggressive loadout that is seeking gunfights. The combination of Gear Head and the Field Mic is a great pairing for multiplayer and allows you to spam your field upgrade on cooldown. Finally, Ghost gives you the peace of mind that the endless spy planes in the air can’t track your every move when you’re running around the map. Equipment in this loadout is fairly standard but you should focus on using the Field Mic whenever it’s off cooldown to gain valuable information. The reduced cooldown from the Gear Head perk is incredibly useful and will allow you to track the location of the enemy team. Although this loadout can be used in Warzone, it’s more tailored to the smaller maps that Cold War offers. Despite this, if you’re looking for a sniper laodout to dominate Warzone, check out our Kar98k Warzone loadout guide here.

Best PDSW 528 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & Perks ActivisionThe PDSW 528 is a lethal SMG with incredible mobility and an above average TTK. In our best loadout, we’re going to show you the best attachments and perks you should be running with the PDSW 528 in Warzone 2. When it comes to close-quarters skirmishes in Warzone 2, nothing can outmatch the damage and mobility of a top-tier SMG. Whilst powerful options like the Vaznev and Lachmann Sub stand above most, the PDSW 528 is another great alternative to use in Season 3 Reloaded. The PDSW 528 is Warzone 2’s rendition of the FN P90, an iconic SMG that has featured in several previous Call of Duty titles. The P90 is best known for its unusual top-mounted magazine that can hold up to 50 rounds. Despite its strengths, the PDSW 528 isn’t anything special without attachments. To maximize the potential of the PDSW 528, you’ll need a meta loadout for the gun in Warzone 2. Contents Best PDSW 528 Warzone 2 loadout – Best PDSW 528 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the PDSW 528 in Warzone 2 – Best PDSW 528 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best PDSW 528 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Bruen Pendulum – Barrel: FTAC Series IX 14.5″ – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Rear Grip: Bruen Q900 Grip – Comb: Mack 8 Ontrak Comb – For starters, you’ll want to equip the Bruen Pendulum muzzle and the FTAC Series IX 14.5″ barrel. These attachments significantly reduce the PDSW 528’s kickback and boost its bullet velocity, helping it perform better in mid-range engagements. Alongside this, make sure to utilize the Bruen Q900 Grip and the Mack 8 Ontrak Comb. These reduce the SMG’s recoil even more, making it easier to land consistent shots on your opponents. Not only that, they enhance ADS time and sprint to fire speed, giving you plenty of mobility to play with. Finally, round off the loadout with the Cronen Mini Pro, a top-tier optic that’s built for intense gunfights and thrives in enclosed spaces. Good alternative optics include the Slimline Pro, DF105 Reflex, and Cronen Mini Red Dot. Best PDSW 528 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Bomb Squad – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical Equipment: Smoke Grenade – The best perks to use with the PDSW 528 are those that improve your versatility and ability to play aggressively. Given this, Overkill is a great choice as it lets you pair the PDSW 528 with a long-range weapon like the Hemlock ISO, RPK, or MCPR-300. For the other Base Perk slot Bomb Squad is recommended. There aren’t many perks in Warzone 2 that will save your life but the lowered explosive damage of Bomb Squad can do just that. Resupply is a good choice for the Bonus Perk as it keeps equipment refreshed reducing the number of bad situations you’ll end up in. High Alert is the best Ultimate Perk in Warzone 2 to partner with the PDSW 528. It gives you free intel on enemy whereabouts and reduces the likelihood of you being downed from behind. For lethal equipment, the Throwing Knife works well as it lets you quickly finish off downed enemies whilst saving ammo. Meanwhile, Smoke Grenades are a great pick for the Tactical Equipment slot as they let you move around the map and revive teammates more freely. How to unlock PDSW 528 in Warzone 2 In order to unlock the PDSW 528 in Warzone 2, you’ll need to reach rank 5 which won’t take you long at all. Best PDSW 528 alternatives in Warzone 2 If the high fire rate of the PDSW 528 doesn’t fit your style of play, then consider trying out the powerful Minibak or FSS Hurricane. Both are similar to the PDSW 528 being equipped with a large default mag and having great TTKs up close. The Minibak is best used as a sniper support as it can shred foes at medium range. As for the FSS Hurricane, it’s better to stick to close-quarter engagements. That’s all for our PDSW 528 loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work

Best PDSW 528 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe classic P90, now called the PDSW 528, is one of the top SMGs that Modern Warfare 2 has to offer. Here’s the best PDSW 528 loadout in MW2 to help you unlock its full potential, along with the best attachments, Perks, and equipment. Modern Warfare 2 has finally arrived and the multiplayer meta is already beginning to take shape. Infinity Ward’s sequel comes with a number of new and powerful weapons to learn, but also brings back a few familiar guns that long-time fans will recognize. One of these is the PDSW 528, which most players will know as the P90, a devasting close-range SMG with an incredible fire rate. The beloved weapon made its debut back in the original Modern Warfare, and it’s just as strong 15 years later. Check out the best PDSW 528 loadout in Modern Warfare 2, including the best attachments and class setup. Contents Best PDSW 528 Modern Warfare 2 loadout attachments – PDSW 528 Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the PDSW 528 in Modern Warfare 2 – Best PDSW 528 alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best PDSW 528 Modern Warfare 2 loadout attachments Muzzle: Spiral V3.5 Flash Hider – Barrel: 9.5″ Duke-30 – Stock: CQB Stock – Rail: Integrated Reflex Rail – Ammunition: 5.7x28mm Overpressured – The PDSW 528/P90 is well known for being a close-range monster, so our build plays to the weapon’s strengths as run and gun weapon. We kick off the best PDSW 528 loadout with the Spiral V3.5 Flash Hider, partly to conceal any muzzle flash but also to make it easier to handle. Next up we have the 9.5″ Duke-30 Barrel, which buffs ADS speed while improving hipfire accuracy – ideal for close-quarters engagements. This pairs nicely with the CQB Stock, offering a major mobility boost to help get in the faces of the enemy. A unique attachment for the P90 is the Integrated Reflex Rail, which serves as a clean Optic that also buffs your overall movement speed. Lastly, we’ve gone for the 5.7x28mm Overpressured ammo, which inflicts extra target flinch on enemies and makes it harder for them to return fire. Best PDSW 528 Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Scavenger – Base Perk 2: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Hardline – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – To make the most of this PDSW 528 MW2 loadout, it’s important to choose Perks that play to its strengths. This SMG can chew through ammo at a blistering pace, so Scavenger will let you pick up extra supplies as you pick off enemies. Then, Double Time will increase your sprint duration and allow you to tear across that map and rush the other team. For the Bonus Perk we recommend Fast Hands so you can reload quickly and stay in the action. Last up is Hardline, making Killstreaks much easier to get so you can gain the upper hand towards the end of a match. When it comes to equipment, Semtex is a great way to quickly clean out a room, while Stims can give you a needed health boost when times are tough. How to unlock the PDSW 528 in Modern Warfare 2 To unlock the PDSW in Modern Warfare 2, all you have to do is reach level 5 in multiplayer and it will automatically become available. This shouldn’t take too long to do, so just hop into a few matches and you’ll have the P90 in your hands pretty soon. Best PDSW 528 alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 The P90 is perfect on smaller maps, but if want an SMG with a bit more range you should go for the FSS Hurricane. Or, if you want to switch to something a bit more versatile, you could switch to the KASTOV-74u, also known as the classic Ak-74u. For more on Modern Warfare 2, be sure to take a look at some of our other guides: Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best P90 loadouts for Warzone and Modern Warfare Infinity Ward/DexertoModern Warfare and Warzone are two very different experiences, so you’ll need different weapon attachments depending on which you’re playing. Here, we break down your best options when using the P90 SMG. While the MP5 and MP7 dominate Warzone currently, the meta is shifting slightly and edging towards other SMGs. We have recently seen the Uzi used in competitive play, at the same time many players are realizing the P90 is one of the best SMGs in Warzone. It’s not currently as popular as the MP5 or MP7 but, with the right attachments, the P90 can become as strong as one. Best P90 loadout for Warzone Monolithic Suppressor – FORGE TAC Retribution – G.I. Mini Reflex – Fly Strap Stock – Stippled Grip Tape – First up is the Monolithic Suppressor and FORGE TAC Retribution barrel. These will massively increase players’ damage, as well as significantly aiding recoil control. Another advantage of the suppressor is that you will not show up on enemy radars, meaning your location will never be revealed. The G.I. Mini Reflex will help you hit your shots at longer ranges, as will the Stippled Grip Tape, which significantly reduces recoil. Finally, the Fly Strap Stock is a must-have, as it boosts both ADS speed and Aim Walking Movement Speed. With this attachment, you’ll not only get your sights up quicker, but also be harder to hit while firing. Best P90 loadout for Modern Warfare FFS 10.6″ Pro Barrel – Tac Laser – Rubberized Grip Tape – Fly Strap Stock – Stippled Grip Tape – For this Modern Warfare class, the emphasis is more on ADS time and regular, shorter range gunfights, rather than range and recoil control. The optics are gone, with the P90’s fairly open iron sights being more than adequate for the majority of gunfights players will find themselves in. In this vein, both the Fly Strap Stock and Stippled Grip Tape remain, massively reducing ADS time. The FSS 10.6″ Pro Barrel increases ADS time slightly, but boosts damage range and bullet velocity, in a worthwhile trade-off. Finally, the Rubberized Grip Tape helps to stabilize shots for close to medium range engagements, while the Tac Laser buffs hip-fire considerably. This will allow you to make the most of the P90’s high rate of fire, and hit a few shots even before you’re ADS. If you want to try out some different weapons in Warzone or even Multiplayer, check out our full list of best loadouts for every gun. What attachments do you use on the P90? Is it the most underrated gun in Warzone? Be sure to tweet us @DexertoIntel to let us know what you think!

Best Owen Gun Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe best Owen Gun SMG loadout in Warzone Season 3 Reloaded is more than capable of holding its own across Caldera and Rebirth Island. To get the most out of the Vanguard SMG, here are the strongest attachments and perks you need. CoD Vanguard’s Owen Gun has risen up as a top-tier SMG in Warzone Season 3 Reloaded and players are even desperate for it to be nerfed it’s that dominant in Caldera and Rebirth right now. With the optimal attachments, you can be tearing through opposing squads in no time. Whether you’re a Rebirth sweat or a more tactical Caldera player, it’s a versatile loadout that suits a range of playstyles. Below is a full overview of everything required to equip the best Owen Gun Warzone loadout in Season 3. Contents Best Owen Gun Warzone loadout – Best Owen Gun setup (Perks & Equipment) – How to unlock the Owen Gun in Warzone – Best Owen Gun loadout Warzone tips – Alternatives to Owen Gun Warzone loadout – Best Owen Gun Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Hockenson 142mm Rapid – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Removed Stock – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 9mm 72 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Perk 1: Acrobatic – Perk 2: Quick – When building the best Owen Gun loadout, the goal is to improve hipfire accuracy above all else. As a result, almost every attachment in our setup focuses on just that. Starting out with the Recoil Booster Muzzle and the Hockenson 142mm Rapid Barrel; both picks elevate the SMG above the competition. With huge buffs to fire rate and hipfire accuracy, these attachments are essential for the Owen Gun to keep it speedy and steady. Next, we have the Removed Stock along with the M1941 Hand Stop to hit the same notes once again. Both options improve mobility and bolster the SMG’s recoil pattern. Rounding things out we’ve settled on the Lengthened Ammo Type and the Fabric Rear Grip to further boost those vital stats. The former increases bullet velocity, allowing your shots to connect that much quicker, while the latter doubles down with even more hipfire improvements. Last but not least, there’s no looking past Acrobatic and Quick as the two weapon perks for the Owen Gun. With these effects combined, you’ll be sprinting much faster than anyone else on the map, getting you to your next gunfight in the blink of an eye. Best Owen Gun Warzone setup (Perks & Equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: MP40 – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – When selecting the right Perks for the Owen Gun loadout, you always want to be efficient. That’s why there’s nothing better than the standard E.O.D., Overkill, and Amped options to help you out. As an SMG, you’re constantly going to swap over to a secondary weapon mid-fight. That’s where the Cooper Carbine comes into play, keeping you firing thanks to Overkill and Amped. Rounding things out, there’s simply nothing better in Warzone today than the Frag Grenade and Stim combo for Lethal and Tactical equipment. With a huge movement speed buff back in Warzone Season 1, Stims have become must-pick equipment in Season 3 to reposition and survive the gas at the end of the game. How to unlock the Owen Gun in Warzone To unlock the Owen Gun in Warzone, you just have to reach Level 29. This can be done playing in the free battle royale or by grinding multiplayer in CoD Vanguard. We recommend dropping into Plunder, using double XP codes, and seeking out contracts to make the process as quick as possible. Best Owen Gun loadout Warzone tips The Owen Gun is a highly underrated SMG in Warzone. Its damage output, coupled with a respectable fire rate, makes it quite effective in-game. It may not be the most popular weapon in Warzone, but with the right knowledge, it can be deadly. Here are some tips to help you dominate with the Owen Gun in Warzone: Due to this weapon being an SMG, it loses its effectiveness at medium-to-long ranges. Therefore, if you wish to take advantage of this weapon’s strengths, using this weapon at close ranges will be most ideal. – To make up for the lack of range on this weapon, equipping an Assault Rifle like the STG44 or BAR will allow you to be effective across the board. – The Stim tactical gives you a noticeable speed boost in game. This will allow you to close the gap between you and your enemy on a frequent basis. Then, finishing them off with the Owen Gun should be no problem. – Alternatives to the Owen Gun Warzone loadout If this fast-firing SMG loadout doesn’t tick every box for you, it’s worth testing a slower AR build instead. We recommend the ultimate STG44 loadout as a decent alternative if you prefer a more tactical Warzone session. Staying at a distance and picking your shots is the name of the game here as the STG44 offers a more tactical approach. So that’s all there is to know about the very best Owen Gun Warzone loadout today. While it’s the best build, for now, we’re sure to see plenty of balance updates over the coming weeks. Rest assured, we’ll keep this loadout guide up to date following any major Warzone patches. For now, be sure to brush up on some other crucial loadout guides below: Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | MAC-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players | Top class setups and best weapons | 10 best Warzone players | Automaton loadout

Best Owen Gun CoD Vanguard class loadout: attachments, perks, proficiency, setup ActivisionThe Owen Gun is one of CoD Vanguard’s deadliest SMGs in the right hands and we’ve got you covered with the best loadout possible. From optimal attachments to the perfect equipment, here’s everything you need to get the most out of this gun. Although the MP40 has emerged as an early favorite in CoD Vanguard, other SMGs can be just as powerful with the right setups. The Owen Gun is one such SMG that can dominate in any match if you’ve got the right build in hand. As a well-rounded weapon, boosting accuracy, damage, and movement speed can all help you on your way to calling in V2 Rockets in no time. Here’s our ultimate Owen Gun loadout in CoD Vanguard to help you take down every target in the blink of an eye. Contents Best Owen Gun Vanguard loadout – Best Owen Gun Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock the Owen Gun in Vanguard – Alternative to the Owen Gun Vanguard loadout – Best Owen Gun CoD Vanguard loadout Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer (damage range is crucial with this SMG) – Barrel: Hockenson 305MM Precision (accuracy and headshot damage, fast kills) – Optic: Slate Reflector (standard) – Stock: Removed Stock (movement speed/ads speed) – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop (accuracy) – Magazine: No Magazine (all have too many downsides) – Ammo Type: Lengthened (velocity is king) – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip (ADS speed) – Proficiency: Sleight of Hand (fast reload) – Kit: Quick (sprint speed) – Kicking things off with our ultimate Owen Gun loadout is the F8 Stabilizer Muzzle. The goal with this setup is to keep a well-balanced SMG that can hold its own from close to mid-range. This particular Muzzle extends your damage range by 10% to accomplish just that. Helping with your recoil control is the Hockenson 305MM Precision Barrel, an essential pick for multiple reasons. While it certainly helps with accuracy, this attachment also provides bonus headshot damage for some extremely quick kills. When it comes to the Optic, you can’t go wrong with the Slate Reflector. This has become a standard pick across just about every SMG and AR in Vanguard, giving a slight zoom without any real downsides. Keeping in line with previous attachments, the M1941 Hand Stop Underbarrel is another great pick to further improve your accuracy with the Owen Gun. It’s not a game-changer by any stretch, but another slight adjustment to help craft the perfect build. For the only attachment skip with this setup, we’ve opted to go without a Magazine on the Owen Gun. While some have massive benefits, the downsides are too severe to justify. From worse damage to extremely shoddy recoil, these magazines aren’t worth your time. As usual with most SMG loadouts, the Lengthened Ammo Type is an absolute must-pick. Bullet Velocity is always essential and this attachment is by far the best way to buff the stat. Rounding things out we have the Fabric Grip Rear Grip to improve your ADS speed in a big way. While accuracy is the main focus, mobility is still hugely important so picking this option keeps you well-rounded. Last but not least we have the Sleight of Hand Proficiency and the Quick Kit to once again boost your agility. The former drastically improves reload speed while the latter increases sprint speed across the board. Best Owen Gun CoD Vanguard loadout (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Dauntless – Perk 2: Piercing Vision – Perk 3: Double Time – Secondary: FS Fighting Knife – Lethal: Thermite – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Armor – To complement the optimal Owen Gun loadout in Vanguard, you need the right mix of Perks and Equipment. No matter how good your gun is, the wrong picks here will have you struggling in-game. Starting off we have Dauntless, Piercing Vision, and Double Time as the three best Perks for this Owen Gun setup. Dauntless is an underrated pick in the first slot but one of the most powerful in Vanguard today. With countless movement-hindering effects in the game, Dauntless keeps you immune to it all. Piercing Vision is a solid pick to help keep enemies in your sights, while Double Time is a simple but effective Perk to get you back in the fight quicker off respawns. The FS Fighting Knife is always a great secondary pick to further help your movement speed. Whenever you’re out of ammo, quickly swapping to the knife can help you slip out of any gunfight in the blink of an eye. Meanwhile, Thermite and Stim are the two best picks for lethal and tactical equipment. The former is capable of dealing damage over time while the latter is a great option to replenish not only health, but your Tactical Sprint as well. As the final addition to this Owen Gun loadout, there’s no looking past Armor as the perfect Field Upgrade. Surviving a few extra shots is often all you need to keep a monster streak going, so there’s no better pick for this setup. How to unlock the Owen Gun in CoD Vanguard All you need to do to unlock the Owen Gun in CoD Vanguard is reach level 29. This is easily done by earning XP across any multiplayer mode. A quick double XP boost can always come in handy too. Just remember that your bonus timer counts down while in the menus as well, not just in-game. Alternative to the Owen Gun in CoD Vanguard If the Owen Gun isn’t quite doing it for you in Vanguard, you can’t go wrong with the current meta pick of the MP40. This SMG is one of the most powerful options today and with the right loadout, you can be wiping squads in just a few quick shots. The MP40 is quickly becoming a top pick across every multiplayer mode. Being the first SMG you unlock, it’s clear to see why. So be sure to brush up with our ultimate MP40 loadout right here as well. We’ll keep you updated right here with all the latest tweaks for the Owen Gun as Vanguard patches come through. In the meantime, be sure to check out some of our other top loadouts in Vanguard while you’re at it: Best Automaton loadout | Best Itra loadout | Best MP40 loadout | Best M1928 loadout | Best STG44 loadout

Best Outbreak loadouts for Black Ops Cold War Zombies ActivisionGiven all of its differences, Black Ops Cold War’s Zombies: Outbreak mode calls for a new starting loadout if you want to get into the game’s higher rounds, separate from the loadout that you use in the game’s standard Zombies maps. As players know by now, Outbreak is an incredibly different Zombies experience in Black Ops Cold War. The large-scale, open-world mode plays similarly to its other counterparts in terms of actual gameplay, but feels completely different due to the inclusion of objectives and side missions. Because of this, while there is some carry-over between the two modes, you’ll want to implement an entirely different class if you want to truly excel in the mode, taking advantage of the long distances while also still being able to fight in shorter-range engagements. Standard Outbreak class: M16 & Energy Mine Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Body: Ember Sighting Point – Barrel: 15.9″ Strike Team – Magazine: Salvo 54 Rnd Fast Mag – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Field Upgrade: Energy Mine – One of the best weapons to use in Outbreak is the M16 Tactical Rifle. The weapon, which is also one of the better weapons to use in Warzone, gives players control with its burst-fire option, while also dealing high damage. For our attachments, we’ll want to use things that will help in this mode specifically. While the Agency Suppressor is used in Warzone for its increase in damage range, we’ll be using it here to give us an increased chance of equipment drops, which will bring more options in our lethal slot. The Ember Sighting Point body attachment will also provide a similar benefit, giving us an increased salvage drop rate, which can drastically increase how fast we upgrade the M16, which will, in turn, deal more damage. The other options are less important but still serve a purpose. The Strike Team barrel will give the M16 a good balance between a Damage Increase and Fire Rate, while the Salvo 54 Round Fast Mag just seems to be the objectively best magazine in the game right now. We’ll also want to put on an optic. Any of the actual scopes will do here so it’s all down to personal preference, but you don’t want to be using red-dot sights, as you want to be able to see at a longer distance. Finally, for the Field Upgrade, you’ll want to use the fully upgraded Energy Mine. While the Ring of Fire is still good for close-quarters engagements, the Energy Mine just fits the open-world style of gameplay better. Alternative Outbreak class: FARA 83 & Ring of Fire Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Body: Ember Sighting Point – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Speedgrip – Magazine: VDV 50 Rnd Fast Mag – Optic: Millstop Reflex – Field Upgrade: Ring of Fire – If you don’t have all of the attachments unlocked for the M16 or want to use something with a fast rate of fire then the FARA 83 is for you. The weapon is unlocked as a part of the Season 2 battle pass and definitely works well in Outbreak, but you’ll want to get closer to the Zombies, as it works best at mid-range. Of course, the attachments you’ll want to use are similar to the M16’s. The Gru Suppressor (this weapon’s version of the Agency Suppressor) is once again the best option, providing you with increased equipment drop rate, but also better hip fire accuracy and a tighter ADS spread, with the Ember Sighting Point helping your Salvage drop rate. Read More: When are Zombies camos coming to Warzone? – Unsurprisingly, the VDV 50 round fast mag (the last magazine you unlock) is the best choice as well, giving you more ammo, a faster reload time and very few downsides. For the optic, we’ll want something that excels more at a shorter range, so the red-dot sights will actually be better here. Of course, it all comes down to personal preference, but the Millstop is a go-to. Unlike the M16, however, we won’t be utilizing a body attachment. Instead, the Spetsnaz Grip will be used to help maintain the weapon’s recoil. While it’s certainly not bad to begin with, this will help turn the weapon into a machine. Finally, the Ring of Fire Field Upgrade should be utilized here. While the above is still true about the Energy Mine, if you’re dedicated to getting more up close and personal with the Zombies then the Ring of Fire is still king. Using these loadouts won’t guarantee you’ll get into higher rounds but they’ll certainly help, at least with how Outbreak mode plays currently. Should anything change, we’ll update this piece.

Best OTs 9 Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Activision / TreyarchThe OTs 9 is one of the most lethal SMGs that has been added to Warzone, so find out which attachments you should be using in Season 2 Reloaded with our best OTs 9 loadout. Warzone Pacific is well underway and while Season 2 Reloaded has been quite a hit, Season 3 is on the verge of being released. Despite this, it can be hard to pick an SMG from the countless options available in Warzone. However, although it’s not the most popular pick, it may be worth testing out the OTs 9. This full-auto submachine gun comes packed with a blisteringly fast fire rate, great recoil, and decent damage in close-quarter engagements. Whether you’re looking to put the OTs 9 through its paces or just wish to see where it fits amongst Warzone’s meta SMGs, you’ll want to ensure you have the best attachments. Contents Best OTs 9 loadout for Warzone – Best OTs 9 setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the OTs 9 in Warzone – Best OTs 9 loadout Warzone tips – Alternative to the OTs 9 loadout – Best OTs 9 loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Barrel: 8.1” Task Force – Laser: Tiger Team Spotlight – Ammunition: VDV 40 Rnd Fast Mag – Underbarrel: Bruiser Grip – The GRU Suppressor and 8.1” Task Force barrel both help with increasing the OTs 9’s damage range, while also decreasing the gun’s vertical recoil. If that wasn’t enough, the added bullet velocity and suppression from the muzzle will help with securing longer-range kills and keep your shots hidden. To enhance the OTs 9’s sprint to fire, movement speed, and hip-fire accuracy we’ve utilized the Bruiser Grip and Tiger Team Spotlight. These handy attachments eliminate any sluggishness, giving you the tools needed to aggressively rush your foes. While squad wipes may be off the cards, the VDV 40 Rnd Fast Mag is arguably the best choice. Not only does this attachment give you the maximum amount of bullets, but it also ensures that your reload time is kept to a minimum. Best OTs 9 setup (Perks & equipment) Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Primary: Cooper Carbine – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Our OTs 9 class utilizes all the standard meta Warzone perks. EOD helps keep you safe from explosive blasts, while Amped gives increased speed when swapping to your primary weapon. While the OTs 9 may have a little more range than your average SMG, you’re still better off switching to an AR in mid to long-range firefights. As a result, the Overkill perk is a must for those that wish to be competitive across all ranges. We recommend using the STG44 or the Cooper Carbine, as they’re the top-tier picks in the current meta. Once you’ve secured your first loadout, we recommend switching to a class that has the Ghost perk. This will keep you hidden from any prying eyes and keep you safe from enemy UAV spam. Rounding things off at the bottom is the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor. Both these items are essential for those that enjoy aggressively pursuing enemy squads and flushing out pesky campers. How to unlock the OTs 9 in Warzone To unlock the OTs 9, you’ll need to rapidly kill 2 or more players in 15 different games while using an SMG. Gunning for multi-kills can be rather tricky on larger maps, so we recommend playing on Nuketown or Hijacked where possible. Hardcore playlists can also help you farm easy kills. For Warzone, you’ll want to stick to Rebirth Island due to the more intimate nature of the mode’s firefights. Best OTs 9 loadout Warzone tips The OTs 9 has dominated as one of the most used SMGs in recent months of Warzone. Its accuracy, controllable recoil, and damage output all lend to its high pick rate. However, since the release of Warzone Season 2 Reloaded, other SMGs, specifically the MP40, have started rising up the ranks. With that said, the OTs 9 is still one of the best in the game. And here are some tips you should know when utilizing this loadout: As with most SMGs in Warzone, adopting a playstyle that lends to the close-range capabilities of the OTs 9 will help you secure those kills. While this weapon can handle medium-range engagements, it shines at close range. – To make up for the lack of range on this SMG, using an assault rifle like the STG44 or Cooper Carbine is recommended. A sniper rifle such as the Swiss K31 will also do the trick in covering those long distances. – The Heartbeat Sensor tactical is great for locating enemies that are in close proximity. If you suspect an enemy is nearby, and you don’t have the option of using a UAV, this tactical can pinpoint their exact location. From there, let the OTs 9 do the rest. – Alternative to the OTs 9 loadout Another gun that has a similar playstyle to the OTs 9 is the Cooper Carbine. While this Vanguard weapon is technically classified as an Assault Rifle, its characteristics are similar to that of an SMG. Our best Cooper Carbine loadout utilizes the 60 Rnd Drums. This enables you to down multiple foes without having to reload – an area the OTs 9 struggles with. The Cooper Carbine also has an insanely fast fire rate, respectable range, and solid damage output. For those who are looking for a strong close-quarters weapon that can also hold its own at range, then the Cooper Carbine is arguably one of the best choices. Additionally, with the Warzone Pacific Season 3 update arriving on April 27, we will be updating this loadout to match the refreshed meta, so make sure to check back soon. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts and tips? Check out our list of guides below: C58 | Grau 5.56 | Kilo 141 | Krig 6 | CR-56 AMAX | FFAR 1 | Mac 10 | MP5 | Kar98k | HDR | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Top highest-earning Warzone players

Best OTs 9 Black Ops Cold War class loadout: Attachments, Setup, Perk TreyarchThe OTs 9 may be the latest SMG to join Warzone and Black Ops Cold War, but this deadly SMG packs a mean punch when kitted out with the right attachments. Just like with every update, Activision aims to give players new and exciting Cold War content to dive into. The Season 4 Reloaded update didn’t just add the new Mauer Der Toten Zombies map and operators, it also included a deadly new SMG. This time, players can get their hands on the OTs 9 – an incredibly fast-firing weapon with great handling and mobility. While it’s still early days, the OTs 9 is a great choice for those that enjoy the speedy firefights of Black Ops Cold War’s regular multiplayer. In fact, when this SMG is kitted out with the best attachments, it can make short work of even the most experienced player. Whether you’re looking to get a competitive edge or just want to see what the OTs 9 is capable of, then you’ll want to use this loadout. Best Cold War OTs 9 loadout Muzzle: Gru Suppressor – Barrel: 8.1” Task Force – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Ammunition: Spetsnaz 40 Rnd – Handle: Gru Elastic Wrap – The Gru Suppressor and 8.1” Task Force barrel are your bread and butter attachments for the OTs 9. Not only do they give the SMG extra damage range, but they also alleviate the gun’s vertical kick and keep your shots suppressed. While the majority of Cold War’s maps may favor close-quarter fights, the added damage range will keep you competitive in mid-range engagements. To help increase the OTs 9’s accuracy, we attached the Spetsnaz Grip. This attachment diminishes the gun’s vertical and horizontal recoil, giving you minimal recoil that enables you to gun for those all-important headshot multipliers. The Spetsnaz 40 Rnd Mag is also a must if you wish to avoid any frustrating deaths that come with constantly reloading. While the VDV 32 Rnd Fast Mag may seem like a good investment, you’ll often struggle to gun down multiple foes. Lastly, the Gru Elastic Wrap increases the SMG’s ADS by 30%, giving you the speed needed to quickly snap onto your targets. The TTK in Cold War is incredibly quick, so having the ability to unleash a wave of accurate shots is very important. Best OTs 9 setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: Tactical Mask & Flak Jacket – Perk 2: Scavenger & Gear Head – Perk 3: Ninja & Ghost – Secondary: M1911 – Wildcard: Perk Greed – Field Upgrade: Field Mic – Tactical: Stimshot – Lethal: Semtex – Just like most Black Ops Cold War loadouts, our OTs 9 build utilizes the Perk Greed Wildcard. This gives you access to all the best meta perks – an area that is incredibly important to your survival. Tactical Mask and Flak Jacket reduce enemy explosive damage, while also increasing the resistance to Flashbang and Stun Grenades. This means you can rush onto an objective without the fear of instantly being blown to smithereens. The Scavenger perk is also a must for those that wish to keep the OTs 9’s ammo reserves up, rewarding those that gun for high kill games. Gear Head is also a great perk to pick as it enables two Field Mics to be carried and reduces the cooldown of all Field Upgrades. Lastly, both Ninja & Ghost will keep your movements silent and ensure that you go undetected by enemy Spy Planes. How to unlock the OTs 9 in Cold War To unlock the OTs 9, you’ll need to rapidly kill 2 or more players in 15 different games while using an SMG. This challenge may seem tricky but it’s incredibly easy to achieve, especially when playing on Nuketown or Hijacked. Alternative to the OTs 9 loadout Another gun that has a similar playstyle to the OTs 9 is the Bullfrog. While this Cold War SMG may deal less damage than its shiny new counterpart, it does have a much larger magazine. Read More: How to get Klaus in Mauer Der Toten – This enables you to melt multiple foes without having to reload – an area the OTs 9 struggles with. The added damage range also enables you to remain competitive against a number of Cold War ARs. Consider taking a look at our Bullfrog loadout if you want to take a break from leveling up the OTs 9.

Best Oden Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Infinity WardThe Oden is one of the more peculiar guns in the Call of Duty: Warzone community, but it does have some interesting potential. With the right attachments, the high-recoil, high-damage Assault Rifle can be turned into a bit of a juggernaut across Warzone Pacific and Modern Warfare. While the Warzone meta changes with every season, the Oden has always remained toward the bottom of people’s rankings. This high-power Assault Rifle may be able to dish out some dizzying damage numbers, but its slow rate of fire and nightmarish recoil make it a risk in most firefights. As a result, many Call of Duty players simply avoid using this weapon altogether – instead opting for more reliable guns like the MP40, Owen Gun, and Cooper Carbine. Still, if you want something a little more hard-hitting in CoD Warzone, then the Oden might be worth a look as your primary AR. Contents Best Oden Warzone loadout: Attachments – Best Oden Warzone Class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the Oden in Warzone – Alternative to the Oden in Warzone loadout – Best Oden Warzone loadout: Attachments Muzzle: Colossus Suppressor – Barrel: Oden Factory 810mm – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 25 Round Mags – As one of the game’s least popular guns, there are various ways you can take your Oden loadout depending on your personal preferences and mode type. But, no matter what playlist you choose, the Colossus Suppressor and Oden Factory 810mm are absolute necessities as they each help turn this thing into a beast at longer ranges with bonuses to recoil, damage range, and bullet velocity. Interestingly, the VLK 3.0x Optic not only gives you a better zoom from range but also gives you some advantages to recoil control — making it a perfect complement to the Muzzle and Barrel. As you may have guessed, the Commando Foregrip follows suit, with maximum recoil control to help the gun feel steadier from distance. Finally, you can run the 25-Round Mags or 30-Round Mags to help handle multiple enemies at once. The Oden has a slower rate of fire, but a lot of damage per bullet, so it doesn’t take too much ammunition to get a knock—especially if you’re hitting the head or upper torso. Go ahead and pair it with a nasty SMG like the MAC-10 to eat enemies up at close ranges. Best Oden Warzone Class: Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D – Perk 2: Ghost – Perk 3: Combat Scout – Lethal: Thermite – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – As a dominant AR, we’ll be getting into plenty of firefights with the Oden, so you’ll need E.O.D to withstand the blasts of any thrown equipment. We’re also confident we can manage with the Oden until we find another loadout or a decent other weapon find, so Ghost will work for now. With this in mind, we’re gonna suggest running Combat Scout because lots of people still don’t run Cold-Blooded to counteract it. For your Lethals and Tacticals, we recommend Thermite and the Heartbeat Sensor. The former is great for drawing enemies out, whereas the Heartbeat Sensor is the perfect tool to detect nearby hostile forces. How to unlock the Oden in Warzone If you’re keen to have a crack with the Oden, then you’re going to need to reach Level 28 in Warzone Pacific or even Modern Warfare. Doing so can easily be achieved in Warzone if you have a decent session in which you focus on Rebirth or one of the other respawn-enabled LTMs such as Plunder. Alternative to the Oden in Warzone loadout The Oden can indeed be an oddity and to everyone’s tastes, if this is the case, then we’d 100% recommend trying out some of CoD’s other bad boys such as the AK-47 or STG44. Both guns are viable Assault Rifles, especially the recently buffed STG, and can be deadly weapons in Caldera. We have tons more Warzone guides for you to check out below: Best Warzone settings to increase FPS on PC| Most popular Warzone weapons | Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Best Warzone loadouts | Top 20 highest-earning players | Call of Duty Warzone Mobile: Everything we know | What is Sabotage Contract in Warzone? | How to level up Vanguard weapons fast for Warzone

Best NZ-41 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe best NZ-41 Warzone loadout is extremely powerful and luckily, we’ve got the strongest attachments and Perks for the Assault Rifle to complement the ultimate class setup in CoD Warzone. CoD Vanguard’s NZ-41 is a fast-firing AR that absolutely shreds in the right hands. The weapon has risen up through the ranks in Season 4 and established itself as one of the strongest weapons in the game. While the popular AR did receive a set of heavy nerfs in the Season 4 Reloaded patch, it’s still a force to be reckoned with on Caldera and Rebirth Island. Of course, it’s key you choose the right set of attachments to boost your mobility, ADS speed, and overall TTK. Once you’re kitted out with this setup, you’ll be tearing through squads across any playlist. So here’s a full rundown on everything you need to equip the best NZ-41 Warzone loadout. Contents Best NZ-41 Warzone loadout – Best NZ-41 setup (Perks & Equipment) – How to unlock the NZ-41 in Warzone – Alternatives to NZ-41 Warzone loadout – Best NZ-41 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Ravenwood 480mm No. 2 – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Orbweaver Folding – Underbarrel: m1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 6.5mm Sakura 50 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk 1: Brace – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – In building the optimal NZ-41 loadout in Warzone, you want to lean into its base strengths. That’s why almost every attachment in our class improves mobility, recoil control, or fire rate. Starting out with the latter, the Recoil Booster Muzzle has become a staple pick across almost every AR build in the game. Its impact is essential here with the NZ-41 and will help you down targets before they can even react. Next comes the Ravenwood 480mm No. 2 Barrel for a slight boost to both ADS speed and recoil. With only a few options in this category, we’ve settled on the pick with the least significant downsides. There’s no reason to hinder your own potential, after all. Similarly, that logic applies with the Slate Reflector Optic as well. While it doesn’t provide a noticeable zoom, it’s one of few attachments with no negative effects. Considering the pace you’ll be playing at with the NZ-41, you can’t go wrong with the Slate Reflector. For the right NZ-41 Stock, we’ve picked up the Orbweaver Folding to further improve mobility. Everything from ADS speed and Sprint to Fire speed is improved with this attachment alone, making it one of the strongest in the entire class. Another slight accuracy buff comes from the M1941 Hand Stop underbarrel. It’s hardly an essential pick as Underbarrels rarely make or break a loadout, but it’s clearly the top of its category. When it comes to the magazine, we’ve opted to go for the 6.5mm Sakura 50 Round Mags which will ensure you can take out multiple opponents without having to reload. Rounding things out we have the Lengthened Ammo Type to increase bullet velocity and the Polymer Grip Read Grip for yet another slight buff to recoil control. Finally, for weapon perks, there’s nothing more powerful than the Brace and Fully Loaded combo. The former provides a huge boost to flinch resistance while the latter ensures you’ll rarely run dry on ammo. Best NZ-41 Warzone setup (Perks & Equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Marco 5 – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – When picking the best Perks for the job, you want to prioritize speed once again with this NZ-41 build. Therefore, we’ve settled on the standard E.O.D., Overkill, and Amped to bring the most out of this loadout. Given the NZ-41’s fast pace, having a top-tier Secondary to swap to is crucial. If you run out of ammo mid-fight, there’s nothing better than having a fresh Marco 5 on hand. Another option is of course the H4 Blixen, a deadly SMG that provides a little more range than other guns in the category. Meanwhile, for Lethal and Tactical equipment, there’s nothing better than the simple Frag Grenade and Stims combo. Frags are elite as you can time a perfectly cooked nade for any situation. While Stims are a staple in Warzone to gain a huge movement buff ahead of any upcoming fight. How to unlock the NZ-41 in Warzone To unlock the NZ-41 in Warzone, you just have to reach Level 41. It’s a decent climb so it’ll take a few long sessions to get there. It’s well worth using double XP tokens to try and expedite the process. Moreover, you can always focus on contracts to try and maximize your experience gains in every single match. Alternatives to the NZ-41 Warzone loadout If this fast-paced AR build isn’t quite the right fit, it’s well worth checking out a more tactical option instead. We recommend the ultimate BAR loadout instead to slow things down and help you pick certain shots instead. Rather than running in guns blazing, this loadout is for a more delicate approach. If you’d rather have more range and improved accuracy, our BAR loadout is not one to overlook. So, that’s everything there is to know about the very best NZ-41 Warzone loadout today. While it’s the strongest build for now, things are always changing with every new update. Rest assured, we’ll keep this loadout guide updated to reflect any balance changes in the weeks and months to come. For now, be sure to check out some other essential Warzone loadouts below: Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | Mac-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players | Top class setups and best weapons | 10 best Warzone players | Automaton loadout | MP40 loadout

Best NZ-41 CoD Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup ActivisionThe NZ-41 is one of the more underrated assault rifles in Call of Duty Vanguard, and it can be a fantastic off-meta pick if you’re looking for a different gun to use. The STG44 is the clear-cut favorite when it comes to Vanguard assault rifles, easily topping the rankings for most popular Vanguard weapons. That said, players are starting to shift away from it and, with the Warzone Pacific integration looming ever closer, you’re going to want to get as many weapons leveled up as possible. Here’s how you should build yours out in Vanguard. Contents Best NZ-41 loadout attachments – Best NZ-41 class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock the NZ-41 in Vanguard – Alternatives to NZ-41 Vanguard loadout – Best NZ-41 Vanguard loadout Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: Orbweaver 360MM BC – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Ravenwood Padded – Underbarrel: Carver Foregrip – Magazine: 8MM Klauser 30 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Stippled – Proficiency: Brace – Kit: Fully Loaded – This loadout is all about maximizing accuracy and damage, especially for mid to long-range gunfights that you’re likely to take with an AR. The F8 Stabilizer muzzle, Orbweaver 360MM BC barrel and Carver foregrip will all see huge accuracy boosts, especially in longer fights. Pair this with the Brace proficiency and you should be hitting most of your shots. The Ravenwood Padded stock and Stippled Grip also improve accuracy and recoil control, but the combination of all of these weapons means you lose out on speed and mobility. The 8MM Klauser 30 Round Mags, however, greatly improve accuracy but also increase ADS speed, allowing for some easier snaps onto opponents. Finally, the Lengthened ammo type gives huge boosts to bullet velocity, while the Fully Loaded kit means you shouldn’t run out of ammo too quickly, making going on long streaks much easier. Best NZ-41 class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) You’ll want to make sure you build out your class to fully support your play style, and this largely comes down to personal preference. That said, you can use our recommendations for reference. Here are the perks and equipment we think are best for the NZ-41: Perk 1: Fortified – Perk 2: Radar – Perk 3: Demolition – Lethal: Mk2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: No 69 Stun Grenade – Field Upgrade: Dead Drop – The perk options are fairly standard. Fortified allows you to be better protected from explosive devices, imperative in a CoD game lacking equipment like a Trophy System. Then, Radar returns the minimap to a classic CoD style, as long as opponents aren’t using suppressed ammo types. Perk 3 allows for more variety, depending on how you play, but we recommend Demolition to grant you an extra lethal and tactical grenade, which could come in extremely helpful for rooting out enemy areas. We also suggest using the Frag and Stun grenades on just about every loadout in Vanguard — they’re easy to use, familiar, and very powerful when you use them right. How to unlock the NZ-41 in Vanguard Unlocking the NZ-41 in Call of Duty Vanguard is easy. All you have to do is reach level 41 and it will automatically be available to use. Read More: Best controller settings for CoD Vanguard – In fact, if you’ve played much at all, you’ve probably already got it unlocked. Alternatives to NZ-41 Vanguard loadout If you’re looking for a different off-meta assault rifle pick to avoid falling back onto the STG hype train, the Volkssturmgewehr (or Volk) could be a perfect choice. It’s pretty lethal at most ranges and can pack a serious punch when decked out right — just make sure to check out our best Volk loadout guide.

Best Nikita AVT Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Treyarch/ActivisionThe Nikita AVT has the best-in-class fire rate for assault rifles in Warzone, but what loadout maximizes this gun’s strengths in Season 3 Classified Arms? Warzone Season 3 has finally arrived and it’s introduced a huge amount of new content to the game including Operation Monarch, fresh POIs on Caldera, and of course, significant balance changes. Despite all of these additions, it’s the new Nikita AVT AR that’s standing out from the crowd due to its incredibly high fire rate and lethal TTK if the user can land their shots. While the weapon can be kitted out for long-range, its best-in-class fire rate makes it difficult to control unless you equip the correct attachments. Luckily, we’ve outlined the strongest meta build for the Nikita AVT in Season 3 so you can focus on tearing down your opponents on Rebirth Island and Caldera. Contents Best Nikita AVT Warzone loadout – Best Nikita AVT Warzone class – How to unlock the Nikita AVT in Warzone – Alternative to the Nikita AVT Warzone loadout – Best Nikita AVT Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: Empress 613mm BFA – Optic: SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6x – Stock: Empress Notch – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 7.62x54mmR 45 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk1: Brace – Perk2: Fully Loaded – First of all, you’ll want to equip the Nikita AVT with the MX Silencer and the Empress 613mm BFA to enhance the weapon’s bullet velocity, damage range, and overall recoil control. These attachments are essential if you’re looking to transform this gun into a medium to long-range AR. Next, make sure to utilize the Empress Notch stock, M1941 Hand Stop, and Polymer Grip to bolster the Nikta’s heavy recoil pattern and give the setup a slight boost of mobility. While this gun does have the best-in-class fire rate for ARs, that comes at the cost of a lot of kickback, so these attachments will help alleviate that issue. Read More: When does Iron Trials return in Warzone? – When it comes to bullets, make sure you run Lengthened to maximize the gun’s TTK, as well as the 7.62x54mmR 45 Round Mags so you can take multiple opponents without having to reload. Finally, finish off the loadout with Brace so you’re initial shots are always on target and Fully Loaded so you don’t have to worry about searching for ammo when you get your hands on the Nikita. Best Nikita AVT Warzone class Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: MP40 – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical: Stim – When it comes to perks, our loadout runs the standard meta choices with Amped increasing your weapon swap speeds and EOD protecting you from explosive blasts. As our Nikita AVT loadout focuses on transforming the AR into a laser beam at medium to long-range, we recommend running Overkill instead of Ghost so can run a meta SMG. In Season 3, the MP40 is still the most popular weapon in Warzone and absolutely shreds at close range, so having it as your secondary is never a bad idea. Finally, finish off the class with a Grenade to flush enemies out of cover and a Stim to give you a boost of health in the middle of an intense gunfight. How to unlock the Nikita AVT in Warzone As the Nikita arrived in the recent Season 3 update, unlocking the deadly new weapon is relatively simple and won’t take you very long at all. All you need to do is reach Tier 31 in the free Battle Pass and you’ll be able to start leveling up and customizing the high-fire rate AR. Alternative to the Nikita AVT Warzone loadout If you’re finding the recoil of the Nikita AVT a little too difficult to control, or the weapon simply doesn’t fit your style of play, it may be worth picking up the Cooper Carbine. This popular Vanguard AR has a steady recoil pattern and reliable damage, making it pinpoint accurate at long range. It can also be kitted out as a sniper support if you’re looking for a gun that thrives at close to medium range. Overall, it’s an incredibly versatile weapon so consider checking out our dedicated loadout for the gun if you’re looking for an alternative to the Nikita AVT. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone and Vanguard news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page. For even more content, we have more guides for you below: Best warzone settings to increase FPS on PC| Most popular Warzone weapons | Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | MAC-10 loadout | Best Warzone loadouts | Top 20 highest-earning players

Best Nikita AVT Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup Treyarch/ActivisionThe Nikita AVT is the latest Assault Rifle to be added to Call of Duty: Vanguard in the Season 3 update. Here are the best attachments you should be using to tear down your opponents in multiplayer. While the Season 3 update has introduced a huge amount of new content to Call of Duty: Vanguard, it’s the two new weapons that are garnering most of the attention. With another long-range Marksman Rifle added to the arsenal in the M1916 and the lethal Nikita AVT Assault Rifle, Vanguard players have got plenty of new guns to experiment with. Although the M1916 has already established itself as a deadly pick in Warzone, it’s the Nikita AR that’s standing out from the crowd in Vanguard multiplayer thanks to its best-in-class fire rate. However, in order to get the most out of the Nikita in Vanguard, you’ll need a top-tier meta loadout, and luckily we’ve got you covered. Contents Best Nikita AVT Vanguard loadout – Best Nikita AVT Vanguard class – How to unlock the Nikita AVT in Vanguard – Alternative to the Nikita AVT Vanguard loadout – Best Nikita AVT Vanguard loadout Attachments Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Kovalevskaya 546mm Sniper – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Zac MS – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 7.62x54mmR 45 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Subsonic – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Proficiency: Perfectionist – Kit: Fully Loaded – First of all, you’ll want to equip the Recoil Booster and the Kovalevskaya 546mm Sniper to increase the Nikita AVT’s bullet velocity, damage range, fire rate, and accuracy. By using these attachments you allow the AR to take down enemies in four shots, giving it an incredible TTK. Next, make sure to utilize the Zac MS, M1941 Hand Stop, and Fabric Grip to enhance the gun’s recoil control, ADS speed, and overall mobility. Although none of these contribute to the weapon’s damage, they do aid with stability and make it easier to land every single shot. When it comes to bullets, make sure you run Subsonic so you don’t appear on the mini-map when firing, as well as the 7.62x54mmR 45 Round Mags so you can take out multiple opponents without having to reload. Finally, round off the loadout with Perfectionist for the extra accuracy and Fully Loaded so running out of ammo is never a concern. Best Nikita AVT Vanguard class Perks & Equipment When it comes to perks, you’ll want to run Ghost so you can remain undetected by enemy UAVs and Radar allows you to track down opponents using unsilenced weapons, giving you more opportunities to rack up kills. After that, it’s definitely worth using Double Time for the extra Tactical Sprint time, as the added mobility allows you to avoid shots and chase down tagged enemies. Finally, round out the class with a Frag Grenade to flush enemies out of cover and a Stim to give you a boost of health in the middle of an intense gunfight. How to unlock the Nikita AVT in Warzone As the Nikita arrived in the recent Season 3 Vanguard update, unlocking the deadly new weapon is extremely simple and will take you no time at all. All you need to do is reach Tier 31 in the free Battle Pass and you’ll be able to start leveling up and customizing the high-fire rate AR. Alternative to Nikita AVT Vanguard loadout If the high-fire rate of the Nikita AVT doesn’t fit your playstyle and is a little too difficult to control, it may be worth testing out the STG44. With a solid TTK and steady recoil pattern, the STG is a versatile AR that’s perfect for Vanguard multiplayer and Warzone. Not only that, the gun is automatically unlocked at level one, so there are no frustrating challenges involved to get your hands on it. If you’re looking for a strong meta build for the STG44, consider checking out our dedicated guide for the weapon. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone and Vanguard news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page.

Best MX9 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe MX9 doesn’t get much love in MW2 multiplayer, but it is a top-tier SMG in Warzone 2. We’ve got the best MX9 loadout for you to try. Activision designed Warzone 2 with the intention of emphasizing close-quarters combat. WZ2 features multiple small circles in some matches, forcing players to engage in more gunfights. Activision stated that “weapons better for end-game close-combat, SMGs especially, will typically have increased value.” The developers also pointed out Al Mazrah houses large buildings and structures, perfect for an SMG to clear out. The SMG class dominated Warzone 1 alongside ARs, and the trend appears to continue in WZ2. The Fennec 45, Vaznev-9K, and Lachmann Sub usually come to mind first when thinking about meta SMGs, but the MX9 has every right to be in discussions. The underrated close-range weapon boasts a controllable recoil pattern and fast fire rate, making it easy to gun down enemies up close and personal. The MX9 is the perfect partner for a long-range weapon or even great on its own. Without further ado, here are the best MX9 attachments, Perk Package, and equipment items. Contents Best MX9 Warzone 2 loadout – Best MX9 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the MX9 in Warzone 2 – Best MX9 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best MX9 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Barrel: 508mm Rear Guard – Laser: VLK LZR 7mW – Magazine: 32 Round Mag – Rear Grip: Bruen Q900 Grip – Comb: FTAC C11 Riser – For our MX9 loadout, we focused on making the weapon as mobile and quick as possible without sacrificing too much recoil control. First up, the Bruen Q900 Grip and FTAC C11 Riser Comb both increase sprint-to-fire speed and ADS speed while sacrificing a bit of recoil control. Following a similar trend, the VLK LZR 7MW increases ADS speed and sprint to fire speed, but the laser is visible while aiming down sight. We recommend using the 508mm Rear Guard Barrel to increase the weapon’s damage range and bullet velocity. 25 rounds per magazine isn’t terrible, but we opted to bump that up a little bit, using a 32 Round Magazine. Best MX9 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Perk Package: Weapon Specialist Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – Overkill is essential for any SMG loadout. The Perk allows you to carry a second primary weapon, and the MX9 is a perfect partner to a long-range AR or Sniper Rifle. Next, Strong Arm allows you to be more precise with your throwables and toss them longer distances. On top of that, Spotter ensures you’ll never be caught off guard by enemy equipment, killstreaks, or field upgrades. Finally, for the Ultimate Perk, Weapon Specialist uses Survivor, which pings any enemies you get downed by and allows allies to revive you quicker. Finally, round off the setup with Semtex for flushing opponents out of cover and Flash Grenades for clearing enclosed spaces. How to unlock the MX9 in Warzone 2 The MX9 is unlocked through the STB 556 Weapon Platform, so the first thing to do is reach level 48 to get hold of the Assualt Rifle. Then, you’ll have to get the STB 556 up to level 13 by playing matches and getting kills. Best MX9 alternatives in Warzone 2 If the MX9 isn’t necessarily blowing you away, we recommend giving the Vaznev-9K a try. The powerful SMG stands out from the rest as it boasts low recoil and a great fire rate. The Vaznev-9K is extremely easy to use and packs a punch up close while still competing in medium-range fights. For more on Warzone 2, be sure to check out our other guides: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? |

Best MX9 SMG loadout for Call of Duty: Mobile ActivisionCall of Duty Mobile Season 6: The Heat has landed and brought plenty of new content, including a new SMG in the form of the MX9. So, here’s what you need to know about unlocking it and the best loadout class. For a few years now, Call of Duty Mobile has filled that void for CoD fans who have always dreamt of a game that brings some of their favorite weapons, maps, modes, and more under one umbrella. The mobile title is still going pretty strong and is into its sixth season of 2021, called The Heat, which has brought classic maps like Slums and Stacks to the game. In addition to the new maps, there are also two throwback weapons that have been added to the mix – the Rytec sniper and MX9 SMG. The latter has been pretty deadly before and is shaping up to be a decent choice in CoD Mobile already. So, in terms of setting it up to be your go-to SMG choice, the MX9 is best suited to following similar SMG loadouts and attachments. Read More: JGOD says Warzone is “basically unplayable” – You’ll want to throw on a new barrel to tame the recoil, pick up a bigger magazine so you can get off more shots in tight spaces, and then rock Sleight of Hand as your perk so you can rip through reloads. It’s also worth picking up the Firm Grip Tape, just to improve the already speedy ADS time. You’ll outgun foes before they even know what’s hit them. Best CoD Mobile MX9 SMG class set-up Barrel: MIP Extended Light Barrel – Stock: Agile Stock – Perk: Sleight of Hand – Ammunition: Large Caliber Ammo – Rear Grip: Firm Grip Tape – While that loadout seems to be working best for most, others have got their own take on it that are worth testing out. Popular CoD Mobile YouTuber Godzly does away with a perk and stock for his set-up, opting for a laser and underbarrel instead. Though, he does also rock the Large Caliber Ammo and Firm Grip Tape. Godzly’s “best” MX9 SMG loadout Barrel: MIP Extended Light Barrel – Underbarrel: Infiltrator Foregrip – Laser: 5mW Combat Laser – Ammunition: Large Caliber Ammo – Rear Grip: Firm Grip Tape – How to unlock MX9 SMG in CoD Mobile Getting your hands on the SMG is pretty simple. You don’t have to jump through too many hoops. Read More: How to fix Warzone dev error 5573 – Instead, you just need to get your Season 6 battle pass ranked up to Level 21. The weapon will unlock at that point and then you can start grinding away with it for attachments. Once you start to unlock the attachments, try out both setups and see what feels best for you!

Best MX9 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe MX9 is one of the most powerful SMGs in Modern Warfare 2, thanks to its low recoil and great damage output. Here’s the best MX9 loadout in Modern Warfare 2, including the ideal attachments, Perks, and equipment. Modern Warfare 2’s diverse roster of weapons supports any playstyle, whether you like to use versatile Assault Rifles or pick off enemies with a Sniper Rifle. One of the most popular weapon category is the SMG with its deadly close-range options that can shred through players with ease. There are a number of meta SMGs to choose from in Modern Warfare 2, and the MX9, a variant of the classic AUG AR, is an underrated gem that’s slowly making a name for itself. We’ve put together the best MX9 loadout in Modern Warfare 2, complete with the perfect attachments to help you dominate matches. Contents Best MX9 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best MX9 Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the MX9 in Modern Warfare 2 – Best MX9 alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best MX9 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Muzzle: Forge DX90-F – Barrel: 508mm Rear Guard – Optic: SZ Mini – Comb: FTAC C11 Riser – Magazine: 32 Round Mag – Kicking off our best MX9 MW2 loadout is the Forge DX90 Muzzle, which makes the SMGs recoil smoother and easier to handle, while also suppressing its shots. Next up is the 508mm Rear Guard for added bullet velocity and damage range to make sure you’re not caught out in mid-range fights. The iron sights on the MX9 are a little tough to use, so we also recommend using an Optic. We’ve gone for the SZ Mini because of its clean and simple design. It’s important to be quick off the draw in close-range combat, so the FTAC C11 Riser Comb will give you a nice boost in ADS and sprint-to-fire speed. Lastly, we’ve got the 32 Round Mag, which gives more ammo to play with in each clip compared to the MX9’s usual 20. Best MX9 Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Flash Grenades – With a powerful SMG like the MX9 you’ll want to run around and get up close with the enemy team, so we’ve picked out the ideal Perks for this play style. Double Time increases your sprint time, allowing you to move around the map and flank opponents. Grenades like Flash Bangs can stop an SMG runner in their tracks, but Battle Hardened will reduce their effects to ensure you’re never out of action for too long. Meanwhile, Fast Hands reduces reload times, which is essential given the MX9’s small magazine size. Then, for the Ultimate Perk you should go for High Alert, which will let you know if an enemy can see you while you’re moving position. When it comes to equipment, Semtex is an easy-to-use Lethal that can quickly clean an objective, while Flash Grenades will disorientate enemies before you go in for the kill. How to unlock the MX9 in Modern Warfare 2 The MX9 is unlocked through the STB 556 Weapon Platform, so the first thing to do is reach level 48 to get hold of the Assualt Rifle. Then, you’ll have to get the STB 556 up to level 13 by playing matches and getting kills. Best MX9 alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 If you want a different SMG to try out in Modern Warfare 2, the Fennec 45 is easily one of the strongest options in that category right now. On the other hand, you could go for the Bryson 800 Shotgun for a deadly close-range gun that can one-shot players with ease. For more on Modern Warfare 2, be sure to check out our other guides: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in the Modern Warfare 2 Beta | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best MX Guardian Warzone 2 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup The MX Guardian is an unusual shotgun that differs greatly from the other options available in Warzone. Its unique characteristics can make it hard to figure out, so to help you out we’ve put together the best MX Guardian loadout to use in Warzone 2. Added in Season 4 Reloaded, the MX Guardian is a full-auto shotgun based on the real-world Tavor TS12. While this shotgun’s real-life inspiration is strictly semi-auto, the MX Guardian is much more versatile. What makes it stand out is that the MX Guardian can switch between full-auto, semi-auto, and even burst fire, with all three having different recoil patterns, TTKs, and effective ranges. This is done by equipping one of three different attachments rather than using an in-game toggle. To help you get the most out of this strange weapon we’ve put together this loadout that is sure to dominate Warzone. Contents Best MX Guardian Warzone 2 loadout – Best MX Guardian MW2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the MX Guardian in Warzone 2 – Best MX Guardian alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best MX Guardian shotgun Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Bryson Choke – Barrel: MX-G Mobile – Laser: 7mW Canted Laser – Stock: MX DCP-0 – Underbarrel: Lockgrip Precision-40 – While multiplayer favors a burst-fire build, it’s definitely best to run the MX Guardian in full-auto for Warzone. This does limit its effective range to under 10 meters but within that range, this shotgun will outgun just about everything. To get as much range as possible we use both the Bryson Choke and MX-G Mobile. Despite being a shorter barrel the MX-G mobile actually grants increased range as well as improved mobility. Meanwhile, the Bryson Choke is the best muzzle for tightening pellet spread to improve overall consistency. The MX DCP-0 stock is the MX Guardian’s equivalent to every other shotgun’s folded or shortened stock. It grants several benefits to mobility and is a must-use to get around faster and play more aggressively. Since this shotgun’s recoil can be a handful in full-auto it’s recommended to use the Lockgrip Prevision-40 to mitigate that. Also, the 7mW Canted Laser is an excellent option to make it easier to stay on target as the MX Guardian’s iron sights can be awkward to use. Best MX Guardian Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Cold-blooded – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Given the MX Guardian’s limited range, it’s ideal to run Overkill with it as one of your perks. This lets you use a secondary weapon that covers medium to long-range gunfights like an assault rifle or LMG. For the other Base Perk slot, Double Time works well as it increases the duration that you can use tactical sprint and provides a small boost to crouch movement speed. Both of these make it easier to move around the map and pull off clutch rotations. Both Cold-Blooded and High Alert work well together with the latter letting you know when you are being aimed at and the former preventing other players from gaining the same information. This combination ensures that you’ll have an intel advantage over other teams. A Drill Charge is a great choice for lethal as it can be used to drill through walls and flush out teams that are camping in a strong position. For tactical, Smoke Grenades are a must to make rotations easier as they can create improvised cover in otherwise exposed areas. How to unlock the MX Guardian in Warzone 2 The MX Guardian can be unlocked by completing the following in-game challenge: “Complete the D0 section of the Season 4 Battle Pass and then get 30 Point Blank Operator Kills with shotguns.” Alternatively, successfully extracting in DMZ with the MX Guardian will also unlock the versatile shotgun. This can either be looted from another player or dropped by a friend who has already unlocked the Guardian. Best MX Guardian alternatives in Warzone 2 A similar alternative to the MX Guardian is the KV Broadside shotgun. Much like the Guardian, the Broadside is a spammable close-range weapon that excels in buildings and catching enemies off guard. Alternatively, the ISO 45 is a more well-rounded close-range option with it being a top-tier SMG that still performs reasonably well at medium range. The ISO isn’t quite as potent as the MX Guardian but it can still outgun most weapons within its effective range. That’s all for our best MX Guardian loadout in Warzone 2. For more useful tips and content consider checking out some of our other guides: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best MX Guardian Modern Warfare 2 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup The MX Guardian is a one-of-a-kind shotgun that offers players an experience unlike any other gun in MW2. Its unique characteristics can make it hard to build around, so to help you out we’ve put together this best MX Guardian loadout guide in Modern Warfare 2. Added in Season 4 Reloaded, the MX Guardian is a full-auto 12-gauge shotgun based on the real-world IWI Tavor TS12. Although this shotgun’s real-life inspiration is strictly semi-auto while the MX Guardian is much more versatile. What makes it stand out is that the MX Guardian can be switched between full-auto, semi-auto, and even burst fire, with all three having different recoil patterns, TTKs, and effective ranges. To get the most out of the MX Guardian you’ll need to understand which of these to use for the best loadout, luckily we’ve got you covered. Contents Best MX Guardian MW2 loadout – Best MX Guardian MW2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the MX Guardian in Modern Warfare 2 – Best MX Guardian alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best MX Guardian shotgun MW2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Bryson Choke – Barrel: HVP-LM – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Magazine: MX Pro Mag – Trigger Action: Burst-fire Trigger – The MX Guardian is a truly unusual shotgun so it’s only natural to recommend a truly unusual build. More specifically, a loadout that revolves around this shotgun’s unique ability to shoot in bursts. To activate burst fire you’ll need the Burst-fire Trigger attachment. Not only does this turn the MX Guardian into a three-burst round shotgun, but it also noticeably improves effective range. This shotgun is surprisingly versatile in burst-fire remaining competitive out to beyond 20 meters. To maximize range it’s recommended to combine both the Bryson Choke muzzle with the HYP-LM barrel. The barrel extends the distance that the Guardian deals damage while the choke keeps spread as tight as possible improving overall consistency. Recoil can be a problem even in the burst-fire mode so having a clear close-range optic like the Cronen Mini Pro is useful for staying on target. Finally, the MX Pro Mag provides a sizable boost to handling with little downside. Best MX Guardian MW2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Tracker – Bonus Perk: Cold-blooded – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – As with any shotgun, it’s important to be able to get up close and personal. Both Double Time and Tracker help with this with the latter giving away where the enemies are and the former letting you get around the map faster. With how prevalent kill streaks are in Modern Warfare 2 it’s highly recommended to use Cold-blooded. This Bonus Perk prevents A.I streaks from targeting you and makes you more difficult to spot when enemy players are using powerful killstreaks like the Chopper Gunner. For Ultimate Perk, Ghost is always a fantastic choice as it keeps you off enemy UAVs. Even after Birdseye was buffed to counter it, Ghost remains the strongest Perk in Modern Warfare 2 for most situations. The Frag Grenade is a great option for Lethal as it can be cooked to deal more damage than any other piece of equipment. As for Tactical, a Stim let you heal up quickly and get back in the fight faster which is perfect for the frantic gameplay that shotguns tend to revolve around. How to unlock the MX Guardian in Modern Warfare 2 The MX Guardian can be unlocked by completing the following in-game challenge: “Complete the D0 section of the Season 4 Battle Pass and then get 30 Point Blank Operator Kills with shotguns.” Alternatively, successfully extracting in DMZ with the MX Guardian will also unlock the versatile shotgun. This can either be looted from another player or dropped by a friend who has already unlocked the Guardian. Best MX Guardian alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 An obvious alternative to the MX Guardian is the KV Broadside. Much like the Guardian, the Broadside is a spammable shotgun that excels up close and is generally easy to use. Alternatively, those who really enjoy the MX Guardian’s burst fire mode can try the Fennec 45 SMG with its unique Fennec Double Tap Mod equipped which turns it into a 2-round burst SMG with excellent mobility. That’s all for our MX Guardian loadout! For more of Modern Warfare 2 & Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best MW3 weapons to level up for new Warzone map ActivisionBefore the new Warzone map drops in MW3, here is a list of every potential meta weapon worth leveling up to prepare. Sledgehammer Games confirmed that Modern Warfare 3 Season 1 will include the new Warzone map, Urzikstan. There is still no release date for the update, but we expect Season 1 to start sometime in Early December. Players can already explore the new battle royale environment in Zombies, as the game mode uses the same map. As part of the announcement, the devs also confirmed that Warzone will be updated with the new movement mechanics from MW3, including slide canceling, Tac-Stance, and more. With just a few weeks remaining before the new map goes live, it’s the perfect time to level up MW3 weapons in preparation. Best MW3 Warzone weapons JGOD used stats to predict TTK speeds for MW3 weapons in Warzone. From there, the YouTuber revealed four weapons to level up before the new Warzone map and provided loadouts to make the leveling process less of a grind. Here are all four weapons and loadouts to consider as a Warzone fan. MTZ-556 Muzzle: T4LR Saber Compensator – Barrel: MTZ Clinch Pro Barrel – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: MTZ Marauder Stock – Rear Grip: Rival Ace Grip – The MTZ-556 is the perfect hybrid AR. The fast-firing rifle holds its own in short and long-range engagements. With a build that compensates for recoil and a larger magazine, community members should expect this weapon to dominate MW3 Warzone lobbies. MCW Muzzle: Saber Compensator – Barrel: 18.5″ MCW Cyclone – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: R8 Regal Heavy Stock – Rear Grip: R8 Rapidstrike Grip – MW3 brings back the fan-favorite ACR AR in the form of the MCW. After a few buffs, JGOD pegged the MCW as one of the best medium to long-range weapons in MW3. If this weapon doesn’t see a nerf in Season 1, the fan-favorite weapon has the potential to be a top-tier meta weapon. Holger 556 Muzzle: Spitfire Suppressor – Barrel: Chrios-6 Match – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Rear Grip: MORN-20 Grip – Magazine: 40 Round Mag – JGOD predicted that the Holger 556 will have a TTK of around 714 milliseconds in Warzone. That places the AR well above other long-range options. It’s evident that the Holger 556 is a prime candidate for a nerf in Season 1, but even after a downgrade, expect this AR to shred in Warzone. Rival 9 Muzzle: OD Suppressor – Barrel: Rival-Cleanshot Barrel – Underbarrel: Bruen Pivot Vertical – Magazine: 40 Round Mag – Stock: MTZ Marauder Stock – It wouldn’t be a proper loadout guide without at least one SMG choice. The Rival-9 has emerged as an early favorite to be the best short-range option in Warzone when the new map finally goes live. The SMG doesn’t necessarily have the fastest TTK in MW3, but an extremely reliable recoil pattern and damage profile puts the Rival-9 in a class of its own.

Best MW3 loadouts & meta guns in Season 5 Reloaded DexertoMW3’s meta has shifted again after the Season 5 Reloaded update, so to ensure your loadouts are still competitive, you need to use the best guns and builds possible. In the most recent update, a range of weapons received buffs and nerfs, including some guns considered top-tier by the community. These changes have led to a few standout options taking over and other underrated weapons emerging as meta contenders. What makes a gun meta varies from weapon to weapon, but typically they offer a competitive TTK, have great recoil control, and will consistently outgun weaker alternatives. Other key stats include handling and mobility, which are extremely important in multiplayer due to its fast-paced gameplay. While using non-meta weapons can be fun, there are times when it will leave you thoroughly outmatched and desperate for some momentum. In these situations, only the best loadouts will suffice. Best Absolute meta loadouts in Season 5 Reloaded If you want to be as competitive as possible and use the best weapons in MW3, these are the strongest options in the meta right now. Holger 556 (JAK Backsaw Kit) Conversion Kit: JAK Backsaw Kit – Laser: DXS Flash 90 – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: RB Addle Assault Stock – Rear Grip: Morn-20 Grip – Strangely, the JAK Backsaw Kit isn’t that popular, with several other assault rifles seeing considerably more use. However, that shouldn’t be the case, as this powerful conversion kit transforms the Holger 556 into one of the best guns in multiplayer. With a TTK of just 255 ms out to 32 meters, this gun is one of the most lethal options you can use. It doesn’t just hit hard either, as the JAK Backsaw Kit comes with an integrated 100 Round Drum, yet somehow also has solid mobility and handling. At long range, its bizarre double barrel setup makes it impractical, but at both short and medium ranges, it outguns every other AR with ease. Kar98k Barrel: Bryson Carbine-S Barrel – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Optic: Range Caller v3.4 Optic – Stock: No Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Making its first return to Modern Warfare since the original reboot, the Kar98k is as good as ever. There are a ton of reasons why this is the case, but the two main ones are its rapid handling and impressive mobility, which make it a terrifying prospect given that it kills in just one shot. The Kar98k used to have enhanced aim assist due to it being a marksman rifle. However, this was nerfed, making this weapon much more difficult to use on a controller. Despite these changes, the Kar98k’s absurd handling and one-shot kill potential mean it is still very much a top-tier weapon, and if a skilled player is using this in your lobby, you’ll soon be praying they switch to literally anything else. RAM-9 Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: HVS 3.4 Pad – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Comb: Recon Comb – These days, there’s an argument for several SMGs being the best, with almost all of them being competitive. It largely depends on playstyle, but you can’t overlook the RAM-9, which is the best all-around option in Season 5 Reloaded. It’s highly mobile, extremely accurate, and has an incredible TTK when compared to other submachine guns, killing in just 260 ms. What used to give the RAM-9 a big edge over its competition was that it was a rare case of a gun with a meta-defining TTK that was also easy to use. Several nerfs back in Season 3 Reloaded saw it lose this ease of use, though it was later buffed in Season 4, returning some of that initial power. While it isn’t perfect in its current state, the RAM-9’s strengths ensure it is still the best SMG in the game. Static-HV Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Auger 840 Light Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: Paracord Grip – Rear Grip: Thar-V1.2 Grip – Both the WSP Swarm and FJX Horus are excellent close-range weapons that excel on smaller maps. Despite this, there’s no reason to use either of them anymore, as the Static-HV has completely replaced them, with this powerhouse debuting at the start of Season 5 as an unquestionably top-tier gun. Its TTK of 219 ms is so absurd it wouldn’t look out of place in a CoD game with just 100 HP. With Modern Warfare 3’s increased health, you can imagine just how overpowered this is. Even in its second damage out to 40 meters, the Static-HV remains competitive, especially since it has so little recoil. It somehow entirely avoided nerfs in Season 5 Reloaded, so you can keep taking advantage of this incredible weapon. SVA 545 Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: STV Precision Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Mane V6 Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Though not flashy, the SVA 545 has been a meta assault rifle ever since Modern Warfare 3 first launched. Admittedly, it has seen more success in Warzone, but this AR is a fantastic gun in multiplayer too, where it excels as a true jack-of-all-trades primary weapon elevated by its phenomenal damage. The SVA 545’s greatest strength is that it has no real weakness. Recoil control? Very manageable. Time to kill? Surprisingly fast. Handling and mobility? Solid enough. Its complete lack of weaknesses means it is an ever-reliable assault rifle that does exactly what you need it to do, no matter what map or mode you are on. Best Meta loadouts in Season 5 Reloaded Although these guns might not be as strong as the Absolute Meta options, they can still hold their own even in the most competitive lobbies, making them excellent options for you to use. BP50 Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Lore-9 Heavy Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Moat-40 Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – When it was first added back in Season 2, the BP50 was by far the best weapon in the game. It had SMG-level handling but assault rifle performance elsewhere, making it the ultimate all-rounder. Multiple nerfs in Season 2 Reloaded onward made it much worse, but that doesn’t mean the BP50’s time as a meta gun is over. Even in Season 5 Reloaded, the BP50 is still a really good weapon with a competitive TTK, low recoil, and great mobility for an assault rifle. It loses out to the SVA 545’s incredible range, but the margins are extremely tight, and there are sure to be plenty of players who prefer the feel of this reimagined F2000. Rival-9 (JAK Headhunter Carbine Conversion) Conversion Kit: JAK Headhunter Carbine Conversion – Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: Paracord Grip – Rear Grip: Rival Vice Assault Grip – The JAK Headhunter is arguably the most underrated weapon in Modern Warfare 3. This burst SMG has a comical TTK of 208 ms out to 25 meters, which quite literally outperforms every other automatic gun in the game. It’s not inaccurate or has slow mobility either, this gun really doesn’t have many weaknesses at all. So, why aren’t more players using it? Part of this is probably that burst weapons aren’t as popular, but the biggest contributing factor is that people simply don’t know it exists. However, you do after reading this entry, so go ahead and try it out. I promise you won’t be disappointed by this genuinely sensational gun. SOA Subverter Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Dozer-90 Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Magazine: 7.62×51 30 Round Mag – There was a short stint back in Season 2 where the SOA Subverter was arguably the best gun in the game. However, it has been long since nerfed, with its handling slowed down considerably. Despite this, the SOA Subverter retains its incredible damage output and TTK, giving it a place in the meta, even if that place is more niche than before. While beforehand it was effectively just an assault rifle that dealt more damage, these days it’s more like an LMG with faster handling and mobility. This means that while you can’t exactly run and gun with the SOA Subverter anymore, it is still a fantastic option for slower-pace playstyles and locking down power positions. STG44 Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Factory Short Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: DR79 Combo Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – While in Warzone, the STG44 has been dominating lobbies, its impact in multiplayer has been less spectacular. Even so, it is still a strong assault rifle that offers unmatched accuracy, making it a particularly strong option in large-scale game modes like Ground War and Invasion. Even in 6v6, the STG44 is great, with its ability to laser enemies at any distance making it a brilliant choice for controlling important lanes. In many ways, the STG44 has replaced the MCW as the king of accuracy, with the once-meta AR now stepping aside for this modernized rendition of an iconic World War II rifle. Superi 46 Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Lux 30 Heavy Barrel – Stock: Rescue-9 Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Rear Grip: Phantom Grip – Looking back at all of the complaints about MW2’s sluggish movement, the Superi 46 really shows just how different MW3 is. When built solely for mobility, it used to be possible to get an ADS Movement Speed of 5.0 m/s on this SMG. That is absurdly quick, being almost 15% faster than any other primary weapon. However, nerfs in Season 5 toned back the Superi 46’s mobility slightly, with key stats like sprint speed and movement speed being reduced. It’s still an extremely mobile weapon, but it no longer stands out so much that its mobility alone makes it absolute meta. As such, it has dropped down the rankings but remains a really good weapon nonetheless. TAQ Eradicator Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Conquer-70 Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Tacverte Core Stock – Magazine: 45 Round Mag – Unfortunately, most LMGs aren’t worth using in Modern Warfare 3. Even the seemingly huge buffs to the Pulemyot 762 in Season 5 Reloaded only made it viable at best, but still far from meta. However, there is one exception to this rule, the TAQ Eradicator. Introduced back in Season 1, the TAQ Eradicator has good damage, great range, and surprisingly fast handling for a machine gun. When built correctly, it feels good, like a heavy-duty assault rifle with a rapid rate of fire. Naturally, you don’t want to run and gun with this, but those who enjoy playing a little slower should see plenty of success with this loadout. XRK Stalker Barrel: Handler LKP Short Barrel – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Stock: Helix LV Light Stock – Ammunition: .50 Cal High Grain Rounds – Bolt: XRK Stalker Light Bolt – The world’s leading scientists couldn’t explain why the XRK Stalker was given such an absurd buff at the start of Season 5. They probably couldn’t explain why it wasn’t nerfed in Season 5 Reloaded either. Either way, this sniper rifle can now kill in one shot to any part of the body, making this an objectively superior version of the KATT-AMR. You can build the XRK Stalker for quickscoping and have a lot of success. Given that even a shot to the foot is now enough to secure kills, it’s not like you need to aim much anyway. This gun outclasses almost every sniper rifle, with the Kar98k remaining the only worthwhile alternative thanks to its faster handling. Best off-meta loadouts in Season 5 Reloaded These off-meta weapons aren’t necessarily favored by the community, but when used right, they are still seriously powerful and can even leave the best weapons outmatched. COR-45 Muzzle: HMRES Mod Suppressor – Barrel: XRK Pyre-9 Heavy Long Barrel – Ammunition: .45 Auto High Grain Rounds – Trigger Action: XRK Lightning Fire – Rear Grip: Tactical Grip Cover – The COR-45 was demolished at the start of Season 5 after Sledgehammer reduced its fire rate so much that it couldn’t outgun anything. However, this hasn’t just been reverted; the current version of this pistol is actually the best we’ve ever seen. With the XRK Lightning Fire trigger equipped, the COR-45 can now fire at 551 RPM, resulting in a close-range TTK of just 218 ms. If you have a good trigger finger and are skilled enough to keep the COR-45 on target, its damage cements this handgun’s place as the best secondary weapon in Modern Warfare 3. DM56 (JAK Signal Burst) Conversion Kit: JAK Signal Burst – Muzzle: T51R Billeted Brake – Underbarrel: XTEN Phantom-5 Handstop – Stock: Holger Recoil Pad – Magazine: 30 Round Mag – Most players don’t even know that this Aftermarket Part got a huge buff back in Season 4. The JAK Signal Burst AMP was stealth buffed, having its recoil reduced greatly, which makes those desirable one-burst kills a real possibility now. With MW3 having increased health, any gun that can kill in one burst is going to be strong, and this is no exception. So, what’s the catch? Consistency-wise, this attachment is hit or miss. While it can genuinely dominate lobbies, it can just as easily let you down. It’s a good gun, and burst weapon enthusiasts should give it a go, but don’t expect it to take over the meta anytime soon. Despite this, the DM56 is still the best burst gun in the game, beating out the M16, FR 5.56, and DG-56. FTAC Recon Muzzle: JAK BFB – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: XTEN Phantom-5 Handstop – Ammunition: .458 High Velocity – Magazine: 15 Round Mag – The FTAC Recon received the biggest buff of any weapon in Season 5 Reloaded, having its damage increased across the board. This has big implications for the MW2 gun when used in full auto mode, as its highly competitive TTK of 222 ms now stretches beyond 40 meters, making it one of the fastest-killing long-range weapons in the game. However, it isn’t necessarily meta. Some big issues include its small magazine capacity, high recoil, and sluggish handling, all of which prevent it from being top-tier. Even so, a gun with this much raw damage and range is hard to ignore, with the FTAC Recon being an underrated option that can excel in the hands of a skilled player. Lachmann Shroud (JAK Decimator) Conversion Kit: JAK Decimator – Laser: Kimura Ryl33 Laser Light – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Ammunition: 9mm Sub OP – The story of the Lachmann Shroud is a strange one. It is based on the MP5-SD, an integrally suppressed version of the MP5, which already exists as the Lachmann Sub. Why this version was released in MW2 as its own gun rather than just an attachment is unknown, but what makes the Shroud even weirder is that it was originally a burst weapon of all things. Sledgehammer fixed this by introducing the JAK Decimator, an Aftermarket Part that turns the Lachmann Shroud into the full-auto SMG it should have always been. It betters its cousin’s TTK and has great mobility but is let down by its weaker attachment pool, as is the case with so many other MW2 weapons. It’s still damn good, but it could have been truly great. M13B Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Bruen Flash V4 Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Ammunition: 5.56 NATO High Grain Rounds – Considering the M13B is best known for being a low-damage, high-accuracy weapon that was meta back in Warzone 2, you really wouldn’t expect it to be good in multiplayer. However, this MW2 assault rifle is incredibly strong, feeling a lot like the original MCW before it was nerfed. It is an extremely accurate weapon that literally anyone can pick up and dominate with. Despite this, it has a surprisingly fast TTK of just 284 ms. It’s not the absolute best MW3 has to offer, but considering how easy it is to use, the M13B outclasses a lot of its competitors. It’s just a shame that its attachment pool leaves a lot to be desired, with none of its stocks, barrels, or rear grips being viable. Renetti (JAK Ferocity Carbine Kit) Conversion Kit: JAK Ferocity Carbine Kit – Muzzle: ELR Blackfire Compensator – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: Ravage-8 – Magazine: 30 Round Mag – The Renetti is a secondary weapon, but in terms of performance, it competes with the best primaries in MW3. More specifically, it’s the Renetti with the JAK Ferocity Carbine Kit equipped that is so strong, transforming the burst weapon into a rapid-fire machine pistol. With this configuration, it has a TTK of 280 ms beyond 40 meters. That’s assault rifle range in a weapon that can fit in your pocket. This Conversion Kit does give the Renetti a lot more recoil and lowers its mobility, so it’s not flawless. Even so, this is a powerful secondary that offers a full-auto option for those who don’t fancy the COR-45. We don’t expect a nerf anytime soon either, as this conversion kit has gone multiple seasons without receiving any adjustments. SO-14 Muzzle; Quartermaster Suppressor – Optic: Corio Eagleseye 2.5x – Underbarrel: XTEN Phantom-5 Handstop – Ammunition: 7.62x51mm High Grain Rounds – Comb: PD-A40 Sleeve – In Modern Warfare 2, the SO-14 had one role and one role only: shooting down enemy streaks. It still works well for that to this day, but the overlooked battle rifle is also a great weapon in its own right. In semi-auto mode, this gun kills in three shots out to 36 meters, resulting in a phenomenal TTK of just 220 ms. There is a fairly substantial jump between its first shot and second shot, which does take some practice to master. However, beyond that, it has very little recoil, so landing that final decisive blow is easy enough. It won’t be for everyone, but if you enjoy semi-auto weapons that reward precision, the SO-14 is a good choice. Just do yourself a favor and don’t use full-auto mode; the recoil is unbearable. All guns in Modern Warfare 3 Below you’ll find a list of every gun that’s currently available in MW3, split up by weapon class, with links to guides on the best loadouts for each of them. MW3 Assault Rifles MW3 SMGs MW3 Battle Rifles MW3 LMGs MW3 Snipers MW3 Shotguns MW3 Marksman Rifles MW3 Handguns That’s all for the best guns in MW3, but you’ll also want to check out the best assault rifles to learn more about the meta. Furthermore, these are the best controller settings and PC settings to make sure your experience is properly optimized, and this full map list details multiplayer’s current offerings, so you know exactly what to expect.

Best MTZ Interceptor Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks It may have been nerfed but the MTZ Interceptor is still a great option in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded, especially with this optimized loadout that can dominate at every range. Following a nerf on January 11, the MTZ Interceptor has become slightly less dominant but is still one of the best weapons in Warzone. Another nerf has been confirmed to be coming in the “near future,” but until then it remains a top-tier weapon. The main strength of the MTZ Interceptor is that it’s laughably easy to use since it recenters perfectly between shots. This means you can spam-fire it to your heart’s content and rack up headshots and fast downs with ease. Even so, the MTZ Interceptor only reaches its true potential in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded with an optimized loadout like this one that we’ve put together for your convenience. Best MTZ Interceptor Warzone loadout Muzzle: VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor – Barrel: MTZ Longshot Pro Barrel – Optic: Corio Eagleseye 2.5x – Underbarrel: Bruen Pivot Vertical Grip – Magazine: 20 Round Mag – The main priority with the MTZ Interceptor is to maximize range while minimizing recoil. The two most impactful attachments for this are the Bruen Pivot Vertical Grip stock and MTZ Longshot Pro Barrel which when used together make the marksman rifle much more accurate. Continuing the theme of recoil and range, the VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor is an excellent attachment that not only bumps up those key stats but also silences the MTZ Interceptor. This keeps you off the minimap making it harder for enemies to find you. As with most Warzone guns, a larger magazine is beneficial to reduce the amount of reloads required and the biggest on the MTZ Interceptor is the 20 Round Mag. Finally, an easy-to-use medium to long-range optic like the Corio Eagleseye 2.5x is perfect for a precision weapon like this. MTZ Interceptor Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time Increases Tac Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand Reload faster. – – Perk 3: Quick Fix Killing players or inserting a plate immediately starts health regeneration. – – Perk 4: Resolute When taking damage from gunfire, provides a small bonus to movement speed. – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – As with most Warzone loadouts, Double Time is an excellent option that provides additional mobility by improving your Tactical Sprint. For Perk slot 2, Sleight of Hand lends itself well to the MTZ Interceptor by reducing the time it takes for you to reload. Quick Fix is practically a must as it will keep your health up as much as possible. You will be inserting a lot of armor plates into your vest throughout a match, which means this Perk is incredibly useful. Though there are several good options in Perk slot 4, Resolute stands out as giving you better speed to get out of a messy situation much quicker. The Throwing Knife is a good idea to have for quickly and quietly taking an enemy out. Then when you need to rotate or move a Smoke Grenade can be used to cover open areas that would otherwise be dangerous. How to unlock MTZ Interceptor in Warzone The MTZ Interceptor is an Armory Unlock which can be activated after reaching Level 25 and then completing five daily objectives. Alternatively, extracting with an MTZ Interceptor in Zombies will immediately unlock the marksman rifle letting you skip the grind entirely. Best alternative to MTZ Interceptor in Warzone Another top-tier marksman rifle is the extremely underrated KVD Enforcer. It offers comparable performance to the MTZ Interceptor albeit requiring slightly more work to produce the same results. Even so, it’s a fantastic weapon that we wouldn’t be surprised to see become meta. There are so many other options in the Warzone Season 4 Reloaded meta, so learn more about the MCW, Pulemyot 762, MTZ-556, and Holger 556.

Best MTZ Interceptor MW3 Loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThis is the MTZ Interceptor loadout you want to be using in MW3 Season 3 to turn the meta marksman rifle into a weapon that is both mobile yet still deadly at long range. The MTZ Interceptor is a fantastic marksman rifle that works wonders in both mid and long-range duels. It is most effective on big maps but can be surprisingly strong on small maps too if built to have fast handling and mobility. Therefore this loadout looks to optimize these stats and turn this meta DMR into a primary that can dominate on both small, fast-paced maps and larger, slower-paced ones alike. Here is the best MTZ Interceptor loadout to use in MW3 Season 3 to make the most out of this incredible precision weapon. Contents Best MTZ Interceptor MW3 loadout – Best MTZ Interceptor class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock MTZ Interceptor in MW3 – Best alternative for MTZ Interceptor in MW3 – Best MTZ Interceptor MW3 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Shadowstrike Suppressor L – Stock: MTZ Blackthorn Barrel – Optic: Quarters Classic Reflex – Barrel: DR-6 Handstop – Rear Grip: MTZ Factory Rear Grip – Something that makes the MTZ Interceptor so good is that it has practically no recoil. Its relatively slow fire rate ensures this marksman rifle perfectly recenters between shots even if fired as fast as possible. This unique trait means that improving recoil control isn’t important at all, unlike almost every other weapon in MW3. This allows you to stack attachments that play to the MTZ Interceptor’s strengths like the MTZ Blackthorn Barrel which massively boosts damage range. It’s a similar story with the MTZ Factory Rear Grip that improves Aiming Idle Sway and reduces Flinch when aimed in, both key stats for landing crucial headshots when under pressure. Since the MTZ Interceptor is a fairly slow-handling weapon you’ll definitely want to use an attachment that improves this stat like the DR-6 Handstop. This is especially important in MW3 as the pacing of this year’s multiplayer is very fast and you’ll be left behind if caught using a sluggish weapon. With the MTZ Interceptor being a precision weapon, it’s also a good idea to equip an optic with a clear reticle like the Quarter Classic Reflex to make landing headshots easier. Finally, the Shadowstrike Suppressor L keeps you from appearing on the enemy’s radar when firing which is great for remaining undetected and flanking with ease. Best MTZ Interceptor class: Perks & equipment Vest: Assassin Vest Immune to UAVs and enemy radar effects and kills don’t display skulls. – – Gloves: Marksman Gloves Reduces sway and flinch while ADS. – – Boots: Covert Sneakers Eliminates footstep sounds. – – Gear: Bone Conduction Headset Reduces player combat and environmental sounds to allow improved focus on hearing other footsteps. – – Lethal: Drill Charge Charge with a thermal lance that can burrow into surfaces before exploding. – – Tactical: Scatter Mine Throw a field of mines across a wide area that detonate when enemies come within range. – – Don’t fall into the trap of always hanging back and camping with the MTZ Interceptor. This marksman rifle is surprisingly well suited to flanking, especially thanks to that instant one-shot kill with a headshot that assault rifles and SMGs can only dream of. As such, it’s best to use perks that make flanking easier like Covert Sneakers and the Assassin Vest. These work particularly well with this loadout as the Shadowstrike Suppressor L stops shots from giving you away, and these two perks stop enemy UAVs and your footsteps from doing much the same. Even if you intend to play more aggressively, landing shots is still a must and the Marksman Gloves make that much easier to do. When partnered with the MTZ Factory Rear Grip on this loadout, the only factor that decides if you get a kill or not is your own skill. No excuses people! Finally, your equipment slots should be used on a Drill Charge to flush out enemies hiding in cover and a Scatter Mine to scout flanks and prevent opponents from getting the jump on you. How to unlock MTZ Interceptor in Modern Warfare 3 The MTZ Interceptor is unlocked through the Armory after reaching level 25 and either completing 5 Daily Challenges or winning 5 matches in multiplayer. Best MTZ Interceptor alternative in Modern Warfare 3 The best alternative for the MTZ Interceptor is the KVD Enforcer, the only other marksman rifle in MW3 capable of one-shot kills as long as you are precise and land headshots. After trying out this MTZ Interceptor loadout, consider using these alternative builds for other precision weapons: Best MW3 loadouts | Best MCW 6.8 loadout | Best DM56 loadout | Best Longbow loadout | Best XRK Stalker loadout

Best MTZ-762 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks The MTZ-762 continues to be a top choice for assault rifles in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. The high bullet damage and good range make up for the recoil and slower fire rate, when using the right attachments. The MTZ-762 has been hovering around the meta for some time, but the battle rifle has never quite been a top-tier option, and as its competition was dropped to lower tiers, it as stayed that way. After several of its competitors were hit by nerfs, the MTZ-762 became a more appealing option than ever before, finally making that jump into the meta. However, it isn’t the easiest weapon to use and a proper build is required to get the most out of it and take advantage of its incredible TTK. To help you do just that and dominate lobbies using the MTZ-762, we’ve put together this optimized loadout to use in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Best MTZ-762 Warzone loadout Muzzle: ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider – Barrel: MTZ-Precision Blackthorn Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – Magazine: 30 Round Mag – The MTZ-762 is known for its recoil, which can be unruly if not correctly. This is why the first attachment on this list is the ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider, which will reduce both vertical and horizontal recoil, while also improving the ADS speed. The MTZ-Precision Blackthorn Barrel is going to help improve the damage range and bullet velocity for the weapon while using the JAK Glassless Optic will help line up those long-range shots while giving some more ADS speed. However, this optic is also spectacular for short-range engagements as well with its excellent sightlines. The Bruen Heavy Support Grip is going to help with ADS speed, along with the horizontal recoil to further aid in lining up your shots. Finally, the 30 Round Mag gives you greater movement speed to help with mobility, while giving a slight hit to ADS speed, which is negligible. MTZ-762 Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time increases Tac Sprint and reduces refresh time – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand faster reloading – – Perk 3: Quick Fix start regenerating health when killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute gives you a boost of speed when hit with enemy shot – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Battle Rage – The Perks for this loadout are designed to keep you mobile and aware while on the battlefield. This starts with Double Time which is going to give you greater Tac Sprint duration to move around faster, which is going to be supplemented by the Sleight of Hand, which will let you reload much faster, which can be a lifesaver when under attack. Further, using Resolute is going to help you move faster when under fire. Quick Fix is going to help you keep your health up as much as possible by kickstarting the regeneration whenever you kill someone or insert a plate. How to unlock MTZ-762 in Warzone The MTZ-762 is unlocked through the Armory. After unlocking the Armory, activate the MTZ-762 and then complete 3 daily challenges. Alternatively, extracting with the battle rifle in Zombies will also unlock the weapon. Best alternative to MTZ-762 in Warzone Another battle rifle with a great TTK is the SOA Subverter, which is easy enough to use but struggles to have quite the same impact at long range. Even so, its superior handling makes it a better sniper support and more suited to an aggressive playstyle. There are a ton of Assault Rifles to choose from that excel in the Warzone Season 4 Reloaded meta, so learn more about the MCW, MTZ-556, Holger 556, and BP50.

Best MTZ-762 MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionCommunity members quickly crowned the BAS-B as the best Battle Rifle in MW3, but the MTZ-762 deserves more attention. Here is the best loadout for the underrated medium to long-range weapon. As the meta has changed with each seasonal update in MW3, battle rifles have stayed as some of the best weapons in the game, offering both short-range and long-rage capabilities when using the right attachments. A long-range dominant game has also opened the door for other weapons to excel. The MTZ 762 has emerged as one of the best battle rifles to use in the game. You just need to know how to customize the gun to bring out its best features. Contents Best MTZ-762 MW3 loadout – MTZ-762 MW3 loadout: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the MTZ-762 in Modern Warfare 3 – Best MTZ-762 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 – Best MTZ-762 MW3 loadout Muzzle: Shadowstrike Suppressor – Optic: Mk.3 Reflector – Stock: EXF Close Quarters Assault Stock – Underbarrel: SL Skeletal Vertical Grip – Magazine: 30 Round Mag – This loadout begins with the Shadowstrike Suppressor that is going to help you stay off of enemy radars, while also giving you more bullet velocity and damage range. ADS Speed is going to be helped with the EXF Close Quarters Assault Stock and will also reduce your vertical and horizontal recoil. Recoil is also aided by the SL Skeletal Grip, with the Mk.3 Reflector going to help you line up the right shot. The 30 Round Mag enables longer sustained fire, increasing your chances of landing shots accurately. MTZ-762 MW3 loadout: Perks & Equipment Modern Warfare 3 removes the traditional perk system in favor of using gear. Check out our full guide if you need an explainer of what each gear item does. Given the gun’s excellent performance in mid to long-range fights, you’ll want to gear up to complement those strengths. Vest: Infantry Vest increases the duration of your Tac Sprint – – Gloves: Commando Gloves reload while sprinting – – Boots Stalker Boots increases movement speed while strafing and aiming down sights – – Gear: Bone Conduction Headset improves the audio in a match so you can hear enemy gunfire and footsteps – – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Battle Rage – MW3 emphasizes mobility, requiring you to constantly move around the map as swiftly as possible to dominate matches. The Infantry Vest and Stalker Boots aid in maintaining mobility by extending sprint duration and allowing you to engage enemies without slowing down. Next up, the Commando Gloves enable you to reload while on the move, allowing you to evade enemy fire and quickly return to combat once you’re reloaded. Finally, the Bone Conduction Headset will make sure you know if an enemy is coming up on you so that you can be ready for them. How to unlock the MTZ-762 in Modern Warfare 3 The MTZ-762 is acquired as an Armory Unlock, first accessible after reaching Level 25. Once activated in the armory, you are required to complete 3 Daily Challenges. Alternatively, successfully extracting with a Sidewinder in Zombies will also unlock the weapon. Best MTZ-762 alternative in MW3 If the MTZ-762 doesn’t quite check every box for what you are looking for from a Battle Rifle, the Holger 556 has rapidly shot up the popularity charts and is considered one of the best Battle Rifles in MW3. That’s all for our MTZ-762 loadout in Modern Warfare 3. For more MW3 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Modern Warfare 3 AR class loadouts | How to slide cancel in Modern Warfare 3 | Best controller settings in Modern Warfare 3 | All maps & modes | How to play Modern Warfare 3 at 120 FPS on PS5

Best MTZ-556 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks The MTZ-556 has been one of the best assault rifles in Warzone since its buffs back in Season 3, and that remains the case for Season 4 Reloaded, especially if you use this meta loadout. For most of Warzone’s history, the MTZ-556 has been a decent but unspectacular option. The combination of its lower damage range and high recoil made it better suited to multiplayer’s meta than Warzone. However, the MTZ-556 has since received several consecutive buffs across both Season 4 and Season 4 Reloaded. These big boosts to damage range, damage multipliers, and bullet velocity have ensured the once-irrelevant AR is now a meta option. To make sure that you get the most out of this top-tier assault rifle, you’ll want to use this MTZ-556 loadout which can dominate any Warzone lobby. Best MTZ-556 Warzone loadout Here’s the best MTZ-556 loadout to make the meta AR excel at just about any range: Muzzle: Casus Brake – Barrel: MTZ Drifter Heavy Long Barrel – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – Stock: MTZ Marauder Stock – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – Bringing out the accuracy for the MTZ-556 is going to be the best part of this loadout, so you can land shots at long ranges. To do this, you’ll want to use the Casus Brake, which noticeably improves both recoil control and firing aim stability. Equally, the Bruen Heavy Support Grip provides even more vertical and horizontal recoil control, which will keep your shots stable when shooting at enemies from afar. This combination makes the MTZ-556 extremely accurate while retaining its above-average handling and mobility stats. To make sure those long-range shots are dealing enough damage to consistently down enemies, the MTZ Drifter Heavy Long Barrel is a must. This powerful barrel attachment boosts damage range and significantly boosts bullet velocity, making it much easier to take out enemy players from far away. Finally, the 50 Round Drum is the largest magazine attachment available on the MTZ-556. It’s a great option, as it allows you to keep firing without having to stop to reload. This attachment is especially important in Trios and Quads, where larger magazines are often necessary to take down the larger squads found in those modes. Best MTZ-556 Warzone class: Perks and equipment These are the best perks and equipment to use with the MTZ-556: Perk 1: Double Time – Increases Tac Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand – Reload faster. – Perk 3: Quick Fix – Killing players or inserting a plate immediately starts health regeneration. – Perk 4: Resolute – When taking damage from gunfire, provides a small bonus to movement speed. – Lethal: Sticky Grenade – Tactical: Battle Rage – Using Double Time will help you cover long distances faster, so you don’t get shot at while you run across open areas. If that alone doesn’t keep you alive, Resolute provides a reliable backup, letting you run faster when being shot at by any enemy squad. Similarly, you will be able to reload a lot faster with Sleight of Hand, which is always useful to avoid getting caught out reloading. The last recommended perk is Quick Fix, which immediately begins health regeneration after getting a kill or even just inserting an Armor Plate. As for equipment, a Sticky Grenade is a classic option that provides a strong lethal to pressure other teams with. Finally, Battle Rage is an underrated piece of equipment that improves several key stats while active, including Tactical Sprint refresh time, damage resistance, and tactical equipment resistance. How to unlock MTZ-556 in Warzone To unlock the MTZ-556, you need to reach Level 12 in either Warzone or multiplayer, which shouldn’t take long at all. After unlocking the MTZ-556, you’ll need to progress through 26 gun levels to access all of its unique attachments. Best alternative to MTZ-556 in Warzone While it isn’t an assault rifle, the SOA Subverter battle rifle excels at long-range thanks to its ease of use. It has been a solid choice in the meta for a few seasons now, offering comparable performance to the MTZ-556. If mobile assault rifles are more your thing, check out these loadouts for the SVA 545 and BP50. To learn more about Warzone as a whole, you’ll want to know all about the current meta, best assault rifles, and best sniper rifles to use.

Best MTZ-556 MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe MTZ-556 is a fantastic MW3 weapon that remains one of the strongest options to this day. To get the most out of the assault rifle you’ll need a meta class, so here’s the best MTZ-556 loadout to use in multiplayer. With all the new guns added like the BAL-27 in Season 3 Reloaded, it’s easy to forget how good MW3’s launch weapons are. That is very much the case with the MTZ-556 which has seen a decline in usage rates despite still being as competitive as ever. In fact, with the addition of several new attachments this AR-SMG hybrid is actually stronger now than before. It even received an unexpected buff at the start of Season 3 which saw the MTZ-556’s bullet velocity increase. All of this has led the weapon to climb the ranks for Season 4 Reloaded. Here’s the best MTZ-556 loadout to use in MW3 multiplayer to take over lobbies and outgun both SMGs and assault rifles alike. Best MTZ-556 MW3 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Casus Brake – Barrel: MTZ Clinch Pro Barrel – Rear Grip: Bruen TR-24 Assault Grip – Stock: JAK Cutthroat – Underbarrel: XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop – The MTZ-556 is best when built for mobility above all else. For this reason, it is essential to equip the JAK Cutthroat stock which provides the largest boost to ADS Movement Speed of any attachment in MW3. This gives the MTZ-556 strafe speeds comparable to SMGs and lets it thrive in those close to medium-range gunfights where it excels. You can make the MTZ-556’s mobility and handling even faster by using the XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop. This underbarrel not only boosts ADS Movement Speed but also improves key stats like ADS Speed and Sprint to Fire Speed. Just like wth the JAK Cutthroat, this helps it remain competitive against SMGs up close. Using the Casus Brake will give the MTZ 556 a wonderful increase to recoil control to keep it more manageable. The weapon already has solid range, so being able to control the recoil will only help in your efficiency from every range. This is further improved with the Bruen TR-24 Assault Grip which will give even more recoil control. The loadout is rounded out with the MTZ Clinch Pro Barrel to give the MTZ 556 a greater damage range and bullet velocity. Best MTZ-556 class: Perks and equipment Vest: Infantry Vest Increases Tactical Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – – Gloves: Assault Gloves While jumping, accuracy and time to ADS is improved. – – Boots: Stalker Boots Increase strafe and ADS movement speed. – – Gear: EOD Padding Reduces damage from non-killstreak enemy explosive and enemy fire. – – Lethal: Semtex Timed sticky grenade. – – Tactical: Stun Grenade Slows victim’s movement and aiming. – – Field Upgrade: Trophy System Plant it near you to destroy any explosives and enemy throwables near you – – The Infantry Vest increases your Tac Sprint duration and reduces its refresh time. This lets you play the run-and-gun style effectively which is suited to the MTZ-556’s strengths. Similarly, the Assault Gloves improve various stats while jumping while also boosting hipfire accuracy which helps you win more gunfights up close. Another great option is the Stalker Boots which increase ADS movement speed by 20%. This stacks with the JAK Cutthroat stock to make this MTZ-556 loadout incredibly mobile even for MW3’s fast-paced standards. Meanwhile, EOD Padding reduces damage taken from non-killstreak explosives. Given how prevalent grenades are in Modern Warfare 3 this is an essential perk. For Lethal, you can use a Semtex as it is great for sticking enemies in a cluster and scoring multiple kills. Partner that with a Stun Grenade which is used to immobilize enemy players and leave them unable to fight back. Finally, a Trophy System can be a useful tool for taking out enemy explosives so that you won’t have to worry about watching out for them. How to unlock the MTZ-556 in Modern Warfare 3 You can unlock the MTZ-555 in Modern Warfare 3 by reaching Level 12. This is an easy enough task that should only take you a few games at most. However, you’ll still need to progress through 26 gun levels to unlock all of the MTZ-556’s unique attachments. Best MTZ-556 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 MTZ-556 is a powerful close-range assault rifle, but it’s not the only one with the BP50 also filling a similar role. This is even more true with the JAK Revenger Kit equipped which transforms the meta assault rifle into a hypermobile SMG. Assault Rifles are some of the best weapons in the game, so be sure to learn more about the MCW and SVA 545.

Best MP7 Loadouts for Call of Duty: Warzone Infinity WardThe MP7 is a popular weapon in Modern Warfare and Warzone, but what are the best ways to run it in Verdansk? Here, we break down two of the strongest MP7 loadouts you can use. The MP7, while not considered that strong in regular multiplayer, has come to be one of the two most used SMGs in Warzone. Alongside the MP5, it has proved itself to be one of the best options for players, thanks to its high fire rate, manageable recoil and large ammo magazines. However, as seasoned players will know, Warzone and Modern Warfare are very different games, meaning different loadouts are needed. These Warzone loadouts will be more geared towards medium-range gunfights and accuracy – as opposed to fast ADS and handling. Best MP7 Loadouts for Warzone This first loadout is for less confident players, who may struggle to control the gun’s recoil more. It’s also more geared towards mid-range gunfights, so feel free to take a sniper as your secondary because you should be able to hold your own at most ranges (don’t challenge a Grau though – you’ll lose). First off, you’ll notice both the Monolithic Suppressor and the FSS Recon. These will both buff your damage range, and help to stabilize recoil. While ADS time is slowed considerably, it’s worth it for the viability at medium ranges you’ll gain. The Merc Foregrip will stabilize your shots even further, allowing you to stay on target when dealing with enemies further away. The G.I. Mini Reflex is one that can be easily swapped out – we’ve gone for it as it is the pro optic of choice, as well as being useable at various ranges. Finally, the FORGE TAC Ultralight will increase your strafing abilities while ADS, meaning you’ll be a harder target for enemies while in gunfights. There’s also no need for extended mags on this class, as the base MP7 comes with 40 rounds per mag. This second class is for more confident players, who are capable of controlling the gun’s modest recoil, even at longer ranges. We’d also recommend taking an AR as a secondary for this class, because this MP7 is less viable at longer ranges, but stronger up close. The Monolithic Suppressor stays, to keep you off the radar and help your range. However, the FSS Recon is swapped out for the FSS Strike. This will keep the buffs to your damage range and bullet velocity, but slightly reduces recoil control. Your handling, however, will improve. Similarly, the Merc Foregrip is swapped out for the Commando, seeing a big buff to handling and mobility, at the expense of recoil control. The Stippled Grip Tape will speed up your ADS for close-quarters engagements, with the FORGE TAC Ultralight ensuring you’re a fast-moving target with your sights up. Because this class is geared towards closer ranges, you’re best off using an AR in your second slot. The M4A1 or the Grau 5.56 are the best options, with the latter even being called overpowered. If you want to try out some different weapons in Warzone or even Multiplayer, check out our full list of best loadouts for every gun. While these classes are good starting points, feel free to mess around with them to fit your play-style and preferences. Be sure to tweet us @DexertoIntel to let us know how you get on!

Best Modern Warfare MP5 Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Treyarch/ActivisionThe Modern Warfare MP5 has made a resurgence in Warzone Season 5, particularly after a secret buff has made it a top-tier SMG in the meta. Warzone Season 5 is well underway and although the overall meta has been established with the Krig 6 and the Kar98k on top, there’s still a variety of SMGs that are perfect for those with an aggressive playstyle. While the MAC-10 remains the go-to SMG for the majority of Warzone players, the Modern Warfare MP5 has become an option for those who prefer mobility over raw fire rate. However, to get the most out of the weapon, it’s key you run the attachments that push the gun to its limits and give you the best opportunity to dominate your opponents. Contents Best Modern Warfare MP5 loadout for Warzone – Best MP5 setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the Modern Warfare MP5 in Warzone – Alternative to the MP5 loadout – Best Modern Warfare MP5 loadout for Warzone Attachments Barrel: Monolithic Integral Suppressor – Underbarrel: Merc Foregrip – Stock: FTAC Collapsible – Perk: Sleight of Hand – Ammunition: 10mm Auto 30-Round Magazine – First of all, it’s key you equip the Monolithic Integral Suppressor in the barrel slot for the huge boost in bullet velocity. On top of this, the attachment provides sound d suppression which is key when attempting to remain undetected on Verdansk. Next, ensure you’re running the Merc Foregrip to bolster the gun’s recoil and allow you to track targets in medium-range gunfights. Read More: Best C58 Warzone class loadout – After that, utilize the FTAC Collapsible Stock for a reduction in ADS time and the Sleight of Hand perk so you’re always able to reload in the middle of heated skirmishes. Finally, round off the setup with the 10mm Auto 30-Round Magazine. TrueGameData recently found that this attachment drastically increases the MP5’s TTK, making it one of the most powerful close-quarter guns in the game. Best MP5 setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Primary: FARA 83 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Our MP5 class utilizes all the standard meta Warzone perks. EOD helps keep you safe from explosive blasts, while Amped gives increased speed when swapping to your primary weapon. Due to the MP5’s lackluster range damage, the Overkill perk is a must for those that wish to be competitive across all ranges. Once you’ve secured your first loadout, we recommend switching to a class that has the Ghost perk. This will keep you hidden from any prying eyes and keep you safe from enemy UAV spam. Rounding things off at the bottom is the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor. Both these items are essential for those that enjoy aggressively pursuing enemy squads and flushing out pesky campers. How to unlock the Modern Warfare MP5 in Warzone Luckily, unlocking the Modern Warfare MP5 in Warzone is incredibly easy and should only take you a handful of matches. Instead of completing a difficult objective, players simply have to reach level 12 in either Warzone or Modern Warfare to unlock the lethal SMG. Alternative to the MP5 loadout While the recently buffed MP5 may be incredibly deadly, the MAC-10 is still one of the best SMGs in Warzone Season 5. This SMG features an amazing rate of fire, good damage, and incredibly accurate hip fire. Read More: Best PPSh Warzone class loadout – Not only is it a good alternative to the Modern Warfare MP5, but it also outshines it in a number of ways. If you want to use the best SMG in Warzone, then be sure to check out our MAC-10 loadout guide. So, there you have it, that’s the best MP5 loadout in Warzone’s current meta. Don’t forget to check out our Call of Duty homepage for all the latest news, guides, and leaks.

Best Cold War MP5 Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Activision / TreyarchCoD Warzone’s best Cold War MP5 loadout in Warzone Season 5 can make you imperious in close-combat situations, especially when you kit it out with the meta Attachments and Perks. While the Cold War MP5 may not be as popular as the Armaguerra 43 or PPSh-41 in Warzone Season 5, this deadly SMG can still be a formidable contender. If you’re looking to run and gun your way to victory or you’re just after an SMG that can shred through your foes, then the Cold War MP5 is a solid choice in Warzone Season 5. In order to help you get the most out of this gun, we’ve put together the following loadout you can use to dominate foes in the game. Contents Best Cold War MP5 build for Warzone – Best Cold War MP5 setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the Cold War MP5 in Warzone – Best Cold War MP5 loadout Warzone tips – Alternative Cold War MP5 loadout – Best Cold War MP5 loadout Warzone MP5 Best Attachments Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Laser: Tiger Team Spotlight – Grip: Bruiser Grip – Stock: Raider Stock – Ammunition: STANAG 50 Rnd drum – The best Cold War MP5 loadout is all about boosting the gun’s mobility and lethality at close ranges. It may not deal much damage in mid-to long-range engagements, but it absolutely shreds when used in close-quarter firefights. The Agency Suppressor increases the weapon’s recoil control while also completely removing the gun’s muzzle flash, making it a must for any player looking to beam down their foes with a large degree of stealth. See the latest Call Of Duty deals here The MP5 already has high damage and a fast TTK, so a barrel is sacrificed for attachments like the Bruiser Grip, Raider Stock, and Tiger Team Spotlight — all of which provide boosts to your mobility and ADS. Additionally, the STANAG 50 Rnd drum gives you plenty of ammunition to dismantle multiple enemies. Best Cold War MP5 setup in Warzone (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: EOD – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Cooper Carbine – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Just like most meta loadouts in Warzone Pacific, our best MP5 loadout utilizes both the EOD and Amped Perks. Outside of Overkill, both Perks are chosen because they increase your survivability and weapon swapping quickness. After all, reloading or slowing down mid-fight can often lead to some unwanted trips to the Gulag mid-game. Whereas the Overkill Perk enables the use of the extremely deadly Cooper Carbine loadout, which still remains one of the best Assault Rifles in Warzone Season 5. Lastly, both the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor help track down nearby enemies and obliterate camping squads with deadly explosive fire. Simply locate your target, throw in a Semtex, and rush in with your MP5 to claim a quick kill. How to unlock the Cold War MP5 in Warzone The Cold War MP5 is unlocked by reaching Rank 4. As both Warzone and Black Ops Cold War have synced progression, you’ll be able to easily unlock this lightning-fast SMG in no time at all. Now that you’ve basically gotten the weapon in your sleep, you’ll need to kit it out with the best MP5 Attachments to push it to its limits. Fortunately, the loadout above will send your enemies back to the spectator screen in no time. Best Cold War MP5 loadout Warzone tips The Cold War MP5 may have stiff competition due to the recent Warzone Season 4 buffs and nerfs, but this SMG is still more than capable of holding its own in-game. If you’ve been wanting to add this weapon to your arsenal, then we’ve got you covered. Here are some tips to ensure you dominate while using the Cold War MP5: As with most SMGs, this weapon is best suited for close-range gunfights. While it can put up a decent fight at mid-range, other Assault Rifles and even SMGs with better range will have the upper hand, which is why we suggest Overkill for a stronger backup option. – For an Assault Rifle, we recommend the STG44 or Cooper Carbine, and for the Sniper Rifle we recommend using the classics — either the Swiss K31 or the Kar98k. – The Heartbeat Sensor tactical is great for locating enemies that are in close proximity, even with its nerf in Warzone Pacific. If you suspect an enemy is nearby, use this equipment to pinpoint their exact location and let the Cold War MP5 do the rest. – Alternative Cold War SMG loadout While the Cold War MP5 may be incredibly fast, the MP40 is an alternative that offers a deadly TTK and incredible mobility. Although it’s no longer the must-use SMG it was in Season 4, the MP40 remains an extremely strong pick that will consistently win you gunfights. If you want to use the best SMG in Warzone, then be sure to check out our MP40 loadout guide. So, there you have it – that’s everything you need to know about the best Cold War MP5 loadout for Warzone Season 5. For more loadouts and tips on all things Warzone, check out our guides: Welgun | MP40 | Kar98k | PPSh-41 | AK-47 | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Highest-earning Warzone players If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Best MP5 loadout for Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War Activision / TreyarchCall of Duty: Black Ops Cold War may now have been overtaken as the most up-to-date CoD title, but it still has plenty of admirers. Find out which attachments you should equip to make the strongest MP5 loadout. Warzone demonstrated just how lethal the MP5 could be thanks to its incredible damage, high rate of fire, and ludicrous hipfire accuracy. While the MP5 continues to dominate both the casual and competitive CoD scene, Treyarch has made a number of changes to this ever-popular weapon. Whether the MP5 will be as influential in Black Ops Cold War remains to be seen, but early feedback suggests it’s still a force to be reckoned with. Unlike its predecessor, this iteration of MP5 has a drastically higher rate of fire and increased TTK. Despite these changes, the MP5 will still likely prove a popular choice for those that favor hyper-aggressive play and close-quarter firefights. In order to help you get the most out of the MP5 in Black Ops Cold War, we’ve moved past Scump’s Alpha loadout and, instead, shared what has become a popular version of the SMG. Best MP5 loadout for Black Ops Cold War Here’s the best attachments you can use on your MP5 in Cold War: Muzzle: Sound Suppressor – Barrel: 10.1” Cavalry Lancer – Body: Steady Aim Laser – Underbarrel: Foregrip – Magazine: 40 RND Drum – Handle: Speed Tape – Stock: Collapsed Stock – BOCW’s maps offer plenty of opportunities for players to flank behind enemy lines and secure some sneaky kills. This is particularly true in the 6v6 maps Miami and Satellite, where close quarter firefights are more likely to take place. Not only does this loadout, bolstered by the Gunfighter Wildcard, give you some spice in close quarters, but it’s also versatile enough to let you take out multiple enemies at once and counteract scorestreaks. First up is the Sound Suppressor. As the name suggests, this noise-reducing attachment keeps your shots concealed and your movements hidden. This handy muzzle is a must for those of you who wish to go unnoticed when creeping up on your targets and, after killing them, avoid being noticed on the revamped mini map. Meanwhile, the 10.1” Cavalry Lancer is an interesting option as Barrel because it can help counteract scorestreaks, which are oh so common in BOCW. But you can also opt for something like the 10.8″ Paratrooper, which greatly increases both the MP5’s bullet velocity and effective damage range. Looks like the MP5 is the dominant gun again in #BlackOpsColdWar… what a shocker 🤦pic.twitter.com/Ds90p83Wlr — Dexerto Esports (@DexertoEsports) November 12, 2020 Unlike vertical recoil, guns with a horizontal kick can be a little tricky to control. Landing shots in close-quarter skirmishes may be easy with the MP5, but trying to land your bullets at range can prove difficult. Fortunately, the Foregrip attachment reduces horizontal recoil by 15 percent. Those of you who have played Modern Warfare will know just how important sprint to fire is, especially when you’re playing on smaller maps where quick reactions are needed. The Collapsed Stock and Speed Tape make the MP5 a speed demon. Lastly, the 40-round mag means you can take out numerous enemies at once, without worrying about reloading. That is made substantially easier when you’re rocking the Steady Aim Laser, which essentially does what its name says it does. All in all, loadouts are subject to personal preference, but this MP5 class is a great one to get started with as you look to shred BOCW’s lobbies. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoIntel. Also, looking for more Warzone loadouts and tips? Check out our list of guides below: Welgun | Swiss K31 | MP40 | Cooper Carbine | Kar98k | PPSh-41 | AK-47 | STG44 | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Highest-earning Warzone players

Best MP40 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Treyarch/ActivisionThe MP40 has established itself as one of the most deadly Vanguard SMGs in Warzone, but which loadout and attachments should you use to maximize the weapon’s potential? Warzone Season 5 Reloaded was the game’s last update and introduced the final balance changes to Raven Software’s original battle royale. Although this means the meta is now stable, it’s still hard to know which guns are worth adding to your loadout list. Well, while the XM4, Cooper Carbine, and Grau 5.56 have stood out as the strongest ARs in the meta, it’s the MP40 that’s risen up as one of the best SMGs in Warzone. The gun not only has impressive damage, but it also provides the user with a huge amount of mobility which is essential in Warzone when attempting to hunt down opponents and rack up kills. However, to get the most out of the weapon you’ll need to run a meta loadout and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Remember, if you’re ready to dive into Warzone 2 and want to know which top-tier weapons to use, be sure to check out our list of the best meta weapons and loadouts to use in Warzone 2. See the latest Call Of Duty deals here. Contents Best MP40 Warzone loadout – Best MP40 Warzone class – How to unlock the MP40 in Warzone – Alternative to the MP40 Warzone loadout – Best MP40 Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: VDD 189mm Short – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Krausnick 33M Folding – Underbarrel: m1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 7.62 Gorenko 45 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip – Proficiency: Steady – Kit: Quick – First of all, you’ll want to equip the Recoil Booster muzzle and the VDD 189mm Short barrel to significantly increase the gun’s TTK and decrease its damage fall-off at range. These attachments balance each other out and ensure the MP40 melts through your opponents without too much kickback. After that, utilize the Krausnick 33M Folding, m1941 Hand Stop, and Stippled Grip to boost your overall mobility and decrease the gun’s recoil even further. Combined with the Slate Reflector optic, the setup will allow you to lock onto a target and land every single shot. When it comes to bullets, make sure you run Lengthened to maximize the gun’s TTK, as well as the 7.62 Gorenko 45 Round Mags so you can take multiple opponents without having to reload. Finally, round off the loadout with the Steady proficiency to increase your movement speed while aiming down sight and of course, the Quick perk so you’re always running around at max speed. This makes flanking enemies easy and prevents you from being caught out in the open by snipers. Best MP40 Warzone class Perks & Equipment When it comes to perks, our loadout runs the standard meta choices with EOD protecting you from explosive blasts, and Amped increasing your weapon swap speeds to either switch to another fully loaded weapon or top up your primary beast. We recommend taking Overkill instead of Ghost with the MP40 as the weapon doesn’t perform well at long-range, so having a Sniper like the ZRG 20mm or an STG44 AR is essential. If you’re not a fan of the STG44, the Grau 5.56, Cooper Carbine, NZ-41, and UGM-8 are all incredibly powerful. Finally, finish off the class with a Semtex to force enemies out of cover, or even stick one for an instant down, and a Stim to give you a boost of health in the middle of a feisty skirmish. How to unlock the MP40 in Warzone Unlocking the MP40 in Warzone and Vanguard is rather straightforward, as it only requires players to reach Rank 16 in the Pacific season. While we recommend reaching that level in Vanguard multiplayer as it’s quicker, it can easily be done in Warzone but it will take slightly longer. Alternative to the MP40 Warzone loadout While the MP40 may be a top-tier Vanguard SMG, the OTs-9 remains the popular pick for fans of Cold War. This powerful weapon is absolutely lethal at close-range and is perfect for players who prefer to take aggressive gunfights rather than hold a single position. Although the OTs-9’s pick rate certainly isn’t the highest in Season 5 Reloaded, it doesn’t mean the SMG doesn’t pack a punch. It’s especially potent on Rebirth Island where tight corridors and enclosed spaces mean players are forced to take close-range skirmishes. Similar to the MP40, it’s key you run Overkill alongside the OTs-9 or you’ll struggle to deal with opponents at long range. So, if the MP40 isn’t the right weapon for you, consider checking our dedicated OTs-9 loadout guide. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone and Vanguard news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page. For even more content, we have more guides for you below: Best warzone settings to increase FPS on PC| Most popular Warzone weapons | Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | MAC-10 loadout | Best Warzone loadouts | Top 20 highest-earning players

Best MP40 Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup ActivisionCall of Duty: Vanguard’s MP40 is a phenomenal SMG and it will help you to push the pace and keep you atop the scoreboard match after match in Season 5. From optimal attachments to the best equipment to use for the class, here’s all you need to know about this deadly SMG. As with every gun in Vanguard, equipping your favorite weapon is just the beginning. With 70 weapon levels of unique attachments and unlocks in the game, you’re left with hundreds of potential builds to truly craft your ideal tool of destruction in Call of Duty. With Vanguard’s Gunsmith feature, you have more options at your disposal than ever before. With up to 10 attachment slots on most weapons, the possible upgrades are immense. The MP40 SMG is no slouch and is capable of taking over matches with its impressive TTK and powerful mobility. From the best Ammo Types and Magazines down to the best weapon Proficiency and everything in between, here’s our rundown on the best MP-40 loadout in Vanguard Season 5. See the latest Call Of Duty deals here. Contents Best MP40 Vanguard loadout – Best MP40 Vanguard class – Best MP40 class Vanguard tips – How to unlock the MP40 in Vanguard – Alternative to the MP40 Vanguard loadout – Best MP40 Vanguard loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Krausnick 317MM 04B – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Krausnick 33M Folding – Underbarrel: Carver Foregrip – Magazine: 9MM 24 Round Fast Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip – Proficiency: Brace – Kit: Quick – With 10 categories to sift through, it can often be daunting trying to figure out where to start. So let’s break down each MP40 attachment to help you understand how this top-tier loadout works. Kicking things off we have the Recoil Booster in the Muzzle slot along with the Krausnick 317MM 04B Barrel and both attachments here serve a similar purpose in boosting recoil control and weapon handling. With these combined, your SMG should be beaming in close to mid-range fights. For the Optic, this one boils down to personal preference. We’ve settled on the Slate Reflector as something simple as there are no downsides to this option. If you’re looking down the list, just keep in mind that certain Optics have negative effects. Next up we have the Carver Foregrip Underbarrel, which also helps keep the MP40’s sizeable recoil in check. The SMG will always be devastating in close-quarters fights, but these extra boosts make it much more reliable on larger maps. A change in your Magazine option could also serve you well with the MP40, and the 9MM 24 Round Fast Mags are our pick. While they do slightly reduce the mag size, the boost in reload speeds more than makes up for it. When choosing your Ammo Type, there’s no reason not to settle on Lengthened rounds. Bullet Velocity is king in any CoD so this upgrade will have you killing foes considerably faster than usual. We settled on the Stippled Grip to add even more accuracy and aid the recoil recovery. In combination with the other attachments in this loadout, the MP40 becomes an absolute laser. Brace is arguably the strongest weapon Proficiency for any SMG as it allows your first couple of bullets to be more accurate which can be essential for living or dying. As your second added benefit through the Kit, Quick should be an insta-pick for this SMG class. With faster sprint speeds, you’ll be blitzing through any given map on your way to the next gunfight. Best MP40 Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Radar – Perk 3: Overkill – Secondary: Automaton – Lethal: Thermite Grenade – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Dead Drop – When it comes to building out the rest of your MP40 loadout, Perks, Equipment, and Field Upgrades are just as important as your gun’s attachments. If anything, players overlook them in favor of having a fully-loaded weapon. For Perks in this aggressive SMG class, there’s no looking past Ghost, to begin with. You’ll always be on the move, thus, you’ll always be hidden from enemy radars. It’s a tried and tested Perk that will help to secure your secrecy. Next comes Radar which reveals enemies using unsilenced weapons on the map. You’ll see their indicators on your minimap, allowing you to push up and go for the kill. This intertwines nicely with Ghost and buffers your stealth by punishing other players for not taking advantage of stealth. We always like having a solid weapon to fall back on if our primary one goes dry or needs a while to reload, so Overkill will give us this freedom. If you do so, slap on the Automaton as your secondary to mop up some enemies. Your Lethal, Tactical, and Field Upgrade choices are also vital. A Thermite Grenade causes varying degrees of damage and can be effective in any game mode, so it should be a must in your loadout. A Stim is also an absolutely necessary tool for any decent SMG build in Vanguard. Not only does it regenerate health in an instant, but it also replenishes your Tac Sprint, further improving your mobility and chances of success. As for your Field Upgrade, we feel Dead Drop is a game-changer as it gives you a chance to attain some of the game’s best Killstreaks. That’s a full rundown on our optimal MP40 loadout in Vanguard, but as patches come and go, stats are likely to change across the board. Rest assured, we’ll keep this loadout updated with the latest optimal attachments and equipment with each Vanguard update. Best MP40 class Vanguard tips The MP40 in Vanguard has been crowned the best SMG by several content creators and pros, even all these months later. However, to take full advantage of this loadout, you’ll have to understand how to effectively use it. Here are a few tips on how to maximize our best MP40 Vanguard loadout: This weapon is an SMG, your priority should be getting into close to medium-range engagements. – At extreme close ranges, hip-firing over aiming down the sights will be more effective. – The Ghost Perk will conceal you from the enemy mini-map, so don’t be afraid to be aggressive. – The use of “Stim” and “Double Time” paired with this MP40 class will allow you to be incredibly fast. Use this agility to enhance your movement. – Also, remember to always develop a playstyle that feels the best for you. With that said, if you’re still struggling to succeed with the MP40, these tips should be helpful. How to unlock the MP40 in Vanguard In order to unlock the MP40 in CoD Vanguard, you’ll need to reach Player rank 16. This shouldn’t take too long if you make use of Double XP tokens or play with the Assault and Blitz Combat Pacing. To maximize XP, also make sure to play the objective in game modes like Domination, Patrol, and Hardpoint. Alternative to the MP40 Vanguard loadout If you’re looking for an alternative to the MP40, then check out our M1928 loadout. This SMG may not be as popular as the MP40 in Vanguard, but its incredibly high rate of fire makes it one of the fastest-killing weapons in Vanguard. Keep in mind that its firing rate results in less accuracy at range. So, if you do choose to use this SMG, your priority should be getting into close-range gunfights. Looking for more Call of Duty: Vanguard updates and information? Check our list of guides below: Best CoD Vanguard FOV settings | Best M1928 Vanguard loadout | Every CoD Vanguard perk | Best STG44 loadout | Best Vanguard controller settings | How to unlock Atomic camo | Best Armaguerra 43 CoD Vanguard loadout | Best M1916 Vanguard class loadout | Best Nikita AVT Vanguard class loadout If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Best MORS Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe MORS returns to Call of Duty, and this iconic railgun is as strong as ever, so here’s the best MORS Warzone Season 4 Reloadedloadout to make the powerful sniper rifle as consistent as possible and maximize its damage output. Sniper Rifles are back in fashion with the Kar98k and XRK Stalker being some of the most popular weapons in Warzone. However, they aren’t your only options with the MORS also being excellent. This futuristic railgun offers impressive one-shot potential and some of the best handling of any sniper rifle. That’s a combination that has seen the MORS impress in the meta, even after receiving multiple nerfs. To make sure you are getting the most out of the powerful sniper rifle, you’ll want to use this meta loadout in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Best MORS Warzone loadout Here’s the best MORS loadout to make the futuristic railgun capable of one-shot downs at any range: Barrel: Tonne Heavy Barrel – Stock: Icarus Light Stock – Ammunition: HVP Anti-Materiel Slug – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Sight – Bolt: Quick Bolt – The MORS is best when you prioritize damage range and handling. To maximize its range, you must use the HVP Anti-material Slug ammunition, which greatly increases how far out the MORS can down enemy players in a single shot. Similarly, the Tonne Heavy Barrel provides a sizable boost to bullet velocity, making it much easier to land headshots at long range. These two attachments turn the MORS into a great Warzone sniper, offering a nice middle ground between the KATT-AMR and XRK Stalker. With its damage range optimized, you’ll want to turn your attention to improving the MORS’ mobility and handling. For this, there is no better attachment than the Icarus Light Stock, which massively boosts several key stats including ADS Speed and makes the weapon far more mobile. Then equip the SL Razorhawk Laser Sight to further improve the gun’s accuracy and precision at the small cost of a hit to ADS Speed. Finally, the Quick Bolt speeds up the sniper rifle’s fire rate, which is great for situations where a second follow-up shot is necessary. Best MORS Warzone class: Perks and equipment Perk 1: Double Time Increases Tac Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand Reload faster. – – Perk 3: Cold-Blooded Undetectable by thermal optics, Tactical Cameras, and Recon Drones. Does not trigger High Alert and Combat Scout – – Perk 4: Birdseye Your UAV Killstreak, Portable Radar, or UAV Tower shows the heading of the enemy for your squad and detects players using Ghost. – – Lethal: Proximity Mine – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – As is usually the case, Double Time is the best Perk 1 with the additional Tactical Sprint duration it gives being priceless when moving around the map. Regardless of whether you are trying to escape or chasing someone down, this is undoubtedly a top-tier perk. For Perk 2, Sleight of Hand is uniquely strong on the MORS as this Warzone sniper has to reload between every shot. This perk speeds up all of those reloads effectively boosting its fire rate, stacking with the Quick Bolt. Cold-Blooded stands out as the best Perk 3 as it prevents High Alert from triggering, making it much more difficult for enemy players to avoid your opening shot. You’ll want to combine that with Birdseye, which provides you the ability to see enemies on your radar even if they are trying to hide with certain Perks and equipment. A Proximity Mine is a good choice for the lethal slot as it can be placed down to shut down flanks and secure additional downs. As for the tactical slot, a Smoke Grenade is never a bad option as it can be placed down to produce cover and escape safely even in the most tense moments. How to unlock the MORS in Warzone To get the MORS in Warzone, activate it in the Armory and complete 5 daily challenges or win 5 matches. Previously, it was acquired by completing Sector 4 of the Season 3 Battle Pass. However, this option was removed once Season 4 started. Best MORS alternative in Warzone A great alternative to the MORS is the XRK Stalker, another powerful sniper rifle capable of one-shotting enemies up to a certain range. Though the XRK Stalker has better handling, the MORS’ superior damage output makes it easier to use. That’s all for the best MORS loadout in Warzone. For more meta sniper rifles, check out these KATT-AMR and KV Inhibitor classes. Alternatively, see what assault rifles and SMGs are meta right now to figure out what to partner with your sniper.

Best MORS MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionAn old favorite of Call of Duty multiplayer is back with the MORS making its first appearance since Advanced Warfare. The futuristic sniper rifle is as excellent as ever and this is the best MORS MW3 loadout possible to get the most out of it. Ever since Modern Warfare 3’s launch, sniper rifles have been dominant in multiplayer. From the Longbow to the XRK Stalker, this year’s Call of Duty has some unbelievable snipers that outgun just about everything. The MORS is the latest addition to that list, bringing with it a literal railgun that hits hard and has fantastic handling. Early signs suggest that it is one of the best guns in MW3, especially with an optimized class. This is the best MORS MW3 loadout that you’ll want to use, built to make the sniper rifle handle much faster while not taking away its ability to consistently one-shot enemies. Contents Best MORS MW3 loadout – Best MORS MW3 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the MORS in MW3 – Best MORS alternative in MW3 – Best MORS MW3 loadout Attachments Barrel: Downfall Light Barrel – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Optic: MORS Dot Sight – Stock: Superlite-90 Stock – Bolt: Quick Bolt – As with all snipers in multiplayer, the MORS needs to have fast handling to be viable. Since it starts as a somewhat slow-handling weapon, the majority of attachments on this build focus on improving key stats like ADS speed and sprint-to-fire time. Using all three of the Downfall Light Barrel, SL Razorhawk Laser Light, and Superlite-90 Stock massively improves these key stats, making the MORS handle significantly faster. This is fantastic for the fast-paced gameplay typical of Modern Warfare 3. It’s also well worth taking advantage of the MORS Dot Sight, a unique optic in MW3 that gives the MORS a projected red dot sight. This is one of the best optics in MW3, providing a fantastic reticle and further hastening the sniper’s ADS speed. Last but not least is the Quick Bolt, a bolt attachment that bumps up the railgun’s chambering speed. Since the MORS has to rechamber between every shot, this speeds up its fire rate making it more forgiving to use for when you happen to miss a shot. Best MORS class: Perks & equipment Vest: Demolition Vest – Gloves: Marksman Gloves – Boots: Climbing Boots – Gear: High-Gain Antenna – Lethal: Drill Charge (x2) – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Though there are a few good options in the vest slot, the Demolition Vest is the best as the utility provided by the constantly regenerating equipment helps cover up the MORS’ weaknesses. To best take advantage of this use Drill Charges and a Flash Grenade as these give you plenty of options to go on the offensive. When using an MW3 sniper like the MORS you cannot go wrong with the Marksman Gloves. These reduce sway and flinch while aiming to make your shots much more consistent and easier to land. The Climbing Boots also lend themselves well to a sniper as they increase the speed at which you can mantle and climb. This lets you take high-ground positions faster and have better sightlines to take advantage of the MORS’ excellent damage range. Added in Season 3, the High-Gain Antenna gear furthers this playstyle by zooming out your minimap, giving you better intel on where the other team is located. Being able to judge spawn rotations faster using this perk is key to effortlessly earning killstreaks and winning more matches. How to unlock the MORS in MW3 The MORS can be unlocked by completing Sector 4 of the Season 3 Battle Pass. Reaching and finishing this sector will require you to first grind out 15 Battle Pass Tokens. Best MORS alternative in MW3 Though there are several viable sniper rifles in Modern Warfare 3, the Longbow stands out as the best thanks to its unbelievable handling and mobility. It requires a little more precision than the MORS but is worth the trade-off if you are confident in your aim. That’s all you need to know about the best MORS MW3 loadout. Check out these guides for more top-tier classes: Best MW3 loadouts | Best XRK Stalker loadout | Best KATT-AMR loadout | Best Longbow loadout | Best KV Inhibitor loadout | Best MTZ Interceptor loadout | Best KVD Enforcer loadout | Best TYR loadout